Owner's Manual

OWNER’S MANUAL Altea 5P0012720BC Inglés (11.14)

5P0012720BC (11.14) (GT9)

Inglés Altea About this manual ® All registered marks are indicated with This manual is divided into five large parts, ®. Although the copyright symbol does which are: This manual contains a description of the not appear, it is a copyrighted mark. 1. Safety equipment supplied with the vehicle at the >> The section is continued on the follow- 2. Operation time this manual was published. Some of the ing page. 3. Tips units described herein will not be available until a later date or are only available in cer- WARNING 4. Technical data tain markets. Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor- 5. Alphabetical index Because this is a general manual for the mation on safety. They warn you about possi- At the end of this manual, there is a detailed ALTEA range, some of the equipment and ble dangers of accident or injury. alphabetical index that will help you quickly functions that are described in this manual find the information you require. are not included in all types or variants of the CAUTION model; they may vary or be modified depend- Texts with this symbol draw your attention to ing on the technical requirements and on the potential sources of damage to your vehicle. market; this is in no way deceptive advertis- ing. For the sake of the environment The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment fitted Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele- in your vehicle in some details. vant information concerning environmental protection. The steering indications (left, right, forward, SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under- reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the Note stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. cept when otherwise indicated. Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error * The equipment marked with an aster- or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. isk* is fitted as standard only in certain Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. versions, and is only supplied as op- SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act. tional extras for some versions, or are only offered in certain countries. All rights on changes are reserved. ❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.14 If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board WARNING Foreword documentation to the new owner, as it should be kept with the vehicle. Read and always observe safety informa- This Instruction Manual and its correspond- tion concerning the passenger's front air- ing supplements should be read carefully to You can access the information in this man- bag ››› page 25, Important information familiarise yourself with your vehicle. ual using: regarding the front passenger's airbag. Besides the regular care and maintenance of ● Thematic table of contents that follows the the vehicle, its correct handling will help pre- manual’s general chapter structure serve its value. ● Alphabetical index with many terms and For safety reasons, always note the informa- synonyms to help you find information. tion concerning accessories, modifications and part replacements.

Table of Contents

Electric windows ...... 72 Parking aid acoustic system* ...... 140 Table of Contents Sliding/tilting sunroof* ...... 74 Cruise speed* (cruise control system - CCS) . . . 142 Lights and visibility ...... 75 Towing bracket device ...... 144 Safety ...... 5 Lights ...... 75 Trailer towing ...... 144 Safe driving ...... 5 Interior lights ...... 82 Safety first! ...... 5 Advice ...... 147 Visibility ...... 83 Advice about driving ...... 5 Care and maintenance ...... 147 Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper Proper sitting position for occupants ...... 6 systems ...... 84 Accessories and technical modifications . . . . . 147 Pedal area ...... 11 Rear vision mirrors ...... 86 Care and cleaning ...... 148 ...... 11 Seat belts Seats and head restraints ...... 88 Care of the vehicle exterior ...... 149 The reason why we should wear seat belts . . . 11 Adjusting the seat and head restraints ...... 88 Caring for the vehicle interior ...... 153 How to properly adjust your seatbelt ...... 14 Seat functions ...... 91 Checking and refilling levels ...... 158 Seat belt tensioners ...... 16 Rear seats ...... 92 Fuel ...... 158 ...... 17 Airbag system Transport and practical equipment ...... 93 Petrol ...... 159 Brief introduction ...... 17 Compartments ...... 93 Diesel ...... 160 Airbag overview ...... 20 Multi-purpose mobile storage compartment* . 96 LPG system (Liquefied petroleum gas)* ...... 160 Deactivating airbags ...... 23 Ashtray*, cigarette lighter* and power sockets 98 Working in the engine compartment ...... 163 ...... 24 Transporting children safety First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher 100 Engine oil ...... 166 Safety for children ...... 24 Luggage compartment ...... 101 Cooling system ...... 169 Child seats ...... 26 Roof carrier/rack system* ...... 104 Windscreen washer reservoir ...... 171 Brake fluid ...... 172 Operation ...... 31 Air conditioning ...... 107 Vehicle battery ...... 173 Dash panel ...... 31 Heating ...... 107 Wheels ...... 175 Overview ...... 31 Climatic* ...... 109 Wheels and tyres ...... 175 Instruments ...... 32 2C-Climatronic* ...... 112 Winter service ...... 180 Warning lamps ...... 35 General notes ...... 116 Emergencies ...... 181 Digital instrument panel display ...... 47 Driving ...... 117 Vehicle tools, spare wheel ...... 181 Instrument panel menus* ...... 50 Power steering (servotronic*) ...... 117 Wheel change ...... 182 Steering wheel controls* ...... 57 All-wheel drive* ...... 117 Tyre repair ...... 186 General information ...... 57 Driving with LPG* ...... 118 Jump-starting ...... 189 Audio system ...... 57 Journeys abroad ...... 120 Towing and tow-starting ...... 191 Radio navigation system ...... 61 Ignition lock ...... 120 Emergency locking and unlocking ...... 193 Opening and closing ...... 63 Braking and parking ...... 123 Changing the wiper blades ...... 194 Central locking ...... 63 Manual gearbox ...... 126 Fuses and bulbs ...... 196 Keys ...... 66 Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gearbox* . 127 Fuses ...... 196 Radio frequency remote control ...... 67 Run-in and economical driving ...... 130 Changing the lights ...... 198 Anti-theft alarm system* ...... 68 Driver assistance systems ...... 134 Boot hatch ...... 71 Braking and stability systems ...... 134 Start-Stop System* ...... 138 3 Table of Contents

Technical specifications ...... 207 Technical features ...... 207 Important information ...... 207 Information on fuel consumption ...... 208 Towing a trailer ...... 209 Wheels ...... 210 Engine specifications ...... 211 Dimensions and capacities ...... 221 Index ...... 223

4 Safe driving

– Ensure that all windows provide a clear and cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as Safety good view of the surroundings. others on the road ››› , for this reason: – Make sure all luggage is secured – Always pay attention to traffic and do not Safe driving ››› page 101. get distracted by passengers or telephone calls. Safety first! – Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals. – Never drive when your driving ability is im-

paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs). specifications Technical – Adjust front seat, head restraint and rear vi- WARNING sion mirrors properly according to your – Observe traffic laws and speed limits. size. ● This manual contains important informa- – Always reduce your speed as appropriate tion about the operation of the vehicle, both – Ensure that the passengers in the rear for road, traffic and weather conditions. for the driver and the passengers. The other seats always have the head restraints in sections of the on-board documentation also – When travelling long distances, take the in-use position ››› page 10. Advice contain further information that you should breaks regularly - at least every two hours. be aware of for your own safety and for the – Instruct passengers to adjust the head re- – If possible, avoid driving when you are tired safety of your passengers. straints according to their height. or stressed. ● Ensure that the onboard documentation is – Protect children with appropriate child kept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe- seats and properly applied seat belts WARNING cially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person. ››› page 24. When driving safety is impaired during a trip, – Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct the risk of injury and accidents increases.

your passengers also to assume a proper Operation sitting position. ››› page 6. Advice about driving – Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your Safety equipment passengers also to fasten their seat belts Before setting off Never put your safety or the safety of your properly. ››› page 11. passengers in danger. In the event of an acci- For your own safety and the safety of your dent, the safety equipment may reduce the passengers, always note the following points risk of injury. The following list includes most before every trip: What affects driving safety? of the safety equipment in your SEAT: Safety – Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn As a driver, you are responsible for yourself ● Three-point seat belts signals are working properly. and your passengers. When your concentra- ● belt tension limiters for the front and rear tion or driving safety is affected by any cir- – Check tyre pressure. side seats, » 5 Safety

● Belt tensioners for the front seats Proper sitting position for mend the following adjustments for the driver: ● Belt height adjustment for the front seats occupants ● Front airbags – Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the ● Side airbags in the front seat backrests Correct sitting position for driver steering wheel and the centre of your chest ● Head-protection airbags ››› Fig. 1. ● Active front head restraints* – Move the driver seat forwards or backwards ● “ISOFIX” anchorage points for child seats so that you are able to press the accelera- in the rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” sys- tor, brake and clutch pedals to the floor tem, with your knees still slightly angled ››› . ● height-adjustable front head restraints, – Ensure that you can reach the highest point ● rear head restraints with in-use position of the steering wheel. and non-use position, – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper ● adjustable steering column. edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same The safety equipment mentioned above Fig. 1 The proper distance between driver level as the top of your head ››› Fig. 2. works together to provide you and your pas- and steering wheel sengers with the best possible protection in – Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- the event of an accident. However, these tion so that your back rests completely safety systems can only be effective if you against it. and your passengers are sitting in a correct – Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 11. position and use this equipment properly. – Keep both feet in the footwell so that you Safety is everyone's business! have the vehicle under control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver seat ››› page 88.

WARNING Fig. 2 Correct head restraint position for the ● An incorrect sitting position of the driver driver. can lead to severe injuries. ● Adjust the driver seat so that there is at For your own safety and to reduce the risk of least 25 cm distance between the centre of injury in the event of an accident, we recom- 6 Safe driving the chest and the centre of the steering Adjusting the steering wheel position ● To avoid accidents, the steering column wheel ››› Fig. 1. If you are sitting closer than should be adjusted only when the vehicle is 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you stationary. properly. ● Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so ● If your physical constitution prevents you that there is a distance of at least 25 cm be- from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 tween the steering wheel and your chest cm, contact a specialised workshop. The ››› Fig. 1. If you fail to observe the minimum workshop will help you decide if special spe- distance, the airbag will not protect you. Risk specifications Technical cific modifications are necessary. of fatal injury. ● When driving, always hold the steering ● If your physical constitution does not allow wheel with both hands on the outside of the you to maintain the minimum distance of ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. 25 cm, contact a Technical Service. The Tech- This reduces the risk of injury when the driver nical Service will help you to decide if certain airbag is triggered. specific modifications are necessary. Advice ● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 ● If you adjust the steering wheel so that it o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. Fig. 3 Adjusting the steering wheel position. points towards your face, the driver airbag in the centre of the steering wheel). In such will not protect you properly in the event of cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sus- The height and reach of the steering wheel an accident. Make sure that the steering tain injuries to the arms, hands and head. can be freely adjusted to suit the driver. wheel points towards your chest. ● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver – Adjust the driver seat to the correct posi- ● When driving, always hold the steering during sudden braking manoeuvres or an action. wheel with both hands on the outside of the cident, never drive with the backrest tilted far ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. back! The airbag system and seat belts can – Push the lever under the steering column Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 Operation only provide optimal protection when the ››› Fig. 3 down ››› . o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. backrest is in an upright position and the – Adjust the steering wheel until the correct in the centre of the steering wheel, or on the driver is wearing his or her seat belt correct- inside of the rim). In such cases, if the airbag position is set ››› Fig. 1. ly. is triggered, you may sustain injuries to your ● Adjust the head restraint properly to ach- – Then push the lever up again firmly ››› . arms, hands and head. ieve optimal protection. WARNING Safety ● Incorrect use of the steering column adjustment function and an incorrect seating position can result in serious injury.

7 Safety

Correct sitting position for front than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect Correct sitting position for passengers passenger you properly. in the rear seats ● If your physical constitution prevents you For your own safety and to reduce the risk of from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a injury in the event of an accident, we recom- cm, contact a specialised workshop. The sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident, mend the following adjustments for the front workshop will help you decide if special spe- passengers on the rear seat bench must con- passenger: cific modifications are necessary. sider the following: – Move the front passenger seat back as far ● Always keep your feet in the footwell when – Sit up straight. as possible ››› . the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An – Adjust the head restraint to the correct po- – Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- incorrect sitting position exposes you to an sition ››› page 10. tion so that your back rests completely increased risk of injury in case of a sudden – Always keep both feet in the footwell in against it. braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due front of the rear seat. – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper to an incorrect sitting position. – Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 11. edge is at the same level as the top of your ● To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas- head, or as close as possible to the same – Use an appropriate child restraint system senger in events such as sudden braking ma- level as the top of your head . when you take children in the vehicle ››› page 9 noeuvres or an accident, never travel with the ››› page 24. – Always keep both feet in the footwell in backrest tilted far back! The airbag system front of the front passenger seat. and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright po- WARNING – Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 11. sition and the front passenger is wearing his ● If the passengers in the rear seats are not or her seat belt properly. The further the seat It is possible to deactivate the front passen- sitting properly, they could sustain severe in- backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater juries. ger airbag in exceptional circumstances. the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning ● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting po- Adjusting the front passenger seat to achieve maximum protection. . sition! ››› page 89 ● Seat belts can only provide optimal protec- ● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order tion when seat backrests are in an upright to achieve maximum protection. WARNING position and the vehicle occupants are wear- ● An incorrect sitting position of the front ing their seat belts correctly. If passengers In passenger can lead to severe injuries. the rear seats are not sitting in an upright position, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi- ● Adjust the front passenger seat so that tioning of the seat belt increases. there is at least 25 cm between your chest and the dash panel. If you are sitting closer 8 Safe driving

Correct adjustment of front seat head ward at the same time. This movement re- tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan- restraints duces the distance between the occupant's tially reduce the protective function of seat head and the head restraint, thus reducing belts and increase the risk of injury due to in- the risk of injuries such as whiplash. correct seat belt position. As the driver, you are responsible for all passengers, especially WARNING children. ● Travelling with the head restraints removed – Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect Technical specifications Technical or improperly adjusted increases the risk of sitting position in the vehicle while travel- severe injuries. Improper adjustment of the ling ››› . head restraints may cause death in an accident and increase the risk of suffering inju- The following list contains examples of sit- ries during abrupt breaking actions or unex- ting positions that could be dangerous for ve- pected manoeuvres. hicle occupants. The list is not complete, but ● Advice Fig. 4 Correctly adjusted head restraint as The head restraints must always be adjus- we would like to make you aware of this is- viewed from the front and the side. ted according to the height of the passenger. sue.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- Note Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion: portant part of passenger protection and can The active head restraints* could also be trig- ● Never stand in the vehicle. reduce the risk of injuries in most accident gered if a vehicle occupant applies a high lev- ● Never stand on the seats. situations. el of pressure to the seat backrest (e.g. by ● Never kneel on the seats. – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper “falling” back into the seat when entering the edge is, as far as possible, at the same lev- vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front ● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear. Operation el as the top of your head, or at the very seat head restraint from the rear. This acci- ● Never lean against the dash panel. dental activation is, however, not dangerous, least, at eye level ››› Fig. 4. as the active head restraints will return to the ● Never lie on the rear bench. Adjusting the head restraints ››› page 88 original position immediately and are thus ● Never sit on the front edge of a seat. once again ready. ● Never sit sideways. Active head restraints* ● Never lean out of a window.

Vehicle occupants are pressed into their ● Never put your feet out of a window. Safety seats during a rear-end collision. The result- Examples of incorrect sitting ● ing body pressure on the seat backrest acti- positions Never put your feet on the dash panel. vates the active head restraint* on the front ● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat. » seat, which moves rapidly forward and up- Seat belts can provide optimal protection only when the belt webs are properly posi- 9 Safety

● Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot- Correct adjustment of rear seat head Rear outer seat head restraints well. restraints – The rear outer seat head restraints have 3 ● Never travel without wearing the seat belt. positions. ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug- – Two positions for use ››› Fig. 5. In these po- gage compartment. sitions, the head restraints are used normally, and along with the rear seat belts, WARNING protect passengers in the rear seats. ● Any incorrect sitting position increases the – And one position for non-use. risk of severe injuries. ● Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the – To fit the head restraints in position for use, vehicle occupants to severe injuries if airbags pull on the edges with both hands in the are triggered, by striking a vehicle occupant direction of the arrow. who has assumed an incorrect sitting position. Fig. 5 Head restraints in the correct position. Centre rear head restraint ● Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop- – The centre head restraint only has two posi- er sitting position and maintain it throughout tions, in-use (head restraint up) and non- the trip. Before every trip, instruct your pas- use (head restraint down). sengers to sit properly and to stay in this position during the trip ››› page 6, Proper sitting WARNING position for occupants. ● Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the head restraints are in the non-use position. See the warning label located on the rear side fixed window ››› Fig. 6. ● Fig. 6 Head restraint position warning label. Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat rear head re- Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- straints. Risk of injury in case of an accident! portant part of passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in most accident CAUTION situations. Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints ››› page 90.

10 Seat belts

Pedal area ● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor cov- Seat belts erings over the original floor mats. This Pedals would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals, leading to a risk of acci- The reason why we should – Ensure that you can always press the accel- dent. wear seat belts erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired ● Never place objects in the driver footwell. to the floor. An object could move into the pedal area and Number of seats impair pedal operation. In the event of a sud- specifications Technical – Ensure that the pedals can return unim- den driving or braking manoeuvre, you will Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front paired to their initial positions. not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ac- and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped celerator pedal. Risk of accident! – Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas- with a three-point seat belt. tened during the trip and do not obstruct In some versions, your vehicle is approved the pedals ››› . only for four seats. Two front seats and two Advice Only use floor mats which leave the pedals rear seats. clear and which are secured to prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor WARNING mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten- ● Never transport more than the permitted ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells. amount of people in your vehicle. If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must ● Every vehicle occupant must properly fas- be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an the vehicle. Operation appropriate child restraint system. Wearing suitable shoes Always wear shoes which support your feet Seat belt warning lamp*  properly and give you a good feeling for the pedals. The control lamp illuminates to remind the driver to fasten his or her seat belt.

WARNING Safety Before starting the vehicle: ● If the pedals are obstructed, an accident may occur. Risk of serious injuries. – Fasten your seat belt securely. »

11 Safety

– Instruct your passengers to fasten their Seat belt protection is so important to fasten seat belts before ev- seat belts properly before driving off. ery trip, even when "just driving around the corner". – Protect children by using a child seat according to the child's height and weight. Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics have shown The control lamp  on the instrument panel that wearing seat belts is an effective means 1) lights up if the driver's seat belt is not fas- of substantially reducing the risk of serious tened when the ignition is switched on. injury and improving the chances of survival If, when starting to drive, the speed surpass- when involved in an accident. Furthermore, es 25 km/h (15 mph) approx. and no seat properly worn seat belts improve the protec- belt is worn or it is unfastened during the tion provided by airbags in the event of an drive, a warning sound will be heard for a few accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt seconds. The warning light will also flash . Fig. 7 Drivers with properly worn seat belts is required by law in most countries. The  lamp goes out when the seat belt is will not be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking Although your vehicle is equipped with air- fastened with the ignition switched on. bags, the seat belts must be fastened and Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants worn. The front airbags, for example, are only in the proper position. They also help prevent triggered in some cases of head-on collision. uncontrolled movements that may result in The front airbags will not be triggered during serious injury and reduce the risk of being minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci- sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air- dent. bag trigger threshold value in the control unit is not exceeded. Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the Therefore, you should always wear your seat belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front part belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants of your vehicle and other passive safety fea- have fastened their seat belts properly before tures (such as the airbag system) are also de- you drive off! signed to absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together, all these features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of injury. This is why it

1) Depending on the model version 12 Seat belts

Safety instructions on using seat because this could cause injuries in the case Head-on collisions and the laws of belts of an accident. physics ● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or – Always wear the seat belt as described in jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges. this section. ● Never wear the seat belt under the arm or – Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened in any other incorrect position.

at all times and are not damaged. ● Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat specifications Technical over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and func- WARNING tion of the seat belts, reducing their capacity to protect. ● If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe or fatal injuries in- ● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be creases. The optimal protection from seat blocked with paper or other objects, as this

belts can be achieved only if you use them can prevent the latch plate from engaging se- Advice properly. curely. Fig. 8 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently ● Fasten your seat belt before every trip - ● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or even when driving in town. The other vehicle similar items to alter the position of the belt occupants must also wear the seat belts at all webbing. times, otherwise they run the risk of being in- ● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the jured. connections, belt retractors or parts of the ● The seat belt cannot offer its full protection buckle could cause severe injuries in the if the seat belt is not positioned correctly. event of an accident. Therefore, you must

check the condition of all seat belts at regular Operation ● Never allow two passengers (even children) intervals. to share the same seat belt. ● Seat belts which have been worn in an acci- ● Always keep both feet in the footwell in dent and stretched must be replaced by a front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in specialised workshop. Renewal may be nec- motion. essary even if there is no apparent damage. Fig. 9 The unbelted passenger in the rear ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi- The belt anchorage should also be checked. seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury. ● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat driver wearing a seat belt. ● The seat belt must never be twisted while it belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- Safety is being worn. moved or modified in any way. It is easy to explain how the laws of physics ● The seat belt should never lie on hard or ● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the work in the case of a head-on collision: When fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) retractors may not work properly a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy » ››› page 157. 13 Safety

called “kinetic energy” is created both in the Even at low speeds the forces acting on the How to properly adjust your passengers and inside the vehicle. body in a collision are so great that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. seatbelt The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers the speed of the vehicle and the weight of are thrown forward and will make violent con- Fastening and unfastening your seat the vehicle and its passengers. The higher tact with the steering wheel, dash panel, the speed and the greater the weight, the belt windscreen or whatever else is in the way more energy there is to be “absorbed” in an ››› Fig. 8. accident. It is also important for the rear passengers to The most significant factor, however, is the wear seat belts properly, as they could other- speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles wise be thrown forward violently through the from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in (30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki- the rear seats who do not use seat belts en- netic energy is multiplied by four. danger not only themselves but also the front Because the vehicle occupants in our exam- occupants ››› Fig. 9. ple are not restrained by seat belts, in the event of crashing against a wall, all of the occupants' kinetic energy will be absorbed solely by said impact. Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on the body in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are even higher. Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on Fig. 10 Positioning and removing the seat collision, they will move forward at the same belt buckle. speed their vehicle was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to head-on collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.

14 Seat belts

securely locked with an audible click WARNING ››› Fig. 10 A. ● The seat belts offer best protection only ● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is when the backrests are in an upright position securely engaged in the buckle. and the seat belts have been fastened properly. The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full free- ● Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will dom of movement is permitted when the specifications Technical not protect you properly and the risk of injury shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur- is increased. ing sudden braking, during travel in steep areas or bends and during acceleration, the ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi- automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is cle is in motion. If you do, you increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries. locked.

● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause se- Advice The automatic belt retractors on the front vere injuries in the event of an accident. seats are fitted with seat belt tensioners ● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie ››› page 16. on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snug- Seat belt release ly on the torso ››› Fig. 11. ● Press the red button on the belt buckle ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The Fig. 11 Placing the seat belt in the shoulder ››› Fig. 10 B. The latch plate is released and seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pel- and pelvis area for pregnant women. springs out ››› . vis ››› Fig. 11. Pull the belt tight if necessary Operation ● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls to take up any slack. Fastening the seat belt up easily and the trim is not damaged. ● For pregnant women, the lap part of the The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if seat belt must lie as low as possible over the Seat belt position the seat belt is not positioned correctly. pelvis, never across the stomach, and always Seat belts offer their maximum protection on- lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the ● Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly. ly when they are properly positioned. abdomen. ● To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch ● Always engage the retractor lock when you plate and pull it slowly across your chest and The following features are available to adjust Safety the seat belt in the shoulder region: are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 lap. ››› page 24. ● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the ● belt height adjustment for the front seats. ● Read and observe the warnings ››› page 13. appropriate seat and push it down until it is ● front seat height adjustment*. 15 Safety

Adjusting the seat belt height Seat belt tensioners Service and disposal of belt tensioners How the seat belt tensioner works The belt tensioners are components of the During a frontal collision, the seat belts on seat belts that are installed in the seats of the front seats are retracted automatically. your vehicle. If you work on the belt tensioners or remove and install parts of the system The seat belts for the occupants in the front when performing other repair work, the seat seats are equipped with belt tensioners. Sen- belt may be damaged. The consequence may sors will trigger the belt tensioners only dur- be that, in the event of an accident, the belt ing severe head-on, lateral and rear-end colli- tensioners function incorrectly or not at all. sions and only if the seat belt is worn. The tensioners retract and tighten the seat belts, So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten- Fig. 12 Location of the belt height adjuster. reducing the forward motion of the occu- sioner is not reduced and that removed parts pants. do not cause any injuries or environmental Seat belt height adjusters can be used to ad- pollution, regulations, which are known to just the position of the seat belt in the front The seat belt tensioner can be triggered only the specialised workshops, must be ob- seats at the shoulder depending on a per- once. served. son's height. The seat belt tensioners will not be triggered – Press the upper part of the shoulder belt in the event of a light frontal, side or rear col- WARNING guide and hold it in this position ››› Fig. 12. lision, if the vehicle overturns or in situations ● Improper use or repairs not carried out by where no large forces act on the front, side or – Move the shoulder belt guide up or down qualified mechanics increase the risk of se- rear of the vehicle. until you have adjusted the seat belt vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong cir- ››› page 14. Note cumstances. – After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt ● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a ● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or sharply to check that the catch on the fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is install parts of the belt tensioners or seat shoulder belt guide is engaged securely. not an indication of fire in the vehicle. belts. ● The relevant safety requirements must be ● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto- observed when the vehicle or components of matic retractor cannot be repaired. the system are scrapped. Specialised work- ● Any work on the belt tensioners and seat shops are familiar with these regulations, belts, including the removal and refitting of which are also available to you. system parts in conjunction with other repair

16 Airbag system work, must be performed by a specialised Airbag system thrown forward into the area of the deploying workshop only. airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occu- ● The belt tensioners will only provide pro- Brief introduction tection for one accident and must be changed pant. This also applies to children. if they have been activated. Always maintain the greatest possible dis- Why wear a seat belt and assume the tance between yourself and the front airbag. correct sitting position? This way, the front airbags can completely Technical specifications Technical deploy when triggered, providing their maxi- For the inflating airbags to achieve the best mum protection. protection, the seat belt must always be worn The most important factors that will trigger properly and the correct sitting position must an airbag are: the type of accident, the angle be assumed. of collision and the speed of the vehicle. Advice The airbag system is not a substitute for seat Whether or not the airbags are triggered de- belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration overall passive safety system. Please bear in rate resulting from the collision and detected mind that the airbag system can only work ef- by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration fectively when the vehicle occupants are occurring during the collision and measured wearing their seat belts correctly and have by the control unit remains below the speci- adjusted the head restraints properly. There- fied reference values, the front, side and/or fore, it is most important to wear the seat curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take in- belts at all times, not only because this is re- to account that the visible damage in a vehi- Operation quired by law in most countries, but also for cle involved in an accident, no matter how your safety ››› page 11, The reason why we serious, is not a determining factor for the should wear seat belts. airbags to have been triggered. The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so if you are not properly seated when the air- WARNING bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- ● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assum- ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle ing an incorrect sitting position can lead to Safety occupants assume a correct sitting position critical or fatal injuries. while travelling. ● All vehicle occupants, including children, Sharp braking before an accident may cause who are not properly belted can sustain critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be » 17 Safety

Children up to 12 years old should always ● a control lamp for disabling/enabling the ● If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, travel on the rear seat. Never transport chil- front passenger airbag. have the system checked immediately by a dren in the vehicle if they are not restrained specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a or the restraint system is not appropriate for The airbag system operation is monitored frontal collision the system might not trigger their age, size or weight. electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- correctly or may fail to trigger at all. luminate for a few seconds every time the ig- ● If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if you nition is switched on (self-diagnosis). lean forward or to the side while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is Airbag activation a substantially increased risk of injury. This There is a fault in the system if the control lamp : increased risk of injury will be further in- The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within creased if you are struck by an inflating air- ● does not light up when the ignition is thousandths of a second, to provide addi- bag. switched on ››› page 19, tional protection in the event of an accident. ● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating ● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition A fine dust may develop when the airbag de- airbag, always wear the seat belt properly is switched on ploys. This is normal and it is not an indica- ››› page 11. tion of fire in the vehicle. ● ● Always adjust the front seats properly. turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on The airbag system is only ready to function ● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is when the ignition is on. Description of airbag system moving. In special cases of an accident, several airbags may activate at the same time. The airbag system is not triggered if: The airbag system mainly comprises (as per In the event of minor head-on and side colli- vehicle equipment): ● the ignition is switched off sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll- ● an electronic control and monitoring sys- ● there is a minor frontal collision over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate. tem (control unit) ● there is a minor side collision Activation factors ● frontal airbags for driver and passenger, ● there is a rear-end collision The conditions that lead to the airbag system ● side airbags, ● the vehicle turns over. activating in each situation cannot be gener- ● curtain (head) airbags, alised. There are some factors that play an WARNING ● a control lamp  on the dash panel important role, such as the properties of the ››› page 19. ● The seat belts and airbags can only provide object the vehicle hits (hard/soft), angle of ● a key-operated switch for front passenger maximum protection if the occupants are impact, vehicle speed, etc. airbag, seated correctly ››› page 6, Proper sitting position for occupants. The deceleration trajectory is key for airbag activation. 18 Airbag system

The control unit analyses the collision trajec- Control lamp for airbag and seat belt you should have a specialised workshop tory and activates the respective restraint tensioner  check the system immediately. system. If any of the airbags are disabled by a Techni- If the deceleration rate is below the prede- The control lamp monitors all airbags and cal Service, the warning lamp flashes for sev- fined reference value in the control unit the seat belt tensioners in the vehicle, including eral more seconds after verification and will airbags will not be triggered, even though control units and wiring connections. turn off if there is no fault. the accident may cause extensive damage to Technical specifications Technical the car. Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner WARNING system ● If there is a malfunction, the airbag and The following airbags are triggered in Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems belt tensioner system cannot properly per- serious head-on collisions operation is constantly monitored electroni- form its protective function. ● Driver airbag. cally. Each time the ignition is switched on, ● If a malfunction occurs, have the system

the control lamp  illuminates for several Advice ● Front passenger front airbag. checked immediately by a specialised work- seconds (self-diagnosis) and the instrument shop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, panel display* shows AIRBAG/TENSIONER. the airbag system and belt tensioners may The following airbags are triggered in not be triggered, or may not be triggered cor- serious side-on collisions The system must be checked when the rectly. ● Front side airbag on the side of the acci- control lamp  : dent. ● does not light up when the ignition is ● Rear side airbag on the side of the acci- switched on, dent. ●

turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition Operation ● Curtain airbag on the side of the accident. is switched on ● turns off and then lights up again after the In an accident with airbag activation: ignition is switched on ● the interior lights switch on (if the interior ● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is light switch is in the courtesy light position); moving. ● the hazard warning lights switch on; In the event of a malfunction, the warning ● all doors are unlocked; lamp remains on continuously. In addition, Safety ● the fuel supply to the engine is cut. depending on the malfunction, a fault message appears on the instrument panel display for approximately 10 seconds and a short audible warning is given. In this event, 19 Safety

Airbag overview In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the driver and the front Front airbags passenger additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a severe frontal collision. The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propellant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag. After the collision, the airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.

WARNING ● The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly ››› page 6, Proper sitting position for occupants. ● The deployment space between the front Fig. 14 Front passenger airbag in the dash passengers and the airbags must not in any panel. case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects. The front airbag for the driver is located in ● The airbags provide protection for just one the steering wheel ››› Fig. 13 and the airbag accident; replace them once they have de- Fig. 13 Driver airbag in the steering wheel. for the front passenger is located in the dash ployed. panel ››› Fig. 13. Airbags are identified by the ● It is also important not to attach any ob- word “AIRBAG”. jects such as cup holders or telephone The airbag covers fold out of the steering mountings to the surfaces covering the air- wheel and dash panel respectively when the bag units. driver and front passenger airbags are trig- ● Do not attempt to modify components of gered ››› Fig. 14. The airbag covers remain the airbag system in any way. connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.

20 Airbag system

Side airbags* In conjunction with the seat belts, the side ● The built-in coat hooks should be used only airbag system gives the front seat occupants for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any additional protection for the upper body in heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. the event of a severe side collision. ● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, In a side collision, the side airbags reduce must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- the risk of injury to passengers on the front ster because the system may be damaged. In seats to the areas of the body facing the im- this case, the side airbags would not be trig- Technical specifications Technical pact. In addition to their normal function of gered. protecting the occupants in a collision, the ● Under no circumstances should protective seat belts also hold the passengers in the covers be fitted over seats with side airbags front seats and the outer rear seats in a posi- unless the covers have been approved for use tion where these airbags can provide maxi- in your vehicle. Because the airbag is trig- Fig. 15 Side airbag in driver seat. gered from the side of the backrest, the use

mum protection. Advice of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously reducing the air- WARNING bag's effectiveness ››› page 147. ● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean ● Any damage to the original seat upholstery forward, or are not seated correctly while the or around the seams of the side airbag units vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk must be repaired immediately by a special- of injury if the side airbag system is triggered ised workshop. in an accident. ● The airbags provide protection for just one ● In order for the side airbags to provide their accident; replace them once they have de- maximum protection, the prescribed sitting ployed. Operation position must always be maintained with ● Any work on the side airbag system or re- seat belts fastened while travelling. moval and installation of the airbag compo- Fig. 16 Inflated side airbag on left side of ve- ● Occupants of the outer seats must never nents for other repairs (such as removal of hicle. carry any objects or pets in the deployment the front seat) should only be performed by a space between them and the airbags, or al- specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may The side airbags are located in the backrest low children or other passengers to travel in occur during the airbag system operation. cushions of the driver seat ››› Fig. 15 and the this position. It is also important not to at-

● Do not attempt to modify components of Safety tach any accessories (such as cup holders) to front passenger seat and the rear side air- the airbag system in any way. bags are mounted in the rear wheel housing. the doors. This would impair the protection ● The locations are identified by the text “AIR- offered by the side airbags. The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the BAG” in the upper region of the backrests front doors. To ensure the correct operation of and in the rear wheel housing lining. the side and curtain (head) airbags neither » 21 Safety

the doors nor the door panels should be Head-protection airbags* additional protection for the head and upper modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeak- body in the event of a severe side collision. ers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work car- WARNING ried out on the front door must be done in a ● In order for the head-protection airbags to specialised workshop. provide their maximum protection, the pre- ● In a side collision, the side airbags will not scribed sitting position must always be main- work, if the sensors do not correctly measure tained with seat belts fastened while travel- the pressure increase on the interior of the ling. doors, due to air escaping through the areas ● For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must with holes or openings in the door panel. be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a ● Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels screen dividing the interior of the vehicle. have been removed. Fig. 17 Location of head-protection airbags See a Technical Service to make this adjust- ● Never drive if the interior door panels have on the left side of the vehicle ment. been removed or if the panels have not been ● There must be no other persons, animals or correctly fitted. objects between the occupants of the outer ● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers seats and the deployment space of the head- in the door panels have been removed, un- protection airbags so that the head-protec- less the holes left by the loudspeakers have tion airbag can deploy completely without re- been closed properly. striction and provide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have ● Always check that the openings are closed not been expressly approved for use in your or covered if additional loudspeakers or other vehicle may not be attached to the side win- equipment are fitted inside the door panels. dows ››› page 147. ● Any work carried out to the doors should be ● The built-in coat hooks should be used only made in an authorised specialised workshop. for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any Fig. 18 Deployed head-protection airbags. heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hang- The head-protection airbags are located on ers. both sides in the interior above the doors ● The airbags provide protection for just one ››› Fig. 17 and are identified with the text accident; replace them once they have de- “AIRBAG”. ployed. In conjunction with the seat belts, the head- protection airbag system gives the occupants 22 Airbag system

● Any work on the head-protection airbag Deactivating airbags If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front system or removal and installation of the air- passenger seat, the front passenger front airbag components for other repairs (such as re- Front passenger front airbag bag must be de-activated. moval of the roof lining) should only be per- When the front passenger airbag is deactiva- formed by a specialised workshop. Other- deactivation ted, only the front airbag is deactivated. All wise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation. the other airbags in the vehicle remain activated. ● Do not attempt to modify components of specifications Technical the airbag system in any way. Disabling the front passenger front airbag ● The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the – Switch the ignition off. front doors. To ensure the correct operation of – Open the glove compartment on the front the side and curtain airbags, neither the passenger side. doors nor the door panels should be modified Advice in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the – Insert the key into the slot of the switch for front door is damaged, the airbag system deactivating the front passenger airbag may not work correctly. All work carried out Fig. 19 In the glove compartment: Switch for ››› Fig. 19. About 3/4 of the key should en- on the front door must be done in a special- activating and deactivating the front passen- ter, as far as it will go. ised workshop. ger airbag – Then turn the key gently to the OFF position. Do not force it if you feel resistance, and make sure you have inserted the key

fully. Operation – Check that the control lamp, “OFF”, on the instrument panel ››› Fig. 20 remains lit when the ignition is switched on ››› .

Activating the front passenger front airbag – Switch the ignition off. Safety – Fig. 20 Control lamp for deactivated front Open the glove compartment on the front passenger airbag. passenger side. – Insert the key into the slot of the switch for deactivating the front passenger airbag » 23 Safety

››› Fig. 19. About 3/4 of the key should en- ● When the front passenger front airbag is Transporting children safety ter, as far as it will go. deactivated, if the control lamp AIRBAG OFF – Then turn the key gently to the ON position. is not continuously lit up, there may be a Safety for children Do not force it if you feel resistance, and fault in the airbag system: make sure you have inserted the key fully. – Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a specialised workshop. Introduction – Check that the control lamp on the instru- – Do not use a child seat on the front pas- ment panel Fig. 20 does not light up For safety reasons, as we have learned from ››› senger seat! The front passenger front accident statistics, we recommend that chil- when the ignition is switched on ››› . airbag could be triggered in the event of an accident, even if there is a fault in the dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear WARNING system and, as a result, a child could sus- seats. Depending on their age, height and weight, children travelling in the rear seat ● It is the driver's responsibility to ensure tain serious or fatal injuries. must use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety that the key-operated switch is set to the cor- – It is unpredictable whether the front pas- rect position. senger airbag will deploy in the event of reasons, the child seat should be installed in the rear seat, behind the front passenger ● You should deactivate the front passenger an accident. Warn all your passengers of seat or in the centre back seat. front airbag only if you have to use a rear-fac- this. ing child seat in exceptional cases ● When using the ignition key to activate/de- The physical laws involved and the forces ››› page 24, Transporting children safety. activate the front passenger front airbag, on- acting in a collision apply also to children ● Never install a child seat facing backwards ly the front passenger airbag will be activa- ››› page 13. But unlike adults, children do not on the front passenger seat unless the front ted/deactivated. The side airbag and head have fully developed muscle and bone struc- passenger front airbag has been disabled. airbag on the passenger side will remain ac- tures. This means that children are subject to Otherwise, there is a risk of death. tive. a greater risk of injury. ● As soon as the child seat is no longer nee- To reduce the risk of injuries, children must ded on the front passenger seat, enable the always use special child restraint systems front passenger front airbag again. when travelling in the vehicle. ● Only deactivate the front passenger front airbag when the ignition is off, otherwise a We recommend the use of child safety prod- fault may occur in the airbag system, which ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro- could cause the airbag to not deploy properly gramme, which includes systems for all ages or not deploy at all in case of an accident. made by “Peke” (not for all countries). ● Never leave the key in the airbag deactiva- These systems have been especially de- tion switch as it could get damaged or acti- signed and approved, complying with the vate or deactivate the airbag during driving. ECE-R44. regulation.

24 Transporting children safety

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative- observe any statutory requirements when in- ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa- stalling and using child seats. Always read bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 23. and note ››› page 25. When transporting children, use a child seat suitable for the age and size of each child We recommend you always carry the manu- ››› page 24. facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual together with the on-board documentation. WARNING specifications Technical ● If a child seat is secured to the front pas- Important information regarding the senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- Fig. 22 On the rear frame of the passenger ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an front passenger's airbag side door: airbag sticker. accident increases. ● An inflating front passenger airbag can A sticker with important information about Advice strike the rear-facing child seat and project it the passenger airbag is located on the pas- with great force against the door, the roof or senger's sun visor and/or on the passenger the backrest. side door frame. Read and always observe ● Never install a child seat facing backwards the safety information included in the follow- on the front passenger seat unless the front ing chapters: passenger front airbag has been disabled. ● Safety distance with respect to the passen- Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca- ger airbag ››› page 17. ses, to transport a child in the front passen- ● Objects between the passenger and the ger seat, the front passenger front airbag Operation Fig. 21 Passenger's side sun visor: airbag passenger side airbag ››› in Front airbags must always be disabled ››› page 23, Front sticker. on page 20. passenger front airbag deactivation. If the front passenger seat has a height adjustment The passenger side front airbag, when activa- option, move it to the highest position. ted, is a serious risk for a child who is facing ● For those vehicles that do not include a key backward since the airbag can strike the seat lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi- with such force that it can cause serious or cle must be taken to a Technical Service. fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old Safety ● All vehicle occupants, especially children, should always travel on the rear seat. must assume the proper sitting position and Therefore we strongly recommend you to be properly belted in while travelling. » transport children on the rear seats. This is 25 Safety

● Never hold children or babies on your lap, ● When a child seat is mounted in the rear Child seats that have been tested and ap- this can result in potentially fatal injuries to seats, the door child-proof lock should be ac- proved under the ECE R44 standard bear the the child! tivated ››› page 66. test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle ● Never allow a child to be transported in a with the test number below it). vehicle without being properly secured, or to Follow the manufacturer's instructions and stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. Child seats observe any statutory requirements when in- In an accident, the child could be flung stalling and using child seats. through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries to themselves and to the other vehicle Categorisation of child seats into We recommend you to always include the occupants. groups manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual ● If children assume an improper sitting posi- together with the on-board documentation. tion when the vehicle is moving, they expose Use only child seats that are officially ap- themselves to greater risk of injury in the proved and suitable for the child. WARNING event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an Read and always observe information and accident. This is particularly important if the Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE- R 44. ECE-R stands for: Economic Commis- warnings concerning the use of child seats child is travelling on the front passenger seat ››› page 25. and the airbag system is triggered in an acci- sion for Europe Regulation. dent; as this could cause serious injury or The child seats are grouped into 5 catego- even death. ries: ● A suitable child seat can protect your child! Ways to secure a child seat ● Group 0: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9 Never leave a child alone in the child seat You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or or inside the vehicle because depending on months) front passenger seat in the following ways: the season, very high temperatures may be Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18 reached inside a parked vehicle, which could ● months) Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured be fatal. with a seat belt. ● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall Group 1: From 9 to 18 kg (up to around 4 ● Child seats for groups 0, 0+ and 1 can be must not wear a normal seat belt without a years old) fastened without seatbelts, using the “ISO- child seat, as this could cause injuries to the FIX” and Top Tether* system, using the “ISO- abdominal and neck areas during a sudden Group 2: From 15 to 25 kg (up to around 7 FIX” and Top Tether* securing rings braking manoeuvre or in an accident. years old) ››› page 27. ● Only one child may occupy a child seat ››› page 26, Child seats. Group 3: From 22 to 36 kg (over around 7 years old)

26 Transporting children safety

Seating position U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group. Weight Front Rear side Rear cen- group *: Move the front passenger seat as far passen- seat tral seat back as possible, as high as possible ger seat and always disable the airbag. Group 0 U* U U to 10 kg WARNING Technical specifications Technical ● Group 0+ U* U U When travelling, children must be secured to 13 kg in the vehicle with a restraint system suitable for age, weight and size. Group I U* U U ● Read and always observe information and 9 to 18 kg warnings concerning the use of child seats

Group II U* U U ››› page 25. Advice 15 to 25 kg

Group III U* U U 22 to 36 kg

Child seats fastened with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system Operation Safety

Fig. 23 ISOFIX securing rings. Fig. 24 Top Tether* securing ring. »

27 Safety

Child seats with the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* heard to engage securely. If the child seat they are secured to the rear floor. Access to system can be secured quickly, easily and is equipped with Top Tether* anchor points, the “ISOFIX” rings is between the rear seat safely on the rear outer seats. secure it to the correspondent ring backrest and the seat cushioning. The Top ››› Fig. 24. Follow the manufacturer's in- Tether* rings are located at the rear of the When removing or fitting the child seat, structions. backrests of the rear seats (behind the seat please be sure to follow the manufacturer's backrest or in the boot). instructions. – Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure. Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* – Move the rear seat as far to the rear as it attachment system are available from Techni- will go. Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on cal Services. – Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re- each rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings taining rings until the child seat can be are secured to the seat frame and in others

Vehicle Isofix positions Weight group Size class Electrical equipment Mounting direction Rear side seats

F ISO/L1 Backward-facing X Baby carrier G ISO/L2 Backward-facing X

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU

E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU

Group 0+ to 13 kg D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU

C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU

D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU

C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU

Group I 9 to 18 kg B ISO/F2 Forward-facing IU

B1 ISO/F2X Forward-facing IU

A ISO/F3 Forward-facing IU

Group II 15 to 25 kg ------Forward-facing ---

28 Transporting children safety

Vehicle Isofix positions Weight group Size class Electrical equipment Mounting direction Rear side seats

Group III 22 to 36 kg ------Forward-facing ---

IU: Suitable for ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this Technical specifications Technical weight group X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.

WARNING Advice ● The retaining rings are designed only for use with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* child seats. ● Never secure other child seats without the “ISOFIX”, Top Tether* system, nor retaining belts or objects to the fastening rings; otherwise this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child. Operation ● Ensure that the child seat is secured correctly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* securing rings. Safety

29 Operation

Fig. 25 Dash panel.

30 Dash panel Operation 9 Horn (works only when the ignition – Tyre pressure control* ...... 43 is on)/ Driver front airbag ...... 17 – Park Pilot* ...... 140 10 Windscreen wiper lever and opera- – Cigarette lighter/Power socket . . 98 Dash panel tion of the multi-function display* .84, 52 – Exterior mirror adjustment ...... 87 11 Left seat heating button ...... 91 – Start-Stop* ...... 138 Overview 12 Controls for 21 Handbrake ...... 123 – Heating* and ventilation ...... 107 specifications Technical Overview of the dash panel 22 Hazard warning lights switch ...... 81 – Climatic* ...... 109 23 Pedals 1 Door release lever – Climatronic* ...... 112 24 Ignition lock ...... 120 2 Light switch ...... 75 13 Radio/Navigator* 25 Steering column control lever* . . . . 7 3 Lighting control for instrument and 14 Right seat heating button ...... 91 Advice switch lighting...... 79 26 Handle for releasing the bonnet . . . 163 15 Control lamp for front passenger 27 Button for opening and closing the 4 Headlight range control ...... 79 airbag deactivated warning lamp . . 23 front windows ...... 72 5 Air vents 16 Front passenger front airbag ...... 17 28 Safety switch* for the rear windows . . .72 6 Turn signal and main beam lever 17 Glove compartment lever ...... 93 and cruise control system* ...... 77, . 142 29 Control* for opening and closing 18 Selector lever ...... 127 the rear windows ...... 72 7 Controls on the steering wheel . . . . 57 19 Cup holder compartment ...... 95 8 Instrument panel: 20 Controls in the centre console: Note Operation – Instruments ...... 32 – Central locking ...... 63 Some of the items of equipment listed here – Display ...... 47 are fitted only on certain model versions or – ESC ...... 134 are optional extras. – Control and warning lamps ...... 35 Safety

31 Operation

Instruments

Instrument overview

Fig. 26 Detailed view of the dash panel: Dash panel.

1 Fuel gauge ››› page 33 Rev counter CAUTION 2 Multifunction display ››› page 47 The rev counter displays the engine speed in To prevent possible engine malfunctions, the 3 Engine coolant temperature display revolutions per minute. rev counter needle should not reach the red ››› page 34 or natural gas level indicator zone. The start of the red zone on the dial is in vehicles with natural gas engine (LPG) The start of the red area ››› Fig. 26 4 indi- different for some engine versions. ››› page 33 cates maximum engine speed working at service temperature. However, it is advisable 4 Rev counter ››› page 32 For the sake of the environment to change up into a higher gear, move the se- 5 Time adjustment button / trip recorder re- lector lever to D or lift your foot off the accel- Changing up into higher gears sooner, follow- set button ››› page 35 erator before the needle reaches the red ing the recommended gear indications ››› Fig. 35 will help you to reduce fuel con- 6 Speedometer ››› page 33 zone. sumption, emissions and also engine noise.

32 Dash panel

Speedometer up and an audible warning will sound re- perature of +15 °C (+59 °F) ››› page 160, Re- minding the driver to refuel. At this point fuelling with LPG. The speedometer is equipped with a digital there are still 7 litres of fuel in the tank. The charge level can be checked on the ana- odometer and a trip odometer, in addition to The following text appears in the dash panel logue gas gauge located on the instrument a service intervals display. display1): panel ››› Fig. 28. When the level reaches re- During the running-in period, the instructions serve, a notification text is displayed on the PLEASE REFUEL [XXX] shown on ››› page 130 should be followed. screen. Refill with LPG at the earliest opportu- Technical specifications Technical nity. LPG gauge* If while driving with LPG a sudden acoustic Fuel gauge  and reserve indicator warning signal is heard, the on-screen mes- 3 Applies to the model: ALTEA / ALTEA XL sage is shown2): LPG fault, consult Workshop Advice This means there is a fault in the LPG system. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to check the system. Problem: If the vehicle is left parked for a long time immediately after refuelling, the natural gas level indicator may not accurately indicate the same level shown after refuelling

when the vehicle is started up again. This is Operation not necessarily due to a leak in the system.

Fig. 27 Instrument panel: fuel gauge WARNING Fig. 28 Instrument panel: gas gauge. LPG is a highly explosive and inflammable The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 li- LPG system filler level display substance. It may cause severe burns and tres. other injury. » The LPG tank ››› in the spare wheel well When the needle reaches the reserve area has a capacity of 39 litres at an outside tem- Safety ››› Fig. 27 (arrow), the warning lamp will light

1) Depending on the version of the model. 2) Depending on the model version 33 Operation

● Due care must be taken to avoid any risk of Engine coolant temperature gauge  light up and no warning message* appears fire or explosion. on the dash panel display. ● When parking the vehicle in a closed area (e.g. in a garage), make sure that there is ad- Needle in warning zone C equate ventilation, either natural or mechani- The warning lamp* ››› Fig. 30 2 will light up cal, to neutralise the LPG in the event of a if the needle is in the warning zone. The fol- leak. lowing warning message appears on the instrument panel display3). Stop the vehicle Note and switch off the engine. Check the coolant level ››› page 169 ››› . ● The values shown in the average fuel consumption and distance to empty indications Even if the coolant level is correct do not con- on the multifunction display (MFI)1) on the in- tinue driving. You should obtain technical as- 2) strument panel display are approximate val- sistance. ues only. ● Two different consumption values are given Fig. 29 Instrument panel: Engine coolant WARNING on the MFI, depending on whether the vehi- temperature gauge. When working in the engine compartment, al- cle is running in gas or petrol mode. ways observe the safety warnings Needle in cold zone A ● Please check the fuel level on the fuel level ››› page 163. gauge on the instrument panel ››› page 33. Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine ● If frequent short journeys are made, espe- loads ››› Fig. 29. CAUTION cially when the outside temperature is low, the vehicle will tend to run on petrol more of- Needle in normal zone B Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the ten than on LPG. Therefore, the petrol tank cooling effect of the coolant. At high outside may empty before the LPG tank. In normal driving conditions, the needle temperatures and high engine loads, there is should be in the middle section of the scale. a risk of the engine overheating. The temperature may also rise when the engine is working hard, especially at high outside temperatures. This is no cause for concern as long as the warning lamp does not

1) Optional equipment 2) Depending on the model version 3) Depending on the version of the model. 34 Dash panel

Setting the digital clock* – Turn the setting knob ››› Fig. 26 5 clock- – Turn the setting knob clockwise to the sec- wise until the first “click” to set the hour. ond “click” to set the minutes. The minutes The digital clock is located in the instrument The hour will flash. To change the hour, will flash. To change the minutes, press the panel display. press the button. button.

Warning lamps specifications Technical

Overview of the warning lamps Advice Operation

Fig. 30 Instrument panel warning and control lamps. Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain model versions or are optional extras.

Item Symbol Meaning of control and warning lamps Further information Safety

1  Fuel level / reserve ››› page 40 2  Coolant level / coolant temperature ››› page 40 »

35 Operation

Item Symbol Meaning of control and warning lamps Further information

3  Rear fog light switched on ››› page 40

4  Turn signals in operation ››› page 41

 Engine fault (petrol engine) ››› page 41 5  Glow plug system (diesel engines) ››› page 41

6  Main beam switched on ››› page 41

7  Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate filter ››› page 41

8  ABS system fault ››› page 41

9  Windscreen washer fluid level ››› page 42

10  Alternator fault ››› page 42

11  Fasten seat belts! ››› page 11

12  Brake pad worn ››› page 42

13  Tyre pressure ››› page 43

14  Airbag or belt tensioner system fault or airbag disabled ››› page 16 ››› page 19

15  Bulb defective ››› page 44

Brake fluid required or 16 ››› page 44  brake system fault

Red: Engine oil pressure

17  Yellow: ››› page 44 If flashing: engine oil sensor faulty If it remains lit: insufficient engine oil

18  Handbrake on ››› page 123 36 Dash panel

Item Symbol Meaning of control and warning lamps Further information

19  Cruise speed activated (Cruise control) ››› page 45

20  Door open indicator ››› page 45

21  If it stays lit: ASR switched off ››› page 45 ››› page 46 ››› page 134

22  Electromechanical steering ››› page 45 specifications Technical

23  Fault in the emission control system ››› page 45

24  If flashing: the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is working or the ASR is working ››› page 45 ››› page 46 ››› page 134 If it remains lit: ESC or ASR faulty  Advice 25  Selector lever lock (automatic gearbox) ››› page 46

WARNING Note ● Failure to observe control lamps and warn- ● The appropriate control lamp for a fault will ing messages can result in serious personal light up in vehicles without warning or infor- injury or damage to your vehicle. mation messages in the display. ● The risk of an accident increases if your ve- ● In vehicles with warning or information hicle breaks down. Use a warning triangle to messages on the screen, the appropriate con- Operation draw the attention of other road users in or- trol lamp for a fault will light up and a warn- der to prevent danger to third parties. ing or information message will also appear ● The engine compartment is a dangerous on the screen. area. Before you open the bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compartment, switch the engine off and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of burns or other injuries.

Read and observe the relevant warnings Safety ››› page 163.

37 Operation

Overview of control and warning The green lamp lights up ● In vehicles with warning or information lamps (vehicles with LPG) when the vehicle is in LPG messages on the screen, the appropriate con-  mode. trol lamp for a fault will light up and a warn- 3 Applies to the model: ALTEA / ALTEA XL ››› page (green The lamp goes off when ing or information message will also appear you switch, automatically 118 ) on the screen. or manually, to petrol 3 mode.

The yellow warning lamp Warning symbols  lights up when the petrol

(yel- has reached the reserve low) level. There are red warning symbols (priority 1) and yellow warning symbols (priority 2).

WARNING Warning messages, Priority 1 (red) ● Failure to observe control lamps and warn- If one of these faults occurs, the warning ing messages can result in serious personal lamp will light up or flash and will be accom- injury or damage to your vehicle. panied by three audible warnings. This is a ● The risk of an accident increases if your ve- danger warning. Stop the vehicle and switch hicle breaks down. Use a warning triangle to off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. draw the attention of other road users in or- Obtain professional assistance if necessary. der to prevent danger to third parties. If several priority 1 faults are detected at the ● The engine compartment is a dangerous area. Before you open the bonnet to work on same time, the symbols will be displayed one the engine or in the engine compartment, after the other for about 2 seconds at a time Fig. 31 Instrument panel control and warning switch the engine off and allow it to cool to and will continue until the fault is corrected. lamps in vehicles with LPG reduce the risk of burns or other injuries. No menus will be shown in the display for the Read and observe the relevant warnings duration of a priority 1 warning message. ››› page 163. Red: coolant level/coolant ››› page 1  temperature 40 Examples of priority 1 warning messages Note (red) ››› page 2  Blue: cold engine warning 40 ● The appropriate control lamp for a fault will ● Brake system symbol  with the warning light up in vehicles without warning or infor- message STOP BRAKE FLUID INSTRUCTION mation messages in the display. MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

38 Dash panel

●  ●  Coolant symbol with the warning mes- Windscreen washer fluid symbol with the Messagesa) Description sage STOP SEE COOLANT INSTRUCTION MAN- information text REFILL WINDSCREEN WASHER Warning: Place the selector lever in po- UAL. FLUID. Top up the washer fluid level. --> P sition P to stop the engine. ● Engine oil pressure symbol  with the warning message STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURE Warning: The engine starts automati- STARTING LOW! INSTRUCTION MANUAL. Information messages displayed on cally. Start-Stop system activated. the screen*

START MAN- Warning: The engine must be started specifications Technical Warning messages, Priority 2 (yellow) UALLY manually. Start-Stop system activated If one of these faults occurs, the correspond- Messagesa) Description ERROR START- ing warning lamp lights up and is accompa- Warning: Start-Stop system error. The service interval has ended. Take STOP SERVICE nied by an audible warning. Check the corre- the vehicle to a Technical Service. sponding function as soon as possible al- Warning: Although the Start-Stop sys- START-STOP tem is switched on, the engine cannot though the vehicle may be used without risk. Immobiliser system active. The vehicle Advice IMMOBILISER will not start. Take the vehicle to a IMPOSSIBLE be stopped automatically. Not all the If several priority 2 warning messages are de- Technical Service. necessary conditions are met tected at the same time, the symbols are dis- Instrument panel faulty. Take the vehi- START-STOP Warning: Start-Stop system activated. played one after the other for about 2 sec- ERROR cle to a Technical Service. ACTIVE Vehicle in Stop mode. onds at a time. After a set time, the information text will disappear and the symbol will CLEAN AIR FIL- Warning: Start-Stop system activated. Warning: The air filter must be cleaned be shown as a reminder at the side of the TER SWITCH OFF Switch off the ignition when you leave display. the vehicle. Warning: Correct key cannot be found NO KEY

STOP TRANS- Operation Priority 2 warning messages will not be in the vehicle. Warning: Stop the engine. Gearbox MISSION TOO shown until all Priority 1 warning messages overheated. Warning: Key battery low. Change the HOT KEY BATTERY have been dealt with! battery. Warning: To start the engine, press the Examples of priority 2 warning messages Warning: Press the clutch to start. In BRAKE brake pedal. Only in vehicles with au- (yellow):1) CLUTCH vehicles with manual gearbox and tomatic gearbox. Start-Stop system. Warning: Coasting mode active. Trans- ● Fuel warning light with the information text COASTING Warning: Place the selector level in po- mission engaged. Only in vehicles with PLEASE REFUEL. FUNCTION Safety --> P/N sition P/N to start. Only in vehicles automatic gearbox. » with automatic gearbox.

1) Depending on the version of the model. 39 Operation

Messagesa) Description Coolant temperature too high WARNING The instrument panel displays the following ● CHECK SAFE- Notification of central locking function If your vehicle is immobilised for technical message1): CHECK COOLANT INSTRUCTION LOCK activated. reasons, move it to a safe distance from traf- MANUAL ››› page 169. fic. Turn the engine off, turn the hazard lights a) These messages may vary according the version of the vehi- on and place the warning triangle. cle model. First look at the coolant temperature gauge. The coolant temperature is too high if the ● Never open the bonnet if you can see or needle is over the warning area on the dial. hear steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait un- Fuel level/reserve  Stop the vehicle, switch the engine off and wait for it to cool down. Check the coolant til you can no longer see or hear escaping steam or coolant. level. The light comes on when only 7 litres of fuel ● The engine compartment is a dangerous remain in the tank, and an acoustic signal al- If the coolant level is correct, the overheating area. Before carrying out any work in the en- so sounds. It reminds you to fuel up the fuel may be caused by a malfunction of the radia- gine compartment, switch off the engine and tank as soon as possible ››› page 158. tor fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and have allow it to cool down. Always note the corre- The instrument panel displays the following it replaced if necessary ››› page 196. sponding warnings ››› page 163. message1): PLEASE REFUEL!. If the control lamp lights up again after driving on for a short distance, stop the vehicle and switch the engine off. Contact a Techni- Coolant temperature  (blue) Coolant level* / temperature  (red) cal Service or a specialised workshop. 3 Applies to vehicles with LPG

There is a fault if: Coolant level too low This lamp lights up when the coolant is below approximately +45 °C (+113 °F). When it ● The warning symbol does not go out again The instrument panel displays the following exceeds this temperature the lamp turns off. after a few seconds. message1): STOP CHECK COOLANT INSTRUC- ● The warning lamp lights up or flashes while TION MANUAL. the vehicle is moving, and three acoustic First look at the coolant temperature gauge. If Rear fog light  warning signals ››› are emitted. the needle is in the normal range, top up with coolant at the earliest opportunity ››› .  This means that either the coolant level is too The warning lamp lights up when the rear low or the coolant temperature is too high. fog light is switched on. For further information see ››› page 75.

1) Depending on the version of the model. 40 Dash panel

Turn signals   The control lamp  lights up (37 mph), with the engine running at approxi- If the control lamp  lights up when the en- mately 2,000 rpm. In this way, the soot build Depending on which turn signal is operating, gine is started it means that the glow plugs up in the filter is burned. When cleaning is   either the left or right turn signal lamp are preheating. When the warning lamp goes successful, the control lamp turns off. flashes. Both control lamps will flash at the off, the engine should be started straight If the lamp  does not turn off, or the three same time when the hazard warning lights away. lamps turn on (particulate filter , fault in are switched on. the emission control system  and glow Technical specifications Technical If any of both turn signals fails, the warning Control lamp  flashes plugs ), drive the vehicle to a specialised lamp will start flashing twice faster than nor- If a fault develops in the engine management workshop and have the fault repaired at the mal. system while you are driving, the glow plug earliest opportunity. For further information on the turn signals, system lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to WARNING please see ››› page 77. a specialised workshop as soon as possible

and have the engine checked. ● Always drive according to the road weather Advice conditions, the terrain and traffic. Driving rec- Engine management*  ommendations should never lead to illegal Main beam headlights  manoeuvres in surrounding traffic. This warning lamp monitors the engine man- ● The diesel engine particulate filter may agement system for petrol engines. The warning lamp  lights up when the main reach extremely high temperatures; in this beams are on or when the headlight flasher case the vehicle should be parked so that it  The warning lamp (Electronic Power Con- is operated. does not enter into contact with highly flam- trol) lights up when the ignition is switched mable materials underneath the vehicle. Oth- on while system operation is being verified. It For further information see ››› page 77. erwise there is a risk of fire. Operation should go out once the engine is started. If there is a fault in the electronic engine management system while you are driving, Soot accumulation in the diesel Anti-lock brake system (ABS)*  this warning lamp will light up. Stop the vehi- engine particulate filter  cle and seek technical assistance. The warning lamp  lights up for a few sec- If the control lamp  lights up you should onds when the ignition is switched on. It help the filter clean itself by driving in the ap- goes out again after the system has run Safety propriate manner. through an automatic test sequence. Glow plug system / Engine fault  » To do this, drive about 15 minutes in fourth The warning lamp lights up to show that the or fifth gear (automatic gearbox: S gear glow plugs are preheating the diesel engine. range) at a minimum speed of 60 km/h 41 Operation

There is a fault in the ABS if: the brake fluid level in the reservoir The warning lamp  lights up when the igni- ● The warning lamp  does not light up ››› page 172, Brake fluid. If the brake fluid tion is switched on. It should go out when the when the ignition is switched on. level has dropped below the “MIN” mark you engine has started running. must not drive on. Risk of accident. Obtain ● If the warning lamp  lights up while driv- The control lamp does not go out again af- technical assistance. ter a few seconds. ing, the alternator is no longer charging the ● If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in battery. You should immediately drive to the ● The control lamp lights up when the vehicle the brake system may have been caused by a nearest specialised workshop. is moving. failure of the ABS system. This could cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you You should avoid using electrical equipment The vehicle can still be braked in the normal brake. This could cause the rear to break that is not absolutely necessary because this way, without the ABS function. Take the vehi- away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and will drain the battery. cle to a specialised workshop as soon as seek technical assistance. possible. For further information on the ABS see the ››› page 136. Worn brake pads  If a fault occurs in the ABS, the ESC* control Washer fluid*  lamp will also light up. If the  symbol lights up, have the front This warning lamp lights up to indicate that brake pads (and, for safety reasons, the rear Brake system fault the windscreen washer level is very low. pads as well) inspected by a specialised workshop. If the ABS warning lamp  lights up together This serves as a reminder to fill up the reser- with the brake warning lamp , there is a voir at the earliest opportunity ››› page 171. fault in the ABS function and in the brake The following message is shown on the in- system . ››› strument panel display*1): REFILL WIND- SCREEN WASHER FLUID. WARNING ● Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings ››› page 163, Working in Alternator  the engine compartment. ● If the brake system warning lamp  should This warning lamp signals a fault in the alter- light up together with the ABS warning lamp nator. , stop the vehicle immediately and check

1) Depending on the version of the model. 42 Dash panel

Tyre pressure  ● The wheels of one axle are under more The tyre pressure control lamp  flashes pressure (for example, driving with a trailer or If the tyre pressure control lamp flashes, this on steep slopes). indicates a fault. Go to the nearest special- ● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains. ised workshop. ● The temporary spare wheel is fitted. WARNING ● The wheel on one axle is changed.

● When the tyre pressure monitoring lamp specifications Technical Tyre pressure adjustment lights up, reduce speed immediately and avoid any sudden manoeuvre or braking. Following the modification to tyre pressure or Stop when possible, and check the tyre pres- after changing one or more wheels, the but- sure and status. ton ››› Fig. 32 must be pressed down while ● The driver is responsible for maintaining Fig. 32 Centre console: tyre monitoring sys- the ignition is on until an audible warning is correct tyre pressures. For this reason, tyre Advice tem button. heard and the warning lamp goes out. pressure must be regularly checked. If the wheels are under excessive load (for ex- ● Under certain circumstances (e.g. when The tyre pressure monitoring system controls ample, driving with a trailer or heavy load), driving in a sporty manner, in winter condi- tyre speed and the frequency spectrum of tyre pressure must be increased to the rec- tions or on a dirt track) the tyre monitoring each tyre. ommended value for a full load (see the lamp may light up or function incorrectly. The tyre monitoring lamp1) compares wheel sticker on the inside of the fuel flap). If the revolutions and with it, using the ESC, the tyre monitor system button is pressed down, Note wheel diameter of each wheel. If the diame- the new tyre pressures are confirmed. If the battery is disconnected, the yellow ter of a wheel changes, the tyre control lamp Operation warning lamp  lights up after turning the  lights up. The wheel diameter changes The tyre pressure control lamp  lights up ignition on. This should turn off after a brief when: If the tyre pressure of one or more wheels is journey. ● Tyre pressure is insufficient. much lower than the value set by the driver, the tyre control warning lamp lights up ››› . ● The tyre structure is damaged. ● The vehicle is unbalanced because of a

load. Safety

1) Depending on the model version 43 Operation

Brake system*  wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This Engine oil pressure  could cause the rear to break away. Risk of Situations in which the warning lamp lights skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical If this warning lamp is red it indicates that up  assistance. the engine oil pressure is too low. ● the brake fluid level is too low If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is ››› page 172. accompanied by three audible warnings, Handbrake  switch off the engine and check the oil level. The instrument panel displays the following 1) If necessary, add more oil ››› page 166. message : STOP BRAKE FLUID INSTRUCTION This lamp lights up when the handbrake is MANUAL. applied. The instrument panel displays the following message1): STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURE IN- ● there is a fault in the brake system. If you drive faster than 6 km/h (4 mph) with STRUCTION MANUAL. the handbrake on, the following message will The instrument panel displays the following appear on the instrument panel display1): If the warning lamp flashes although the oil 1) message : BRAKE SYSTEM FAULT INSTRUC- HANDBRAKE ON. You will also hear an acous- level is correct, stop driving. Do not even run TION MANUAL. tic warning signal ››› page 123. the engine at idle speed! Obtain technical assistance. This warning lamp can light up together with the ABS system warning lamp. Checking the oil level  Bulb defect*  WARNING If the warning lamp is yellow  the engine  oil level should be checked as soon as possi- ● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- The warning lamp lights up when there is ble. Top up the oil page 168 at the next serve the warnings on ››› page 163. a fault in the turn signals, headlights, side ››› lights and fog lights, e.g. in the left head- opportunity. ● If the brake warning lamp does not go out, light. or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid Oil level sensor faulty*  level in the reservoir ››› page 172, Brake fluid The instrument panel displays the following is too low. Risk of accident. Stop the vehicle message1): LEFT FULL BEAM FAULTY. If the  yellow warning lamp flashes, take and do not drive on. Obtain technical assis- the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have tance. the oil level sensor checked. Until then it is ● If the brake warning lamp lights up  to- advisable to check the oil level every time gether with the ABS lamp  this could be you refuel. due to an ABS fault. This could cause the rear

1) Depending on the version of the model. 44 Dash panel

Cruise speed (cruise control)*  The warning light only goes off after a dis- The instrument panel displays the following tance of approx. 50 m. message1): EXHAUST GAS SEE WORKSHOP. The warning lamp  comes on when the There is a fault in the electromechanical cruise control system is switched on. For fur-  steering system if the lamp does not go out The control lamp lights up: ther information on the cruise control system, or lights up while the vehicle is in motion. If a fault has developed during driving which see ››› page 142. The warning lamp may appear in two differ- has reduced the quality of the exhaust gas ent colours to indicate faults. If the light is (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and Technical specifications Technical yellow, it indicates a minor fault. If the light is drive carefully to the nearest specialised Indicator for open doors or boot*  red, seek assistance from a specialised work- workshop to have the engine checked. shop immediately, as the power steering is The instrument panel displays the following This warning lamp lights up if one of the not working; in this case you should not keep message: EXHAUST GAS SEE WORKSHOP. doors is open. driving. Stop the vehicle and seek technical

The warning light  should go off when all assistance. The power steering does not work Advice the doors are closed correctly. if the battery is flat or if the engine is off (e.g. for towing). You should take into account that Electronic Stability Control (ESC)* The system also works when the ignition is you will need considerably more power than /. switched off. It should disappear approxi- normal to steer the vehicle if the power steer- mately 15 seconds after the vehicle has been ing is not working correctly or at all. There are two control lamps for the electronic locked. stability control. The lamp  provides infor- For those vehicles fitted with ESC*, the mation concerning function and  disconnec- “Steering manoeuvre recommendation” tion status.  ››› page 134 function is included. Electromechanical steering* Both warning lamps light up together when Operation the ignition is switched on and should turn For vehicles with power steering, the level of off after approximately 2 seconds. This is the steering assistance depends on the vehicle's Emission control system*  time taken for the function check. speed and on the steering angle. Control lamp  flashes: This programme includes the ABS, EDL and The warning lamp should light up for a few ASR. This also includes the brake assistance seconds when the ignition is switched on. It When there is misfiring that can damage the system (BAS), automatic cleaning of the should go out once the engine is started. catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest specialised workshop brake discs and the trailer stability pro- Safety If the battery is disconnected, the indicator to have the engine checked. gramme (TSP). » remains lit, even with the engine running.

1) Depending on the version of the model. 45 Operation

The warning lamp  has the following specialised workshop as soon as possible. The  lamp provides information about the functions: For further information on the EDL see disconnection status of the system: ● It flashes whilst driving when the ASR/ESC ››› page 135, Electronic differential lock ● It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected is activated. (EDL)*. when pressing the ASR OFF switch. ● It will light up if there is a fault in the ESC. By pressing it again, the ASR function is reac- ● As the ESC operates in conjunction with the Traction control system (ASR)*  /  tivated and the warning lamp switched off. ABS, the ESC light will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS. The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from spinning when the vehicle is  If the ESC control lamp  stays on after the Speed selector lever lock accelerating. engine is started, this may mean that the The brake pedal must be depressed when control system has temporarily switched off There are two warning lamps for the traction this warning lamp lights up. This is necessary the ESC. In this case the ESC can be reactiva- control system:  and . Both warning lamps when the automatic gearbox* selector lever ted by switching the ignition off and then on light up together when the ignition is switch- is moved out of the positions P or N. again. If the control lamp goes out, this ed on and should turn off after approximately means the system is fully functional. 2 seconds. This is the time taken for the function check. The  lamp provides information about the Electronic immobiliser* “Safe” disconnection status of the system: The  lamp has the following function: This warning lamp flashes if an unauthorised ● It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected ● It flashes when the ASR is working if the ve- key is used. when pressing the  switch. hicle is moving. Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates If the system is deactivated or if it has any the electronic immobiliser automatically fault, the warning lamp will remain lit. The when the key is inserted into the ignition. Differential lock fault (EDL)* warning lamp will also light up if a fault The electronic immobiliser will be activated should occur in the ABS because the ASR op- again automatically as soon as you pull the The EDL operates along with the ABS in vehi- erates in conjunction with the ABS. For fur- key out of the ignition lock. cles equipped with Electronic Stability Con- ther information, see ››› page 137. trol (ESC)*. The instrument panel displays the following message1): . The vehicle cannot A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the IMMOBILISER be used in that case . ABS control lamp . Take the vehicle to a ››› page 121

1) Depending on the version of the model. 46 Dash panel

The engine can, however, be started if the tion display for the automatic gearbox*. – Optional indicators: e.g. those on the appropriate coded SEAT genuine key is used. The current position of the selector lever multifunction display (MFI). or the gear which is engaged (for tiptron- – Automatic indicators: Information and Note ic)* is highlighted. warning messages. A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensured 2 Outside temperature. – Menus providing further information and if genuine SEAT keys are used. 3 Odometer or flexible service interval dis- which can be used to make diverse set-

play*. tings are also shown: “Dash panel me- specifications Technical nus”.

Digital instrument panel 3 Outside temperature. Displayed categories* display 4 Odometer or flexible service interval display.

Display (without warning or Advice information texts) Recommended gear display* Operation

Fig. 34 Digital dash panel display.

Fig. 33 Detailed view of the instrument panel: 1 Clock: “Setting the time”. On the right of screen with different indicators. the display: selector lever position dis- Fig. 35 Gear display. play for the automatic gearbox*. The cur-

The display on the dash panel shows the Safety rent position of the selector lever or the Use the gear display to save fuel. If you are mileage and trip odometer as well as the se- gear which is engaged (for Tiptronic) is driving in the correct gear, a dot will be lector lever position. highlighted. shown next to the gear display. If you are not in the correct gear, an arrow will appear next » 1 Digital clock display ››› page 35. On the 2 There are optional and automatic dis- right of the display: selector lever posi- plays in this field. 47 Operation

to the gear display indicating whether you change, appear in the sticker on the door pil- An overdue service is indicated by a minus should change up or down. lar or in the Maintenance Programme. sign in front of the mileage or day information. A Service pre-warning will appear in the od- Note ometer if a service is due soon. A “spanner” The gear change indication should not be tak- symbol appears and the display “km” with Indications for vehicles with LongLife service en into account when quick acceleration is re- the distance that can be driven until the next Technical progress has made it possible to quired (for example when overtaking). service appointment is due. This signal considerably reduce servicing requirements. changes after around 10 seconds. A “clock With the LongLife System, SEAT ensures that symbol” appears and the number of days un- your vehicle only has an Interval Service Odometer til the service appointment should be carried when it is necessary. The length of the Inter- out. The following message is shown in the val Services (max. 2 years) is determined by The left-hand counter in the display registers instrument panel display*: factors such as conditions under which the the total amount of distance covered by the vehicle is used and personal driving style. vehicle. Service in [XXXX] The service pre-warning will first appear 20 The right-hand counter registers the short km days before the date on which the service is journeys. The last digit indicates steps of 100 or due. The distance travelled is rounded off to metres. The trip recorder counter may be re- [XXXX] the nearest 100 km and the time to full days. set by holding down the reset button for a days The current service message can only be con- few seconds. sulted 500 km after the last service. Until The service message will disappear approxi- that time, only dashes are displayed. mately 20 seconds after the ignition is Flexible service interval display switched on or the engine is running. The Note normal display can be resumed by briefly ● If you reset the display manually, the next Vehicles with Service intervals dependent on pressing the reset button on the trip counter service interval will be indicated after time/distance travelled already have certain or by pressing the OK button on the steering 15,000 km or one year and will not be calcu- service intervals set. The intervals are calcu- wheel controls. lated individually. lated individually in vehicles with LongLife With the ignition on, you can check the cur- ● Do not reset the display between service service. rent service message at any moment in the intervals as the display will otherwise be in- The service interval display only indicates the Vehicle status menu or turning the reset but- correct. dates of services that include engine oil ton to access the service display. change. The dates of all other services, such as the Inspection Service or brake fluid

48 Dash panel

● In LongLife Service vehicles, if the battery Note ● Coolant symbol  with the warning mes- is disconnected for a long period, the days re- sage STOP SEE COOLANT INSTRUCTION MAN- In the case of screens without warning or in- maining until the next service cannot be cal- UAL. formation messages, faults are indicated ex- culated. Therefore, the service message dis- clusively by the control lamps. ● Engine oil pressure symbol  with the plays on the instrument panel may be incor- warning message STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURE rect. Take into account the maximum author- LOW! INSTRUCTION MANUAL. ised service intervals.

Warning messages, Priority 1 (red) specifications Technical Warning messages, Priority 2 (yellow) Warning or information message in If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp will light up or flash and will be accom- the display panied by three audible warnings. This is a If one of these faults occurs, the correspond- danger warning. Stop the vehicle and switch ing warning lamp lights up and is accompa- The system runs a check on certain compo- nied by an audible warning. The function off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. Advice nents and functions when the ignition is Obtain professional assistance if necessary. should be checked as soon as possible. switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Functional faults are indicated by symbols If several priority 1 faults are detected at the If several priority 2 warning messages are de- with warning or information messages in the same time, the symbols will be displayed one tected at the same time, the symbols are dis- display. An audible warning is given in cer- after the other for about 2 seconds at a time played one after the other for about 2 sec- tain cases. and will continue until the fault is corrected. onds at a time. After a set time, the information text will disappear and the symbol will No menus will be shown in the display for the be shown as a reminder at the side of the Warning symbols duration of a priority 1 warning message. display. There are red warning symbols (priority 1) Operation and yellow warning symbols (priority 2). Examples of priority 1 warning messages Priority 2 warning messages will not be (red) shown until all Priority 1 warning messages have been dealt with! Information text ● Brake system symbol  with the warning In addition to warning messages given on a message STOP BRAKE FLUID INSTRUCTION Examples of priority 2 warning messages fault, you will receive information in the dis- MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT INSTRUCTION (yellow):1) play on procedures or will be asked to carry MANUAL. ● Fuel warning light with the information text out certain tasks. Safety PLEASE REFUEL. »

1) Depending on the version of the model. 49 Operation

● Windscreen washer fluid level symbol  – Select menu Configuration. with the information message ADD WIND- – Press button A on the windscreen wiper SCREEN WASHER FLUID. Refill the windscreen lever. The Configuration menu is opened. washer tank ››› page 171. 2. Access the “Configuration” menu with the steering wheel controls Instrument panel menus* – To access the “Configuration” menu, press button C ››› Fig. 37 until the menu is dis- Example of menu use played. Now you are in this menu.

Fig. 37 Controls on the steering wheel: control buttons. 3. Open the main menu “Winter tyres” – Select option Winter tyres using switch B . The setting of a speed warning will be used – Press the button A . The menu Winter tyres as an example of how to use the menus. This is opened. is a good idea if you are, for example, using winter tyres which are not suited for the top speed of the vehicle. 4. Program a speed limit warning – Use button B to select the option 1. Open the main menu with the MFI lever +10 km/h or -10 km/h and press button B to either increase or decrease the speed Fig. 36 Windscreen wiper lever: control but- – Switch the ignition on. displayed. tons. – Hold down button B for 2 seconds to return to the main menu from another menu. 5. To activate and deactivate the speed limit It may be necessary to repeat this opera- warning tion until the main menu is displayed. – Use switch B to select the menu point On / Off and press the button to switch the 2. Open the menu “Configuration” with the speed warning on or off. If the speed warn- MFI lever ing is deactivated, three dashes will be dis- – To choose an option from the menu, press played ---. the upper or lower end of the rocker switch. The selected option is displayed between 6. To close the menu “Winter tyres” two lines and there will also be a triangle – In the menu select Back. on the right. 50 Dash panel

The function “Winter tyres” sends an optical Main menu Main Function and an acoustic signal when the vehicle rea- menu ches the set speed. Multifunc- Change to the multifunction display Example menu “Winter tyres” tion display (MFI): “Multifunction display (MFI)”

In the menu Function Audio This menu displays the available infor- Winter tyres Name of menu displayed mation for the active audio source (radio station, CD audio track / MP3 / USB / specifications Technical X km/h The current set speed is displayed iPod / Bluetooth audioa) / call informa- tiona). or --- or dashes will appear if the function is deactivated Navigation This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a navigation system. The On / Off If the function is activated or deactivated Fig. 38 Windscreen wiper lever: control but- navigation system must be switched on.

tons. When the route guidance is activated, Advice +10 km/h The set value increases by 10 km/h the turning arrows and proximity bars are displayed. The appearance is similar to -10 km/h The set value decreases by 10 km/h The menu provides access to the different display functions (only with the MFI lever). the Navigation system. Back The menu “Winter tyres” is closed and If the route guidance is not activated, the the last displayed menu is shown. direction of travel (compass) and the Open main menu name of the street along which you are driving are shown. Note – Switch the ignition on. – Press and hold button B for at least 2 sec- Telephone This menu is only available in vehicles For electronic and vehicle equipment one or with a radio unit and if the vehicle is fit- onds. It may be necessary to repeat this op- Operation more of these menus will be displayed. ted with the telephone function. In vehi- eration until the main menu is displayed. cles fitted with a radio navigation system, this menu is available in the central Select a menu from the main menu unit (navigator) ››› Booklet Navigation system.. – To choose an option from the menu, press the upper or lower end of rocker switch B . Vehicle con- This menu displays current warning or in- The selected option is displayed between dition formation texts: “Vehicle status menu” This option flashes when one of these two horizontal lines. Safety texts is displayed. » – Press button A to select the entry.

Example of menu use ››› page 50

51 Operation

Main Function steering wheel ››› Fig. 37 ››› page 50 menu while the ignition is switched on.

Configura- This option allows the time, the speed Resetting a memory tion warning when using winter tyres, units, language, independent heating, the – Select the memory where you wish to Light and visibility menu and the Conven- erase the values. ience menu to be reset. – Hold down button A on the windscreen a) Only in vehicles fitted with a radio navigation system. wiper lever or the OK button on the multifunction steering wheel* for at least 2 Note seconds. Fig. 40 Controls on the steering wheel: con- For electronic and vehicle equipment one or trol buttons. The trip memory 1 collects the travel and more of these menus will be displayed. consumption data from the moment the igni- The multifunction display (MFI) shows you in- tion is switched on until it is switched off. If formation on the journey and fuel consump- the journey is continued within two hours of Multifunction display menu (MFI) tion. It has two automatic memories: 1 - Trip switching off the ignition, the new values will memory and 2 - Total memory. The selected be added to the existing trip recorder memo- memory is shown on the upper right hand ry. The memory will automatically be deleted section of the display at all times. if the journey is interrupted for more than 2 hours. Open the multifunction display menu The total memory 2 collects the journey data – Select the Multifunction display menu for any number of individual journeys (even if from the main menu ››› page 51 and the ignition is switched off for longer than 2 press the OK button on the windscreen hours) up to a total of 19 hours and 59 mi- wiper lever or the multifunction steering nutes of travel time or 1,999 km (1,250 wheel*. miles) of distance travelled. The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named Fig. 39 Windscreen wiper lever: control but- Selecting a memory values is reached. tons. – To change from one memory to another, briefly press button A ››› Fig. 36 On-screen display ››› page 50 on the windscreen wiper lev- The following data can be viewed on the mul- er or the OK button on the multifunction tifunction display using rocker switch B ››› Fig. 36 ››› page 50 on the windscreen wiper 52 Dash panel lever or by pressing button  or  ››› Fig. 37 km/h (mph) - Driving speed will automatically be deleted once this value on the multifunction steering wheel*: Driving speed is digitally shown in the dis- has been reached. ● play. Distance Current fuel consumption in l/100 km or l/hour ● Average speed Speed warning at --- km/h The display will show the current fuel con- ● Driving speed This function may help you to keep within the sumption in litres/100 km whilst the vehicle ● is in motion or in litres/hour when the vehicle Speed warning at --- km/h speed limits. Press the OK button on the specifications Technical is in a stationary position with the engine ● Journey duration windscreen wiper lever A or the multifunction steering wheel* to select the current running. ● Current fuel consumption speed. The instrument panel display gives Using this display you can see how your driv- ● Average fuel consumption the selected speed, for example, Speed ing style affects fuel consumption ● Operating range warning 120 km/h. You have 5 seconds to re- ››› page 117. ● Outside temperature set the speed to between 30 km/h (18 mph) Advice and 250 km/h (155 mph) using rocker switch Average fuel consumption in l/100 km B or buttons  or  on the multifunction Distance travelled in km (miles) The average fuel consumption will be shown steering wheel*. Press the OK button or wait after a distance of approximately 100 metres The display shows the distance travelled 5 seconds until the speed is stored and the has been travelled. Until then dashes will ap- since the ignition was switched on. warning is activated. If the set speed is ex- pear in the display. The display will be upda- ceeded, an audible warning is heard and a The maximum display value in both memo- ted every five seconds while the vehicle is in warning message is displayed until the ries is 1,999 km. The memory will automati- motion. The amount of fuel used will not be cally be deleted once this value has been speed is reduced to at least 4 km/h (2 mph)

shown. Operation reached. below the stored speed. The function is switched off by pressing the OK button  Km (miles) - Fuel range Average speed in km/h (mph) again. Speed warning --- km/h (miles) is now displayed on the instrument panel. The fuel range is calculated using the figures After starting the ignition, the average speed for tank content and current fuel consump- will be shown after a distance of approxi- Trip duration in h and min tion. This shows how far the vehicle can trav- mately 100 metres has been travelled. Until el using the same conditions as a reference. then dashes will appear in the display. The The display shows the amount of time which

has elapsed since the ignition was switched Safety display will be updated every five seconds Personal selection of display while the vehicle is in motion. on. The driver can establish which displays are The maximum display value in both memo- shown on the instrument panel display as re- ries is 19 hours and 59 minutes. The memory quired: » 53 Operation

● Select the submenu Multifunction Display played may be slightly higher than the actual Note Data from the Configuration menu outside temperature as a result of the heat If there are no warning messages, this menu ››› page 54. radiated from the engine. is not available. ● The displays can be activated or deactiva- ● Vehicles with a multifunction steering ted individually by marking the required op- wheel* do not have buttons on the wind- tion and pressing the OK button on the windscreen wiper lever. The multifunction display screen wiper lever or the multifunction steer- can only be controlled from the buttons on Configuration menu ing wheel*. the multifunction steering wheel*. Open Configuration menu Outside temperature indicator – Select the option Configuration from the main menu: “Main menu” and press button The measurement margin ranges from -45 °C Vehicle status menu OK A ››› Fig. 36 on the windscreen wiper (-49 °F) to +58 °C (+136.4 °F). At tempera- lever. or tures lower than +4°C (+39.2 °F), an “ice crys- Open Vehicle Condition menu tal symbol” is displayed and a “warning” is – Select the option Vehicle status from the – Press button  or  on the multifunction sounded if the vehicle is moving at more main menu: “Main menu” and press button steering wheel* ››› Fig. 37 until the Configu- than 20 km/h (12 mph) (ice warning). This OK on the windscreen wiper lever A ration menu is displayed. symbol flashes first for around 10 seconds ››› Fig. 38. or and remains lit as long as the outside tem- Example of menu use ››› page 50. – Press button  or  on the multifunction perature does not rise above +4 °C (+39.2 °F) steering wheel* ››› Fig. 37 until the Vehicle or +6 °C (+42.8 °F) if it was already lit. Displayed on Function Status menu is displayed. the screen

WARNING Priority 2 warning messages and information Multifunction This menu is used to establish the da- There could be black ice on the road surface texts: “Information and warning messages on display data. ta in the multifunction display menu even if the “snowflake symbol” is not shown. the screen” will automatically disappear from to be displayed on the instrument For this reason you should not rely exclusive- the screen after a time and will be stored in panel ››› page 52 ly on this display - Risk of accident! the Vehicle status menu. Convenience The convenience set-up mode is used The warning and information texts may be to make the settings for the convenience functions in the vehicle. Note viewed in this menu. If there is no warning or ● There are different instrument panels; information message, the option Vehicle sta- Lights and visi- From this menu it is it possible to alter therefore the multifunction display may vary. tus is not displayed. If there are several mes- bility the vehicle lighting settings. ● When the vehicle is stationary or travelling sages, each one is shown for a few seconds. at very low speeds, the temperature dis- Example of menu use ››› page 50.

54 Dash panel

Displayed on Function Note Displayed on Function the screen ● For electronic and vehicle equipment one or the screen Time The hours and minutes of the clock more of these menus will be displayed. Central lock- One door: Individual unlocking activa- and the navigation system can be ● SEAT dealerships are able to programme ing. ted. changed. Choose between 12 and 24- other functions or change the existing func- Auto lock: The doors are automatically hour format and change to summer tions depending upon the vehicle equipment. locked when the vehicle is travelling time. at more than approx. 15 km/h

● specifications Technical The Configuration menu is only accessible (10 mph). Winter tyres The menu allows the setting of a when the vehicle is at a standstill. Auto unlock: the doors are unlocked speed at which an optical and acous- when the key is removed from the ig- tic warning will be given by the sys- nition. tem. You can use this function, for example, if you have fitted winter tyres Convenience menu Elec. window Opening and closing electric win- which are not suited for the top speed control dows: this determines whether to of your vehicle. Please see the section Open menu Convenience open or close all the windows when Advice “Wheels and tyres”. the vehicle is unlocked or locked. The – Choose the option Configuration from the open function can also be activated Language The display texts and the navigation main menu and press the button OK A for the driver door only. system texts can be seen in different ››› Fig. 36 on the windscreen wiper lever. languages. Exterior mirror If synchronised adjustment is selec- – Press button  or  on the multifunction adjust. ted, when the driver side exterior mir- Units This option allows you to select the steering wheel* ››› Fig. 37 until the Configu- ror is adjusted, the passenger exterior units for displaying temperature, fuel ration menu is displayed. mirror is also moved. consumption values and distances. The predefined factory values for the – Choose the option Convenience from the Factory set- Operation sel. speed The instrument panel also displays main menu and press the button A on the tings functions of this menu are restored. the speed in another different unit of measurement (mph or km/h) to that windscreen wiper lever. Back This returns to the Configuration given on the speedometer. menu. Example of menu use ››› page 50 Inter. Service Consult service messages and reset service interval display here. Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or Factory set- The manufacturer's predefined values tings for the functions of this menu are re- more of these menus will be displayed. Safety stored.

Backa) This returns to the main menu. a) Only if the windscreen wiper lever is used (MFI). 55 Operation

Lights and visibility menu Displayed on Function the screen Open Lights and visibility Menu This returns to the Configuration – Select the option Configuration from the Back menu. main menu: “Main menu” and press button OK A ››› page 50 on the windscreen wiper lever. or Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or – Press button  or  on the multifunction more of these menus will be displayed. steering wheel* ››› Fig. 37 until the Configu- ration menu is displayed. – Select the option Lights & visibil. from the menu and press button A on the windscreen wiper lever.

Example of menu use ››› page 50.

Displayed on Function the screen

Coming Home/ This option permits the adjustment of Leaving Home the time during which the headlamps remain lit after the vehicle is locked, as well as connecting and disconnecting this function.

Indicator conf. The convenience turn signal function can be activated or deactivated here. With convenience mode activated, the turn signal will blink at least three times when turned on for a lane change.

Factory set- The predefined factory values for the tings functions of this menu are restored.

56 Steering wheel controls* Steering wheel controls* There are three versions of the multifunction Both versions may be used to control the au- module: dio system (radio, Audio CD, mp3 CD, iPod1) /USB1) /SD1)) and the radio navigation General information ● Audio version, to control the available au- system, in which case they also control the dio functions from the steering wheel. navigation system. The steering wheel includes a multifunction ● Audio + Telephone version, to control the module from where it is possible to control available audio functions and the telephone ● Version for automatic gearbox* the audio, telephone and radio navigation system from the steering wheel. ››› page 129. specifications Technical functions, and the automatic gearbox*, without requiring the driver to be distracted from driving.

Audio system Advice

Steering wheel audio version controls Operation

Fig. 41 Steering wheel controls. Fig. 42 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model). » Safety

1) If fitted in the vehicle. 57 Operation

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX ››› table on page 59

A Volume up Volume up Volume up

B Volume down Volume down Volume down

Next track No function specified C Search for next station Hold down: fast forward

Previous track No function specified D Search for last station Hold down: quick rewind

E No function specified No function specified No function specified

F Mute Pause Mute

Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display G a) Next presetb) Next trackb) No function specifiedb)

Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display H a) Previous presetb) Previous trackb) No function specifiedb)

Next preset Change folder No function specified I a) Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel

Previous preset Change folder No function specified J a) Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel

K Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel

Change source Change source Change source L a) Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel

a) Depending on the model version b) Only if the panel is in Audio menu.

58 Steering wheel controls*

Steering wheel audio version + telephone controls Technical specifications Technical

Fig. 43 Steering wheel controls. Fig. 44 Steering wheel controls (depending Advice on version of model).

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX TELEPHONE

A Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up

B Volume down Volume down Volume down Volume down

Next track

C Search for next station No function specified No function specified Operation Hold down: fast forward

Previous track D Search for last station No function specified No function specified Hold down: quick rewind

Make call Access telephone menu on instrument pan- Access telephone menu on instrument pan- Access telephone menu on instru- Accept incoming call E el el ment panel End call Hold down: reject incoming call Safety Activate voice control/ F Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Interrupt current message/ Deactivate voice control »

59 Operation

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX TELEPHONE

Previous option in the menu/ list/ G Next preseta) Next tracka) No function specified selection shown on instrument panelb)

Next option in the menu/ list/ H Previous preseta) Previous tracka) No function specified selection shown on instrument panelb)

I Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel

J Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel

K Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Confirm

L Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Back to last-opened menu

a) Only if the panel is in audio menu. b) Only if the instrument panel is in the “TELEPHONE” menu. Examples of use: agenda, call list, select numbers, select letters, main menu.

60 Steering wheel controls*

Radio navigation system

Steering wheel audio version + telephone controls Technical specifications Technical Advice

Fig. 45 Steering wheel controls. Fig. 46 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model).

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX NAVIGATOR TELEPHONE

A Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up

B Volume down Volume down Volume down Volume down Volume down Operation

Next track C Search for next station No function specified No function specified No function specified Hold down: fast forward

Previous track D Search for last station No function specified No function specified No function specified Hold down: quick rewind » Safety

61 Operation

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX NAVIGATOR TELEPHONE

Accept incoming call (press briefly) Reject incoming call (press and hold down) End ongoing call /establish call (press E No function specified No function specified No function specified No function specified briefly) Switch to private mode (press and hold down) Redial last number (press and hold down)a)

Activation of voice recog- Activation of voice recogni- Activation of voice recogni- Activation of voice recognition nition for mobile phone tion for mobile phone con- tion for mobile phone con- Activation of voice recognition for mo- for mobile phone connected to F connected to the system nected to the system (if the nected to the system (if the bile phone connected to the system (if the system (if the phone has (if the phone has this phone has this function)* / phone has this function)* / the phone has this function)* / MUTE this function)* / MUTE function)* / MUTE MUTE MUTE

Operates on instrument pan- Operates on instrument panel/no func- G Next presetb) Next trackb) No function specified el tion specified

Operates on instrument pan- Operates on instrument panel/no func- H Previous presetb) Previous trackb) No function specified el tion specified

Change menu on instru- Change menu on instrument Change menu on instru- I No function specified Change menu on instrument panel ment panel panel ment panel

Change menu on instru- Change menu on instrument Change menu on instru- J No function specified Change menu on instrument panel ment panel panel ment panel

Operates on instrument Operates on instrument Operates on instrument pan- Operates on instrument panel/no func- K Operates on instrument panel panel panel el tion specified

Operates on instrument Operates on instrument Operates on instrument pan- Operates on instrument panel/no func- L Operates on instrument panel panel panel el tion specified

a) For a more detailed description of how to use this button, please refer to the radio navigation system user handbook (SEAT Media System) b) Only if the panel is in audio menu.

62 Opening and closing

Opening and closing Unlocking the vehicle* injury, for example, in the electric win- – Press button  ››› Fig. 50 on remote dows. Central locking control to unlock all the doors and rear – The doors can be locked using the remote lid. control key. This could become an obstacle for assistance in an emergency situa- Basic functions Locking the vehicle* tion. – Always take the key with you when you The central locking system enables you to – Press button  ››› Fig. 50 on the remote specifications Technical leave the vehicle. lock and unlock all doors and the rear lid by control to lock all doors and the rear lid just pushing the button. or turn the key in the door to lock all ● Never remove the key from the ignition if doors and the rear lid. the vehicle is in motion. The steering lock Description could suddenly engage, and you would not be able to steer the vehicle. Central locking can be activated by using any WARNING of the following options: ● Never leave children or disabled persons in Advice the vehicle. In case of emergency, they may Note ● the key, by inserting it into the driver door not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on ● While the driver door is open, the vehicle cylinder and rotating it manually, their own. cannot be locked with the remote control. ● the central lock button in the vehicle interi- ● Never allow children to play in or around This avoids the user from forgetting his key or ››› page 65. the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected inside the vehicle. ● the radio frequency remote control, using to extremely high and low temperatures, de- ● If the driver door is unlocked with the key the buttons on the key ››› page 67. pending on the time of year, thus causing se- shaft, only the driver door is unlocked, the rious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal rest of the doors remain locked. When the ig- Various functions are available to improve consequences. Close and lock both the rear nition is switched on, the door “deadlock” Operation the vehicle safety: lid and all the other doors when you are not function is deactivated (although the doors using the vehicle. remain locked) and the central lock button is – “Safe” locking system ● Always take you car keys with you when activated. See ››› page 68. – Selective unlocking system* you leave the vehicle. Misuse of the keys, for ● If the central locking or anti-theft alarm are – Automatic speed-dependent locking and example, by children, may result in serious faulty, the driver door control lamp remains damage and accident. unlocking system* lit for approx. 30 seconds after the vehicle locks.

– The engine may accidentally be started Safety – Self-locking system to prevent involunta- and be out of control. ● For anti-theft security, only the driver door ry unlocking – If the ignition is switched on, the electric is fitted with a lock cylinder. – Emergency unlocking system equipment could be activated with risk of

63 Operation

“Safe” security system* WARNING Automatic speed-dependent locking and unlocking system* This is an anti-theft device which consists of Nobody should remain in the vehicle if the a double lock for the door locks and a deacti- “deadlock” system mechanism has been activated. It is not possible to open the doors This is a safety system which prevents access vation function for the boot in order to pre- from the inside. Locked doors could delay as- to the vehicle from the outside when it is run- vent forced entry. sistance in an emergency. People could be- ning (e.g. when stopped at a traffic light). come trapped inside in an emergency. Activating the “deadlock” Locking – Press once the locking button  on the re- The doors and boot will lock automatically if mote control. or Selective unlocking system* the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) is exceeded. – Turn the key once in the driver door lock to If the vehicle is stopped and one of the doors This system allows to unlock either just the lock. A warning lamp in the driver door is opened, when the vehicle moves off again driver door or all the vehicle. flashes to indicate the “deadlock” is work- and exceeds a speed of 15 km/h (9 mph), ing. The warning lamp flashes for approx. 2 Using the remote control, press the unlock the unlocked door(s) will lock once more. seconds at short intervals and then more button on the remote  once. The “Safe” slowly. system for all the vehicle is deactivated, only Unlocking the driver door is unlocked and both the The driver door automatically unlocks when Deactivating the “deadlock” when the alarm and the warning lamp are also turned the key is removed from the ignition. vehicle is locked off. – Press the lock button  on the remote con- Each door can be unlocked and opened inde- trol twice within 2 seconds. The vehicle is Unlocking all doors and the luggage pendently from the inside (for example, when locked without activating the “deadlock”. compartment a passenger gets out). To do it, simply operate the lever inside the door. The driver door warning lamp flashes for The unlock button on the remote control approx. 2 seconds and then goes out. It must be pressed twice  so that all doors WARNING flashes again after around 30 seconds. and the luggage compartment can be opened. The door handles must not be operated when The doors can be unlocked and opened from the vehicle is running: the door would open. the inside if the “deadlock” has not been ac- Press twice within 2 seconds to deactivate tivated. You will have to pull the door release the “Safe” system for all vehicle, to unlock all lever once. When the “deadlock” is off, the doors and to use the luggage compartment. anti-theft alarm* ››› page 68 remains active. The warning lamp and the alarm (only vehi- The vehicle interior monitoring system* and cles fitted with one) are turned off. the anti-tow system are deactivated*. 64 Opening and closing

Automatic locking system for Deactivating selective unlocking The central lock button allows you to lock and involuntary unlocking* With the driver door open, turn the key to unlock the vehicle from the inside. lock for approx. 3 seconds. It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un- Locking the vehicle The turn signal lamps flash to confirm activa- intentional unlocking of the vehicle.  tion or deactivation. – Press the button ››› . If the vehicle is unlocked and none of the Unlocking the doors doors (including the boot) are opened within Activation of automatic locking specifications Technical 30 seconds, it re-locks automatically. This – Press button  . function prevents the vehicle from remaining Press the lock button  on the central lock- unlocked if the unlock button is pressed by ing button for 3 seconds. The central lock button also works with the mistake. ignition switched off, except when the “safe” Deactivation of automatic locking system is activated.

 Advice Press the unlock button on the central Please note the following if you lock your ve- Emergency unlocking system locking button for 3 seconds. hicle with the central lock button: The lock button lamp flashes to confirm acti- If the airbags are triggered during an acci- ● vation or deactivation. Locking the doors and rear lid prevents ac- dent, the vehicle is unlocked, except for the cess from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g. luggage compartment. It is possible to lock when stopped at a traffic light). the vehicle from inside with the central lock- Central lock button ● The driver door and/or front passenger ing, after turning the ignition off and back on door cannot be locked if any of the vehicle again. doors (except the boot) are open. This avoids Operation If the doors must be locked from the outside, the user from forgetting his key inside the ve- see “Emergency locking of the doors”. hicle. ● Repeated operation of the central locking will deactivate the central lock button for 30 Unlocking and locking - Manual seconds. Once this time has passed, the but- personalisation ton if operative again. ● There is a danger of leaving the key inside Activating selective unlocking the vehicle if the vehicle is locked by the cen- Safety With the driver door open, turn the key to un- tral locking button when the driver door is lock for approx. 3 seconds. Fig. 47 Detailed view of the centre console: closed and any of the rear doors open. On central locking button. closing any of the rear doors, the vehicle locks and the keys remain inside it. » 65 Operation

● All doors can be unlocked separately from Childproof lock Deactivating the childproof lock inside the vehicle. Do this by pulling the door – Unlock the vehicle and open the door release lever once. whose childproof lock you want to deactivate. WARNING – With the door open, rotate the slot in the ● If the vehicle is locked, children and disa- door using the ignition key, clockwise for bled people may be trapped inside it. the right-hand side doors, and anti-clock- ● The central lock button is not operative in wise for the left-hand side doors ››› Fig. 48. the following cases: ● When the vehicle is locked from the outside Once the childproof lock is activated, the (with the remote control or the key). door can only be opened from the outside. ● While the ignition is not activated after un- The childproof lock can be activated or deac- locking the door lock cylinder with the key. Fig. 48 Childproof lock on the left hand side tivated by inserting the key in the slot when door. the door is open, as described above.

Note The childproof lock prevents the rear doors ● Vehicle locked, amber button  . from being opened from the inside. This system prevents minors from opening a door ac- Keys ● Vehicle unlocked, red button  . cidentally while the vehicle is running. This function is independent of the vehicle Set of keys electronic opening and locking systems. It only affects rear doors. It can only be activated and deactivated manually, as described below:

Activating the childproof lock – Unlock the vehicle and open the door in which you wish to activate the childproof lock. – With the door open, rotate the slot in the door using the ignition key, clockwise for Fig. 49 Set of keys. the left-hand side doors and anti-clockwise for the right-hand side doors ››› Fig. 48. 66 Opening and closing

The set of keys belonging to your vehicle con- ing could suddenly block and it would be im- sists of the following items: possible to steer the vehicle. ● one remote control key ››› Fig. 49 A with folding key bit, CAUTION ● one key without remote control B , There are electronic components in the remote control key. Avoid wetting and hitting ● a plastic key tab* C .

the keys. specifications Technical Duplicate keys If you need a replacement key, go to a Techni- cal Service with your vehicle identification Radio frequency remote control Fig. 51 Range of the radio frequency remote number. control.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle Advice The radio frequency remote control key is WARNING used to lock and unlock the vehicle from a ● An incorrect use of the keys can cause seri- distance. ous injuries. By using button 4 ››› Fig. 50 on the control, ● Never leave children or disabled persons in the key shaft is released. the vehicle. In case of emergency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on Unlocking the vehicle  ››› Fig. 50 1 . their own. Locking the vehicle  ››› Fig. 50 2 . ● An uncontrolled use of the key could start Operation the engine or activate any electric equipment Unlocking the rear lid. Press button  (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of acci- ››› Fig. 50 3 until all the turn signals on the dent. The doors can be locked using the re- vehicle flash briefly. When the unlocking but- mote control key. This could become an ob- Fig. 50 Assignment of buttons on the remote ton  3 is pressed, you have 2 minutes to stacle for assistance in an emergency situa- control key. open the door. Once this time has passed, it tion. will lock again. ● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An Moreover, the battery indicator on the key

unauthorised use of your vehicle could result Safety in injury, damage or theft. Always take the ››› Fig. 50 (arrow), will flash. key with you when you leave the vehicle. The remote control transmitter and the bat- ● Never remove the key from the ignition if teries are integrated in the key. The receiver » the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer-

67 Operation

is inside the vehicle. The maximum range de- ● If the vehicle cannot be opened and closed – Then close the vehicle using the key shaft pends on different factors. The range is re- using the radio frequency remote control, the within one minute. duced as the batteries start to lose power. remote control key will have to be resynchronised ››› page 68. It is possible that the vehicle could no longer Selective unlocking* be opened and closed with the remote control if the button  is repeatedly pressed When the button  ››› Fig. 50 1 , is pressed outside of the effective range of the radio fre- once, the driver door is unlocked, all others Changing the battery quency remote control. The remote control remain locked. key will have to be resynchronised. If the battery indicator does not flash when Press the button  1 twice to un- ››› Fig. 50 the buttons are pushed, the battery must be Spare remote control keys are available at lock all doors. replaced. your Technical Service, where they must be matched to the locking system. WARNING CAUTION Up to four remote control keys can be used. Read and observe the relevant warnings ››› The use of inappropriate batteries may dam- in Set of keys on page 67 age the radio frequency remote control. For this reason, always replace the dead battery Note with another of the same size and power. Anti-theft alarm system* ● The radio frequency remote control can be programmed by means of pressing the un- For the sake of the environment Description of anti-theft alarm locking button once; as a result, only the system* Used batteries must be disposed of at an ap- driver door will unlock. When the button is propriate waste facility or through an author- pressed once more, all doors and the rear lid The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to ised service, given that their components can will be unlocked. break into the vehicle or steal it. Audible and affect the environment. ● The radio frequency remote control func- visible alarms are triggered if the vehicle is tions only when you are in range ››› Fig. 51 opened using the key, or if unauthorised ac- (red area). cess to the vehicle is forced. Synchronising the remote control key ● If the vehicle is unlocked using the  1 The anti-theft alarm system is automatically button, it will lock again automatically if any If it is not possible to unlock or lock the door switched on when locking the vehicle. The of the doors or the rear lid are not opened with the remote control, it should be re- system is then primed. within 30 seconds after unlocking it. This synchronised. function prevents the vehicle from remaining ● The turn signal light will flash twice on unlocked if the unlock button is pressed by – Press the  ››› Fig. 50 button on the re- opening and deactivating the alarm. mistake. mote control.

68 Opening and closing

● The turn signal light will flash once on clos- ● Use the lock on the driver door to unlock ● If, after the audible warning turns off, an- ing and activating the alarm. the vehicle. The anti-theft alarm system re- other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the mains active, but an alarm is not triggered boot hatch is opened after a door has been When does the system trigger an alarm? immediately. opened), the alarm is triggered again. The system triggers an alarm if the following ● Switch on the ignition within 15 seconds. ● The anti-theft alarm is not activated when unauthorised actions are carried out when When the ignition is switched on, the elec- the vehicle is locked from within using the the vehicle is locked: tronic immobiliser recognises a valid vehicle central locking button  . key and deactivates the anti-theft alarm sys- ● If the vehicle battery is run down or flat specifications Technical ● Opening the vehicle mechanically using tem. If you do not switch on the ignition with- then the anti-theft alarm will not operate cor- the key and with the ignition off. in 15 seconds, the alarm is triggered (in cer- rectly. ● A door is opened. tain markets, such as the Netherlands, there ● Vehicle monitoring remains active even if is no 15-second waiting time and the alarm ● Opening the bonnet. the battery is disconnected or not working for is activated immediately after opening the any reason. ● The rear lid is opened. Advice door). ● The alarm is triggered immediately if one of ● Ignition switched on with a non-validated the battery cables is disconnected while the key. Opening all the doors in manual mode alarm system is active. ● Movements in the driving compartment In vehicles without an alarm, when opening (vehicles with interior monitoring). the driver door manually, all doors are ● Undue manipulation of the alarm. opened. Interior monitoring* ● Battery handling. How to switch the alarm off This is a monitoring or control function incor-

porated in the anti-theft alarm* which de- Operation The acoustic signals sound and the turn sig- When the vehicle is unlocked via the unlock- tects unauthorized vehicle entry by means of nals flash for approx. 30 seconds. This cycle ing button of the radio frequency remote con- ultrasound. may be repeated up to 10 times depending trol or when the key is inserted in the ignition on the country. lock. The system consists of 3 sensors, 2 emitters and a receptor. Opening the doors mechanically (emergency Note opening) ● After 28 days, the indicator light will be Activation If the radio frequency remote control function switched off to prevent the battery from – It is automatically turned on with the anti- Safety fails, you will have to use the key to unlock draining if the vehicle has been left parked theft alarm, when the vehicle is locked me- the vehicle. This is done as follows: for a long period of time. The alarm system chanically with the key and when the but- remains activated. ton  on the remote control is used. »

69 Operation

Deactivation when the vehicle is opened. This flashing will If the anti-theft security system “deadlock”* – Press the button  on the remote control be different to that for an activated alarm. ››› page 64 is switched off, the interior moni- twice. It only deactivates the interior monitor automatically turns off. tor. The alarm system remains activated. WARNING Deactivating vehicle interior False alarms monitoring systems1) Observe the safety warnings ››› in “Safe” Interior monitoring will only operate correctly security system* on page 64. if the vehicle is completely closed. Please observe related legal requirements.

The following cases may cause a false alarm: ● Open windows (partially or fully). ● Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or completely). ● Movement of objects inside the vehicle, such as loose papers, items hanging from the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc. Fig. 52 interior monitor button. WARNING With the vehicle locked, any movement in the ● The “deadlock” system remains deactiva- interior (e.g. pets) will set off the alarm. De- ted if the interior monitor is deactivated. activate interior monitor systems to prevent ● For those vehicles in which a separation the alarm from going off unintentionally. screen is fitted, the alarm will not function – To switch off the vehicle interior monitor, correctly due to interference with the sensor. switch off the ignition and press button ››› Fig. 52. The indicator on the button will Note light up. ● If the alarm has been triggered by the inte- – When the vehicle is now locked, the vehicle rior monitor, this will be indicated by a flash- interior monitor is switched off until the ing of the warning lamp on the driver door next time the door is opened.

1) Only available in certain markets. 70 Opening and closing

Boot hatch Opening the rear lid ● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it. – Pull on the release lever and lift the rear lid If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv- Unlocking and locking ››› Fig. 53. The rear lid will automatically ing. open. ● Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected Closing the rear lid to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year, thus causing se- – Hold the rear lid by one of the two handles rious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal specifications Technical on the interior lining and close it, pushing consequences. Close and lock both the rear slightly. lid and all the other doors when you are not using the vehicle. This system may or may not be operative, de- ● pending on the situation of the vehicle. Closing the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury If the rear lid is locked then it cannot be to you and to third parties. Make sure that no Advice opened, however if it is unlocked then the one is in the path of the rear lid. Fig. 53 Rear lid: opening from the outside. opening system is operative and the rear lid ● Never drive with the rear lid open or half- may be opened. closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning! To lock/unlock, press the button  or the button 1 on the remote control key. ● If you only open the rear lid, do not leave the key inside. The vehicle cannot be opened A warning appears on the instrument panel if the key is left inside. display if the rear lid is open or not properly closed.* An audible warning is also given if it Operation is opened while the vehicle is moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.

WARNING Fig. 54 Close-up of the inside trim of the rear ● Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of lid: hand grip accident or injury.

● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down Safety The rear lid opening system operates electri- with your hand on the rear window. The glass cally. It is activated by using the handle on could smash. Risk of injury! the rear boot lid.

71 Operation

Electric windows ger door has been opened and the key has ● Always take the vehicle key with you when not been removed from the ignition. you leave the vehicle. Opening or closing the electric ● Never leave children or disabled persons in Buttons on the driver door windows the vehicle, particularly if they have access to 1 Button for window in front left door the keys. An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any electric 2 Button for window in front right door equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The doors can be locked us- Buttons for rear windows* ing the remote control key. This could be- 3 Safety switch for deactivating the electric come an obstacle for assistance in an emer- window buttons in the rear doors gency situation. ● The electric windows will work until the key 4 Button for window in rear left door has been removed from the ignition and one 5 Button for window in rear right door of the front doors has been opened. ● If necessary, use the safety switch to disa- Safety switch * ble the rear electric windows. Make sure that Fig. 55 Detail of the driver door: controls for Safety switch 3 on the driver door can be they have been disabled. the front and rear windows. used to disable the electric window buttons in the rear doors. The front and rear electric windows can be Note operated by using the controls on the driver Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear If the window is not able to close because it door. doors are activated. is stiff or because of an obstruction, the window will automatically open again Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors Opening and closing the windows ››› page 73. If this happens, check why the are deactivated. window could not be closed before attempt- – Press the button  to open the window. ing to close it again. WARNING – Pull the button  to close the window ››› . ● Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury. One-touch opening and closing Always close the windows fully if you park ● Never close the rear lid without observing the vehicle or leave it unattended ››› . and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could One-touch opening and closing means you You can use the electric windows for approx. cause serious injury to you and third parties. do not have to hold down the button. 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if Make sure that no one is in the path of a window. neither the driver door nor the front passen-

72 Opening and closing

One-touch closing Roll-back function be gone for a short time. Please ensure that – Pull up the window button briefly up to the children are never left alone inside the vehi- second position. The window closes fully. The roll-back function reduces the risk of in- cle. jury when the electric windows close. ● The electric windows will work until the key One-touch opening ● If a window is obstructed when closing au- has been removed from the ignition and one of the front doors has been opened. – Push down the window button briefly up to tomatically, the window stops at this point ● Never close the rear lid without observing the second position. The window opens and lowers immediately ››› . specifications Technical fully. and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could ● If this happens, check immediately (within cause serious injury to you and third parties. 10 seconds) why the window could not be Make sure that no one is in the path of a win- Restoring one-touch opening and closing closed before attempting to close it again. Af- dow. – Close all windows. ter 10 seconds the normal automatic func- ● Never allow people to remain in the vehicle tion resumes. when you close the vehicle from the outside. – Use the key to lock the vehicle from outside Advice ● The windows cannot be opened even in an and hold the key in the lock position for at If the window is still obstructed, the win- emergency. least one second. The one-touch function is dow will stop at this point. now ready for operation. ● If there is no obvious reason why the window cannot be closed, try to close it again Note The buttons ››› Fig. 55 1 and 2 have two within 5 seconds. The roll-back function is deactivated if the levels for opening the window and two for windows are closed from the outside of the If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the win- closing it. This makes it easier to open and vehicle using the ignition key for convenience dow will open again fully when you operate close windows to the desired position. closing ››› page 73.

one of the buttons. One-touch closing is reac- Operation One-touch closing does not work when the tivated. ignition has been switched off, even if the key is in the ignition. The one-touch function and roll-back function Convenience opening and closing* will not work if there is a malfunction in the The automatic open and close function will electric windows. Contact a specialised work- not work if the battery has been temporarily Using the door lock shop. disconnected, or if the battery is flat. The – Hold the key in the door lock of the driver function then has to be reactivated. door in either the locking or the unlocking WARNING position until all windows are either Safety The one-touch function and roll-back function ● Incorrect use of the electric windows can opened or closed. will not work if there is a malfunction in the result in injury. electric windows. Contact a specialised work- – Release the key to interrupt this function. ● Always take the ignition key with you when » shop. leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to 73 Operation

Using the remote control Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof WARNING – Push the lock or unlock button on the re- – Turn the rotary button to position A ● Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof mote control for approximately 3 seconds. ››› Fig. 56 ››› . can result in injury. All windows which function electrically will ● Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof with- be either opened or closed. Opening the sliding/tilting sunroof out checking there are no obstructions, to do – Release the unlock button to interrupt the – Turn the rotary button to position B . The otherwise could cause serious injury to you function. sunroof opens to the convenience position and others. Make sure that no one is in the where wind noise is reduced. path of the sliding/tilting sunroof. – Once the windows are completely closed, ● Always take the vehicle key with you when – To open the roof further, turn the switch to the turn signals will flash. you leave the vehicle. position C and hold the switch in this position until the roof opens to the desired ● Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if they have access to position. Sliding/tilting sunroof* the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that elec- Tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof trical equipment is used (e.g. electric slid- Opening and closing the – Turn the rotary button to position D . ing/tilting sunroof). Risk of accident! The sliding/tilting roof doors can be locked using the remote control Always close the sliding/tilting sunroof fully key. This could become an obstacle for assis- if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended tance in an emergency situation. ››› . ● The sliding/tilting sunroof continues to The sliding/tilting sunroof can be operated function until one of the front doors is opened and the key removed from the igni- for up to about 10 minutes after the ignition tion. has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front passenger door are not opened. Convenience closing* Sun visor Using the door lock The sun visor is opened together with the Fig. 56 Roof lining description: sliding/tilting – Hold the key in the door lock of the driver sunroof rotary knob. sliding/tilting sunroof. If required, it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed. door in the locking position until the sliding/tilting sunroof is closed. The sliding/tilting sunroof is opened and closed using the rotary knob when the igni- – Release the key to interrupt this function. tion is switched on. 74 Lights and visibility Using the remote control The sliding/tilting sunroof has a roll-back Lights and visibility – Push the lock button on the remote control function which prevents larger objects getting trapped when the roof is closed. The roll- for approximately 3 seconds. The slid- Lights ing/tilting sunroof is closed. back function does not prevent fingers getting pinched against the roof opening. The – Release the unlock button to interrupt the sliding/tilting sunroof stops and opens again Switching lights on and off function. immediately if it is obstructed when closing. Technical specifications Technical – When the sliding/tilting sunroof has closed If the sliding/tilting sunroof has been completely, the turn signals flash once. opened again by the roll-back function, it can be closed only by pressing the rotary button Note at the front in position A ››› Fig. 57 until the The sliding/tilting sunroof rotary knob re- sliding/tilting sunroof has closed fully.

mains in the last position selected if the roof Please note that the sunroof will now close Advice is closed using convenience closing from out- without the roll-back function. side the vehicle and will have to be re-positioned the next time you drive.

Fig. 58 Detailed view of the dash panel: lights, front fog lights and rear fog light Roll-back function of the switch. sliding/tilting sunroof* Switching on the side lights Operation – Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 58 to position .

Switching on dipped beam headlights – Turn the light switch to position .

Switching off the lights Safety – Turn the light switch to position 0. »

Fig. 57 Roof lining description: sliding/tilting sunroof rotary knob. 75 Operation

Switching on front fog lights* remains open. This is a reminder to switch Automatic lighting* – Pull the switch out of position  or  to the lights off. the first stop. The symbol  of the light ● The rear fog light is so bright that it can control lights up. dazzle drivers behind you. You should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicles poor. with front fog lights) ● If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with a factory-fitted – Pull the switch out of position  or  to towing bracket, the rear fog light on the vehi- the second stop . A control lamp lights ››› cle will automatically be switched off. up on the dash panel. ● The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory require- Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicles ments. Fig. 59 Automatic lighting. with no front fog lights) ● Depending on weather conditions (very – Pull the light switch from position  to the cold or wet), the front and rear lights and the Activation last stop. A control lamp lights up in the indicators may be temporarily misted. This – Rotate the switch to the position. It will dash panel. has no influence on the useful life of the light up. lighting system. The lights will soon demist WARNING when they are switched on. Deactivation Never drive with just the side lights on. Risk – Turn the light switch to . of accident. The side lights are not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to Automatic lighting ensure that other road users are able to see you. Always use your dipped beam head- If automatic headlight control is switched on, lights if it is dark or if visibility is poor. dipped beam headlights are automatically switched on by a photosensor if you drive in- to a tunnel, for example. Note ● The dipped beam headlights will only work The rain sensor switches on the dipped beam with the ignition on. The side lights come on headlights when the windscreen wipers have automatically when the ignition is turned off. been operating continuously for a few seconds and it switches the lights off when the ● If the lights are left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition lock, an audi- continuous or interval wipe is switched off for ble warning will sound while the driver door some minutes ››› page 84.

76 Lights and visibility

When the automatic dipped beam headlight ● To avoid damage to the tail lights, the times. The corresponding control lamp will control is on but the dipped beam headlights lights mounted on the rear lid go off when the also flash. are off, the warning lamp  lights up on rear lid is opened (depending on the country). the light control ››› Fig. 59. If the automatic Switching main beam on and off control switches on the dipped lights, the in- – If the dipped lights are on, push the lever strument and control lighting is also switch- Turn signal and main beam headlight forward ››› Fig. 60 3 to switch on the main ed on. beam headlights.

lever specifications Technical WARNING – Push the lever towards the steering wheel ››› Fig. 60 4 to switch off the main beam. ● Even if the automatic headlight control is switched on, the dipped beam headlights will not be switched on with fog. Therefore, the Headlight flashers dipped beam must be switched on manually. – Pull the lever towards the steering wheel Advice 4 to operate the flasher. Note Switching on parking lights  ● For those vehicles with the automatic headlight system, when the key is removed from – Switch the ignition off and remove the key the ignition, the audible warning will only from the lock. sound if the light control is in the position  Fig. 60 Turn signal and main beam lever or  if the vehicle is not fitted with the com- – Move the turn signal lever up or down to ing home function. The turn signal and main beam headlight lev- turn the right or left-hand parking lights on, respectively. ● If the daylight driving automatic light func- er has the following functions: Operation tion is switched on, the front fog lights or rear fog light cannot be switched on in addi- Switching on the turn signals WARNING tion. – Move the lever all the way up ››› Fig. 60 1 The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk ● The use of the lighting described here is to indicate right, and all the way down 2 of accident! Never use the main beam headlights or the headlight flasher if they could subject to the relevant statutory require- to indicate left. ments. dazzle other drivers. ● Do not put stickers on the windscreen in Signalling a lane change Safety front of the sensor. This may cause disrup- Note – 1 2 tions or faults in the automatic lighting sys- Push the lever up or down to the ● The turn signals only work when the igni- tem. point where you incur resistance and then release it. The turn signal will flash several tion is switched on. The corresponding warning lamp  or  flashes in the instrument » 77 Operation

panel. The control lamp  flashes when the into the headlights and come on each time Note turn signals are operated, provided a trailer is the ignition is turned on if the light switch is Please observe any relevant legal require- correctly attached and connected to the vehi- in position 0 or . It is automatically ments which may apply in your country. cle. If a turn signal bulb is defective, the con- switched off when the side lights are turned trol lamp flashes at double speed. If the trail- on. er turn signal bulbs are defective, the control lamp  does not light up. Change the bulb. Automatic control of the dipped beam in Nordic country solution ● The main beam headlights can only be combination with the daytime running lights 3 Only available in certain countries or as an switched on if the dipped beam headlights If the dipped beam control and the daytime optional extra are already on. The warning lamp  then running lights are activated at the same comes on in the instrument panel. The so-called “Nordic country solution” is an time, the dipped beams and the instrument ● The headlight flasher comes on for as long alternative solution to daytime running lights panel lighting will automatically come on as in vehicles without this function. It consists as you pull the lever – even if no other lights required (e.g. when entering a tunnel) and are switched on. The warning lamp  then of simultaneously connecting the dimmed the daytime running lights will switch off. comes on in the instrument panel. dipped beams, the sidelights and the licence When the automatic dipped beam control plate lights. ● When the parking lights are switched on, switches off the dipped beams (e.g. when the headlight and the tail light on the corre- coming out of a tunnel), the daytime running The aforementioned lights are switched on sponding side of the vehicle light up. The lights come back on. each time the ignition is turned on if the light parking lights will only work if the key is re- switch is in position 0 or . Depending moved from the ignition. If said light is on, an upon the model, the control lamp  on the audible warning will be emitted while the WARNING light control switch or the instrument panel driver door is open. The side lights or daytime driving lights are lighting will indicate that the lights are on. ● If the turn signal lever is left on after the not bright enough to illuminate the road key has been taken out of the ignition lock, ahead and to ensure that other road users are Activation of the Nordic country solution an acoustic signal sounds when the driver able to see you. door is opened. This is intended as a remind- ● Always use your dipped beam head lights if ● Remove the key from the ignition, move the er to switch off the turn signal, unless you it is raining or if visibility is poor. turn signal lever upward (right turn signal), wish to leave the parking light on. ● The rear lights do not come on with the press it back to flash position and hold it daytime driving light. A vehicle which does there. not have the rear lights on may not be visible ● Insert the key and switch on the ignition, Daytime driving lights* to other drivers in the darkness, if it is rain- holding it in this position for 3 seconds. ing or in conditions of poor visibility. Then, switch off the ignition. The Nordic Daytime running lights are signalling devices country solution is now activated and the cor- for improving road safety. The lights are built responding lights can come on.

78 Lights and visibility

Deactivation of the Nordic country solution starts and the switching off the headlights is Note delayed. ● Remove the key from the ignition, press the The setting for the delay in switching off the turn signal lever down (left turn signal), press The Coming Home lighting switches off in the headlights in the Coming Home and Leaving it back to flash position and hold it here. following cases: Home function can be changed or the func- ● Insert the key and switch on the ignition, tion can be connected or disconnected in the ● On completion of the time period establish- holding it in this position for 3 seconds. menu Lights and visibility ››› page 56. ed for the delay in switching off the lights af- ● If the ignition key is removed while the Then, switch off the ignition. The Nordic specifications Technical ter all the vehicle doors and the rear lid have country solution is now deactivated and the lights are on, the lights flash briefly and the been closed. corresponding lights will not come on. driver door opens, no audible warning is ● If, 30 seconds after being connected, any heard, since with the Coming Home function doors or the rear lid remain open. on, the lights are automatically switched off after a period of time (except when the light ●  Coming Home/Leaving Home If the light switch is turned to position . switch is in position  or . function* ● If the ignition is switched on. Advice

The Coming Home function is controlled man- Leaving home function ually. The Leaving Home function is control- Instrument and switch lighting / led with a photosensor. The Leaving Home function is activated when Headlight range control the vehicle is unlocked if: If the Coming Home or Leaving Home function is connected, the front side and dipped ● the light control is in position  and lights, the tail lights and the number plate ● the photosensor detects “darkness”.

light will light up to provide assistance. Operation The Leaving Home lighting switches off in the Coming home function following cases: The Coming Home function is activated by ● If the time period for the delay in switching switching off the ignition and briefly flashing off the headlights has ended the lights. When the driver door is opened, ● If the vehicle is locked again. the Coming Home lighting comes on. If the ● If the light switch is turned to position . driver door is already open when the lights Fig. 61 Dash panel: Instrument panel and Safety are flashed briefly, the Coming Home lighting ● If the ignition is switched on. control dimmers and headlight range control. » comes on immediately. When the last door of the vehicle or the rear lid is closed, the Coming Home function 79 Operation

Instrument and switch lighting 1 beam, turn the thumb wheel down 2 from When driving around bends, the headlights When the headlights are switched on, the the basic setting 0. will light the most important areas of the brightness of the instrument panel and con- road. trols can be adjusted by turning the thumb Dynamic headlight range control wheel ››› Fig. 61 1 . Vehicles with gas discharge lamps (“xenon Dynamic cornering lights* (AFS) The instrument lighting (dials and needles), lamps”) are equipped with dynamic head- Dynamic cornering lights only operate if the the centre console illumination and the illu- light range control. This means that the vehicle is travelling at more than 10 km/h mination of the displays are regulated by a headlights will be adjusted to suit the load (6 mph) and the dipped headlights are on. photodiode incorporated in the instrument level of the vehicle and “nodding move- When taking a bend, the road is illuminated panel. ments” when pulling off and braking are au- better with directional gas discharge bulbs tomatically compensated for. than with conventional fixed headlights. The instrument lighting (dials and needles) is switched on when the ignition is on and the Vehicles with gas discharge bulbs do not A fault in the system is indicated via the have headlight range control. flashing of the control lamp  on the instru- vehicle lights are off. The instrument lighting is dimmed automatically as the daylight ment panel. At the same time, a text mes- starts to fade. It goes out completely when sage with information or instructions to per- ambient light is very low. This function is in- Adaptive headlights* (for driving form necessary operations may appear on tended to remind the driver to switch on the round bends) the instrument panel display. Take the vehi- dipped beam headlights in good time when cle to a specialised workshop and have the light conditions become poor. fault repaired. If the control lamp  lights up on the instru- Headlight range control 2 ment panel but all the bulbs are operating By using the electrical headlight range con- correctly ››› page 198, there may still be a trol, 2 you can adjust the headlight range to fault in the dynamic curve lighting system the load level that is being carried in the ve- (AFS). Take the vehicle to a specialised work- hicle. This way, it is possible to avoid daz- shop and have the fault repaired. zling oncoming traffic more than necessary. At the same time, by using the correct head- WARNING light settings, the driver has the best possi- If the “automatic dipped beam control” is ble lighting for the road ahead. Fig. 62 Cornering lighting using adaptive switched on, the dipped beam headlights will headlights. not be switched on in fog. They should be The headlights can only be adjusted when switched on manually using the light switch. the dipped beam is switched on. To lower the The driver is personally responsible for the

80 Lights and visibility

correct use of lights in all situations. “Auto- Hazard warning lights  7. Always take the vehicle key with you when matic headlight control” is merely a system you leave the vehicle. to support the driver. Where necessary, switch on the lights manually using the light Switch on the hazard warning lights to warn switch. other road users, for example: ● reaching the tail end of a traffic jam,

● there is an emergency specifications Technical Fog lights with cornering function* ● your vehicle breaks down due to a techni- 3 Applies to the model: ALTEA / ALTEA XL cal fault, When the turn signal is switched on to turn or ● you are towing another vehicle or your vehi- on very tight bends, the right or left fog light cle is being towed. automatically comes on to function as a cor- Fig. 63 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn- Advice nering light. The cornering light only oper- ing lights. All turn signals flash simultaneously when ates if the dipped beam lights are on. the hazard warning lights are switched on. The hazard warning lights are used to draw The two turn signal turn signal lamps   WARNING the attention of other road users to your vehi- and the turn signal lamp in the switch  will cle in emergencies. flash at the same time. The hazard warning Read and observe the relevant warnings ››› lights also work when the ignition is switch- in Adaptive headlights* (for driving round If your vehicle breaks down: ed off. bends) on page 80 1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic. Emergency braking warning Operation 2. Press the button to switch on the hazard If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu- warning lights ››› . ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50 mph), the brake light flashes several times 3. Switch the ignition off. per second to warn the vehicles driving be- 4. Apply the handbrake. hind. If you continue braking, the hazard warning lights will come on automatically 5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear; when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They for an automatic gearbox, move the gear switch off automatically when the vehicle Safety lever to P. starts to move again. » 6. Use the warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your vehicle.

81 Operation

 WARNING Interior lights Courtesy light position ● The risk of an accident increases if your ve- Rocker switch in flat position (not activated). hicle breaks down. Always use the hazard Front interior lights and reading lights The interior lighting is automatically switched warning lights and a warning triangle to draw on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key re- the attention of other road users to your sta- moved from the ignition. It goes out approxi- tionary vehicle. mately 20 seconds after the doors are ● Never park where the catalytic converter closed. The interior lights are switched off could come into contact with inflammable when the vehicle is locked or when the igni- materials under the vehicle, for example dry tion is switched on. grass or spilt petrol. This could start a fire! Interior light switched on  Note Push the switch to the position . ● The battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long time, Turning off the interior light 0 Fig. 64 Interior roof trim: front interior light- even if the ignition is switched off. Press the switch to position 0 ››› Fig. 64 or ing option 1. ● The use of the hazard warning lights de- ››› Fig. 65. scribed here is subject to the relevant statutory requirements. Switching on the reading light  Press the corresponding button B ››› Fig. 64 or ››› Fig. 65 to switch on the reading light.

Switching the reading lights off  Press the corresponding button to switch the reading light off.

Note Fig. 65 Interior roof trim: front interior light- If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the in- ing option 2. terior lights will be switched off after approx. 10 minutes, providing the ignition key has Switch A ››› Fig. 64 o ››› Fig. 65 is used to se- been removed and the courtesy light position lect the following positions: selected. This prevents the battery from discharging. 82 Lights and visibility

Rear interior lights and reading closed. The interior lights are switched off The sun visors for the driver and the front lights* when the vehicle is locked or when the igni- passenger can be pulled out of their mount- tion is switched on. ings in the centre of the vehicle and turned towards the doors ››› Fig. 67 1 . Interior lights or both reading lights The vanity mirrors in the sun visors have cov- switched on  ers. When you open the cover 2 , a lamp in Turn the control to position 5 . the roof lights up. Technical specifications Technical The light* in the roof lining will go out when Note the vanity mirror cover is pushed back or the If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the in- sun visor is pushed back up. terior lights will be switched off after approx. 10 minutes, providing the ignition key has Note

been removed and the courtesy light position Advice Fig. 66 Interior roof trim: rear interior lights selected. This prevents the battery from dis- The roof lighting will go out approximately and reading lights. charging. ten minutes after the ignition key has been removed. This prevents the battery from dis- The switch ››› Fig. 66 C is used to select the charging. following positions: Visibility Interior light switched off 0 Sun blind* In switch position ››› Fig. 66 1 , the interior Sun visors 3 Applies to the model: ALTEA XL/ALTEA FREETRACK and reading lights are switched off. Operation

Switching on the reading light  Turn the switch to position 2 (left reading light) or to position 4 (right reading light).

Courtesy light position  Safety Turn the control to position 3 . The interior lighting is automatically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the ignition. The light goes out approxi- Fig. 67 Sun visor on the driver side. Fig. 68 Rear door blind. » mately 20 seconds after the doors are 83 Operation

Rear window sun blind* Slow wipe – Pull out the visor and hook it onto the – Push the lever up to position 2 . hooks at the top of the door frame ››› Fig. 68. Continuous wipe – Push the lever up to position 3 .

Windscreen wiper and rear Short wipe window wiper systems – Move the lever down to position 4 to give the windscreen a short wipe. The wiper will Windscreen wipers  Fig. 70 Rain sensor on the windscreen seen start to move faster if you keep the lever from the interior. pressed down for longer than two seconds.

The windscreen wiper lever ››› Fig. 69 has the Automatic wash/wipe  following positions: – Pull the lever towards the steering wheel, position 5 . The wash function will start Initial position 0 immediately and the wipers will start with a Rest, windscreen disconnected. slight delay. The wash and wiper systems will function at the same time at speeds of Intermittent wipe / automatic wipe with rain over 120 km/h (75 mph). sensor* – Release the lever. The wipers will keep run- – Move the lever up to position 1 . ning for approximately 4 seconds. Fig. 69 Windscreen wiper lever. – With switch A adjust the wipe interval or Heated windscreen in the wiper blade area* sensitivity of the rain sensor*. In some countries and in some versions, it is Switch A has 4 positions. possible to heat the windscreen in the area The rain sensor* is part of the intermittent of the windscreen wiper blades in order to wipe function. You will have to switch the rain aid de-icing in this area. The function is sensor back on if you switch off the ignition. switched on by pressing the heated rear win-  This is done by switching the wiper interval dow key . wipe function off and back on.

84 Lights and visibility

WARNING ● When in use, the wipers do not go as far as ● Do not put stickers on the windscreen in the rest position. When the lever is moved to front of the rain sensor*. This may cause sen- ● Worn and dirty wiper blades reduce visibili- position 0, they are totally hidden. sor disruption or faults. ty and safety levels while driving. ● If the vehicle stops when wiper speed 2 ● In cold conditions, you should not use the ››› Fig. 69 or 3 is selected, the next speed wash/wipe system unless you have warmed down will be selected automatically. The set the windscreen with the heating and ventila- Rear window wiper  speed will be resumed when the vehicle pulls tion system. The windscreen washer fluid away. specifications Technical could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure your view of the road. ● The windscreen will be wiped again after approximately five seconds once the “auto- ● The rain sensor may not detect enough rain matic wash/wipe system” has been activa- to switch on the wipers. If necessary, switch ted, provided the vehicle is moving (drip func- on the wipers manually when water on the tion). If you activate the wipers less than 3 windscreen impedes visibility. seconds after the drip function, a new wash Advice ● Always note the corresponding warnings sequence will begin without performing the ››› page 194. last wipe. For the “drip” function to work again, you have to turn the ignition off and CAUTION then on again. Fig. 71 Windscreen wiper lever: rear window ● When the “interval wipe function” is on, In icy conditions, always check that the wiper wiper. the intervals are directly proportional to the blades are not frozen to the glass before us- speed. This way, the higher the vehicle speed ing the wipers for the first time. If you switch Switching on the interval wipe the shorter the intervals. on the windscreen wipers when the wiper – Press the lever forward to position 6 Operation blades are frozen to the windscreen, you ● The wiper will try to wipe away any obsta- could damage both the wiper blades and the cles that are on the windscreen. The wiper ››› Fig. 71. The wiper will wipe the window wiper motor. will stop moving if the obstacle continues to approximately every 6 seconds. block its path. Remove the obstacle and switch the wiper back on again. Switching off the interval wipe function Note ● Before removing any objects that may be – Pull the lever back from position 6 toward ● The windscreen wipers will only work when trapped in the side areas of the windscreen, the steering wheel. The wiper will continue the ignition is switched on. always move the wiper arms to the service to function for a short period if you switch Safety ● In certain versions of vehicles with alarms, position (horizontal). off whilst the wipers are in motion. » the windscreen wiper will only work when the ● The heat output of the heated jets is con- ignition is on and the bonnet closed. trolled automatically when the ignition is switched on, depending upon the outside temperature. 85 Operation

Switching on automatic wipe ● In reverse gear, with the windscreen wipers Rear vision mirrors – Press the lever fully forwards to position 7 switched on, the rear windscreen wiper will ››› Fig. 71. The rear wash function will start make one wipe. Interior rear vision mirror immediately and the wiper will start a few seconds later. The rear window wash sys- It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see tem will function as long as you hold the Headlight washer* clearly through the rear window. lever in this position. The headlight washers clean the headlight – Release the lever. The wiper then wipes for Manual anti-dazzle function for interior rear lenses. approximately 4 seconds, and then in inter- vision mirror vals again. The headlight washers are activated auto- In the basic mirror position, the lever at the matically when the windscreen washer is bottom edge of the rear vision mirror should – Release the lever. The washer system stops used and the window wiper lever is pulled to- be at the front. Pull the lever to the back to and the wipers function. wards the steering wheel for at least 1.5 sec- select the anti-dazzle function. onds – provided the dipped beam headlights WARNING or main beams are switched on. Clean off ● Worn and dirty wiper blades reduce visibili- stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the head- Automatic anti-dazzle interior rear ty and safety levels while driving. lights at regular intervals, for instance, when vision mirror* ● Always note the corresponding warnings filling the fuel tank. on ››› page 194. Note CAUTION ● To ensure that the headlight washers work In icy conditions, always check that the wiper properly in winter, keep the nozzle holders in blade is not frozen to the glass before using the bumper free of snow and remove any ice the wiper for the first time. If you switch on with a de-icer spray. the wiper when the wiper blade is frozen to ● To remove water, the windscreen wipers the glass, this could damage both the wiper will be activated from time to time, the head- blade and the wiper motor. light washers will be activated every three cy- cles. Note Fig. 72 Automatic anti-dazzle interior rear vision mirror. ● The windscreen wiper will only function when the ignition is switched on and the rear lid is closed.

86 Lights and visibility

Switching off the anti-dazzle function Exterior mirrors heated windscreen* in the wiper blade rest area is activated . – Press button A ››› Fig. 72. Control lamp B ››› page 84 goes off. – Exterior mirror heating is not activated in temperatures above approximately +20 °C Switching on the anti-dazzle function (+68 °F). – Press button A ››› Fig. 72. The control Folding in exterior mirrors* lamp lights up. specifications Technical – Turn the control ››› Fig. 73 to position  to Anti-dazzle function fold in the exterior mirrors. You should al- The anti-dazzle function is activated every ways fold in the exterior mirrors if you are time the ignition is switched on. The green driving through an automatic car wash. warning lamp lights up in the rear vision mir- This will help prevent damage. Fig. 73 Exterior mirror controls. ror housing. Advice When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using Folding exterior mirrors with convenience interior rear vision mirror will darken auto- the rotary knob in the centre console. closing* matically according to the amount of light it – The exterior mirror will fold back automati- receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel- Basic setting of exterior mirrors cally with convenience closing (with the re- led if reverse gear is engaged. 1. Turn knob ››› Fig. 73 to position L (left ex- mote or the key). terior mirror). – To unfold it again, open the door and Note 2. Turn the rotary knob to position the exteri- switch on the ignition. ● The automatic anti-dazzle function will only Operation or mirror so that you have a good view to work properly if the sun blind* for the rear the rear of the vehicle. Folding exterior mirrors back out to the window is retracted and there are no other extended position* objects preventing light from reaching the in- 3. Turn the knob to position R (right exterior – Turn the knob to another position to fold terior rear vision mirror. mirror). ● If you have to stick any type of sticker on the exterior mirrors back out ››› . 4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the ex- the windscreen, do not do so in front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-daz- terior mirror so that you have a good view Synchronised mirror adjustment to the rear of the vehicle ››› . Safety zle function from working well or even from 1. Turn the control to the position L (left ex- working at all. terior mirror). Heating the exterior mirrors* 2. Turn the rotary knob to position the exteri- – Turn the knob forward ››› Fig. 73 so that the or mirror so that you have a good view to heated rear vision mirrors warm up and the » 87 Operation

the rear of the vehicle. The right exterior the rear vision mirror housing by hand, as Seats and head restraints mirror will be adjusted at the same time this will interfere with the mirror adjuster (synchronised). function. Adjusting the seat and head ● The rear vision mirrors can be adjusted sep- WARNING arately or simultaneously, as described restraints ● Convex or spherical mirrors increase the above. field of vision however the objects appear ● The folding function on the exterior mirrors The importance of correct seat smaller and further away. If you use these is not active at speeds over 40 km/h adjustment mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles (25 mph). behind you when changing lane, you could Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of make a mistake. Risk of accident. protection offered by seat belts and airbags. ● If possible, use the rear vision mirror to estimate distances to vehicles behind you. Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped ● Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror and the mirror with a three-point seat belt. base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of The driver seat and the front passenger seat injury! can be adjusted in many ways to suit the physical requirements of the vehicle occu- For the sake of the environment pants. The correct seat position is very important for: The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer needed. Other- ● a fast and easy operation of all controls on wise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste. the instrument panel, ● a relaxed posture which does not cause Note drowsiness, ● If the electrical adjustment ever fails to op- ● a safe driving ››› page 5, erate, the mirrors can be adjusted by hand by ● lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass. ensuring that the seat belts and airbag system provide maximum protection ››› page 11. ● In vehicles with electric exterior mirrors, the following points should be observed: if, WARNING due to an external force (e.g. being knocked while manoeuvring), the adjustment of the ● If the driver and passengers assume im- mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have proper sitting positions, they may sustain to be fully folded electrically. Do not readjust critical injuries. 88 Seats and head restraints

● Never transport more than the permitted moving. This could increase the risk of an ac- – Then release the grip 1 and move the seat amount of people in your vehicle. cident and therefore, injury. In addition, further until the catch engages. ● Every vehicle occupant must properly fas- while adjusting your seat, you will assume an ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or incorrect sitting position. Risk of fatal acci- 2 Adjusting the seat height* dents. her seat. Children must be protected with an – Pull the lever up or push down (several appropriate child restraint system ››› page 24, ● Special guidelines apply to installing a times if necessary) from its home position. Transporting children safety. child seat on the front passenger seat. When This adjusts the seat height in stages. ● The front seats and all head restraints must installing a child seat, please observe the specifications Technical warnings described in ››› page 24, Transport- always be adjusted to body size and the seat 3 Adjusting the backrest angle belt must always be properly adjusted to pro- ing children safety. vide you and your passengers with optimum – Take your weight off the backrest and turn protection. the hand wheel. ● Always keep your feet on the footwell when Adjustment of the front seats Advice the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the 4 Adjusting the lumbar support* dash panel, out of the window or on the seat. – Take your weight off the backrest and turn This is also applied to passengers. An incor- the hand wheel to adjust the lumbar sup- rect sitting position exposes you to an in- port. creased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is trig- As you make the adjustments, the curvature gered, you could sustain severe injuries due of the cushioned area of the lumbar region to an incorrect sitting position. becomes more or less acute. In this way, it ● It is important for the driver and front pas- adapts to the natural curvature of the spine. senger to keep a distance of at least 25 cm Operation from the steering wheel and dash panel. Fail- WARNING ure to respect the minimum distance means that the airbag will not protect you. Risk of Fig. 74 Front left seat controls ● Never adjust the driver or front passenger fatal injury. The distance between the driver seat while the vehicle is in motion. While ad- and the steering wheel or between the front The control elements in ››› Fig. 74 are mir- justing your seat, you will assume an incor- passenger and the dash panel should always rored for the front right-hand seat. rect sitting position. Risk of fatal accidents. be as great as possible. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat only

when the vehicle is stationary. Safety ● Adjust the driver or front passenger seat 1 Adjusting the seat forwards and only when the vehicle is stationary. This also backwards ● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and applies to the forwards/backwards adjust- front passenger in case of a sudden braking – Pull up the grip and move the seat forwards ment of the rear seats. Otherwise, your seat or an accident, never drive with the backrest or backwards. could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is tilted towards the rear. The maximum » 89 Operation

protection of the seat belt can be achieved – Adjust the head restraint so that the top is Removing or adjusting head restraints only when the backrests are in an upright po- at the same level as the top of your head, sition and the driver and front passenger at the very least, at eye level ››› Fig. 75. have properly adjusted their seat belts. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, Adjusting the head restraints ››› page 90 the greater the risk of injury due to improper positioning of the belt web! WARNING ● Exercise caution when securing the seat ● Travelling with the head restraints removed height into forwards/backwards position. In- or improperly adjusted increases the risk of juries can be caused if the seat height is ad- severe injuries. justed without due care and attention. ● Improperly adjusted head restraints could lead to death in the event of a collision or accident. Fig. 76 Adjusting and removing the head re- Correct adjustment of head restraints ● Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also in- straints. crease the risk of injury during sudden or un- expected driving or braking manoeuvres. Adjusting height (front seats) ● The head restraints must always be adjus- – Press the button on the side and pull up- ted according to the height of the passenger. wards to the desired position. – To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head restraint downwards. – Make sure that it engages securely into one of its positions.

Adjusting height (rear seats) Fig. 75 Front and side view: head restraints – Press the button on the side and pull up- and seat belts correctly adjusted. wards to the desired position. Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- – To lower the head restraint, press the but- portant part of passenger protection and can ton and push head restraint downwards. reduce the risk of injuries in most accident – Make sure that the head restraint engages situations. securely in one of its positions. ››› page 10

90 Seats and head restraints

Angle adjustment (front seats) Seat functions Front seat heating for vehicles without – Press the head restraint forward or back to Climatronic the required position. Heated seats*  – Turn the appropriate thumb wheel ››› Fig. 77 to switch on the seat heating. The Removing the head restraint seat heating is switched off in the 0 position. – Push the head restraint up as far as it will

go. specifications Technical Front seat heating for vehicles with – Press the button ››› Fig. 76 (arrow). Climatronic – Pull head restraint out of fitting without re- – Press the button to switch on seat heating. leasing the button. – Press once to set seat heating at maximum level (level 3). Fitting the head restraint Advice – Press twice to set seat heating at medium – Insert the head restraint into the guides on level (level 2). the backrest. Fig. 77 Thumb wheel for front seat heating. – Press three times to set seat heating at – Push head restraint down. minimum level (level 1). – Adjust the head restraint to suit body size – When the button is pressed four times, the ››› page 10 and ››› page 9. heating goes off and the LED goes out (level 0). WARNING Operation ● Never drive if the head restraints have been The seat heating only works when the igni- removed. Risk of injury. tion is switched on. The left thumb wheel ● Never drive if the head restraints are in an controls the left seat and the right thumb unsuitable position, there is a risk of serious wheel the right seat. injury. Fig. 78 Front seat heating with Climatronic. ● After refitting the head restraint, you must CAUTION always adjust it properly for height to achieve To avoid damaging the heating elements, The front seat cushions and backrests can be Safety optimal protection. heated electrically. please do not kneel on the seat or apply ● Please observe the safety warnings in sharp pressure at a single point to the seat ››› page 90, Correct adjustment of head re- cushion and backrest. straints.

91 Operation

Rear seats Adjusting reach Folding and lifting the seat backrest – In the seated position, unlock the lever in Seat adjustment the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 79. – Move the seat cushion forwards or backwards to the desired position.

Adjusting the backrest angle – Hold the backrest at the top. Pull the loop on the side of the seat ››› Fig. 80 1 in the direction of the arrow and hold it in this position. Push the backrest to the required position and release the loop. Fig. 81 Folding the rear seat backrests down.

WARNING Fig. 79 Unlock bar on rear seat ● Adjust the seat only when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, your seat could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is moving. This could increase the risk of an accident and therefore, injury. ● Do not push the backrests down when the seat is moved to prevent damage to the centre console. ● Ensure that the seat, once moved, is fixed in position. Fig. 82 Lifting the rear seat backrests.

Folding the backrest forwards Fig. 80 Rear seat backrest angle adjustment. Note ● In order to maintain the maximum luggage – Pull the loop on the side of the seat The seats may be moved forwards or back- compartment space, put the backrests in po- ››› Fig. 81 1 . wards independently. This movement range sition normal, without moving. In this position the backrest is locked. can be 1/3 or 2/3 of the seat. There are vari- ● In order to maintain the maximum space ous possible positions. without putting the backrests down, move the seats forward to the desired position. 92 Transport and practical equipment Converting the table to a seat Transport and practical Front centre armrest with storage – Pull the loop on the side of the seat compartment ››› Fig. 82 2 in the direction of the arrow equipment and lift the seat backrest until it is in place. Compartments When folding and lifting the backrest, make sure to place the side seat belts in the trim

Storage compartment on the front specifications Technical clip ››› Fig. 81 to prevent them from being damaged by becoming trapped in the back- passenger side rest lock.

WARNING ● You should check that the backrest has en- Advice gaged properly in position after the loop is Fig. 84 Front armrest with storage compart- released. ment. ● For safety reasons the locking system loops on the seats may not be used to secure any There is a storage compartment in the arm- items. rest. ● After locking the seat backrest into position – To open the storage compartment, lift the ensure that the seat belts protrude from the Fig. 83 Passenger side: storage compartment armrest up in the direction of the arrow seat. ››› Fig. 84 and then lift the cover. The compartment can be opened by pulling Operation – To access the CD changer* or the lower the lever ››› Fig. 83. storage compartment, pull on the armrest cover without pressing on the button. WARNING – To close the storage compartment, push Always keep the storage compartment cover the armrest down. closed while the vehicle is in motion in order to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sud- WARNING den braking or by an accident. Safety Always keep the storage compartment closed while the vehicle is in motion to reduce the »

93 Operation

risk of injury from the armrest during a sud- cover will collapse if too much pressure is ap- WARNING den braking manoeuvre or in the event of an plied. ● The folding trays may not be folded down accident. To close the drawer, press the cover until it whilst the vehicle is in motion and anyone is locks into position. seated on the second row of seats. There is a Note risk of injury during a sudden braking ma- WARNING noeuvre! The tray must therefore be closed The CD changer is located in this compart- and properly secured whilst the vehicle is in ment. ● The drawers will hold a maximum weight of motion. 1.5 kg. ● Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders. ● Do not drive with the drawer cover open. During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, Storage compartment under the front There is an injury risk for passengers if the sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink seats* cargo is released in case of sudden braking or could be spilled. Danger of scalding. an accident.

CAUTION Folding table* When driving, do not leave open cans in the cup holders. The drink might be spilt on braking, for example, and could damage the vehicle.

Roof storage compartment*

Fig. 85 Storage compartment under the front seats.

There is a storage compartment with a cover under each front seat. Fig. 86 Folding tray on the front left seat. The drawer* ››› Fig. 85 is opened by pushing Folding trays are fitted to the rear of the front the button and moving the cover back. seat backrests. There are two open positions of 15 and 60 – To open the tray, open it up in the direction degrees depending on the pressure applied of the arrow ››› Fig. 86. to the cover. In the 60 degree position, the Fig. 87 Roof storage compartments. 94 Transport and practical equipment

There are four storage compartments in the WARNING roof. ● Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. – Press the button on the cover to open these During sudden or normal driving manoeuvres, compartments ››› Fig. 87. The cover will when braking suddenly or in case of an acci- then open. dent, the hot drink could spill. Risk of scalding. – To close the cover, press it up until it en- ● Never use rigid cup materials (for example, gages. specifications Technical glass or ceramic), since they could cause injury in the case of an accident. WARNING Always keep the storage compartment cover Fig. 90 Rear cup holder in the armrest. closed while the vehicle is in motion to re- Rear cup holder*/armrests* duce the risk of injury during a sudden brak- Opening and closing the armrest*/drink ing manoeuvre or in the event of an accident holder* Advice and to prevent any items from being thrown through the vehicle interior. – To open, pull the loop in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 89 1 . – To close, lift the cup holder*/armrest* in Front drinks holders the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 90 2 .

WARNING

Ensure that the load in the luggage compart- Operation ment is correctly secured with the net* when travelling with the armrest down Fig. 89 Opening the rear cup holder. ››› page 104.

Other storage compartments

Other storage compartments can be found: Safety Fig. 88 Front drink holders. ● in the centre console, In the centre console, in front of the gear lev- ● in the door trims (front and rear), » er, there are two drink holders ››› Fig. 88. 95 Operation

● in the side trims of the luggage compart- Multi-purpose mobile storage This storage compartment may only be ment, placed in the central area of the rear seat. compartment* ● in the spare wheel recess in the luggage compartment (only on vehicles with an op- Opening General information tional anti-puncture kit*. – Lift the cover B , in area A ››› Fig. 91. The clothes hooks are located on the rear Closing roof handles. – Push the cover down, until it clips into WARNING place. ● Do not store loose objects on the dash pan- Uses of the mobile storage compartment el. These objects could be flung through the passenger compartment when the vehicle is ● The front open glove compartment may be moving (e.g. while accelerating, braking or used to store small objects that will not dam- cornering) and distract the driver. age passengers in the event that the objects ● Ensure that no objects can fall from the are flung around the interior of the vehicle. centre console or other storage compart- Fig. 91 Mobile storage compartment. Open- ● The cup holders are used for holding drink ments into the driver footwell while the vehi- ing. cans or cups. cle is moving. In the event of a sudden brak- ● The elastic belt on the side may be used for ing manoeuvre, you will not be able to use keeping papers and magazines. the brake, clutch or accelerator. Risk of accident. ● The tables may be used as a support for ● Clothing hung on the coat hooks must not writing. restrict the driver's view. Risk of accident. To use the table C Fig. 92, it must be re- The coat hooks are intended only for use with ››› light articles of clothing. Do not leave any moved from its compartment in the side of hard, sharp or heavy objects in hanging arti- the mobile storage compartment and fitted cles of clothing. During sudden braking ma- into slot D ››› Fig. 92 on the front section of noeuvres or accidents, especially those in- the mobile storage compartment. volving airbag deployment, these objects The table in the right-hand compartment is could injure the vehicle occupants. fitted into the left-hand slot of the front of the mobile storage compartment and the table in Fig. 92 Mobile storage compartment. Func- the left-hand compartment is fitted in the tions. right-hand slot. 96 Transport and practical equipment

The tables have two positions for use and the front storage compartment and checking Mounting the mobile storage compartment cannot be interchanged. that both safety clips are securely fastened to – Fold down the small section of the rear seat both rings. backrest in order to access the back of the WARNING large backrest. ● The mobile stowage compartment supports – Fit the mobile storage compartment mount- a maximum load of 5 kg. Do not overload. Mounting and removal ing plate H ››› Fig. 94 from the inside of ● Do not drive when the cover of the mobile the vehicle, through the rear part of the specifications Technical storage compartment is open. seat. It should be fitted between the back- ● Do not drive when the tables are set up for rest and the seat, in the central seat area. use. – Push the plate until it clips the cushion ● When the vehicle is moving and when the frame. The rings of the mobile storage com- tables are not in use, keep them stored inside partment mounting plate appear at the the mobile storage compartment with the Advice cover closed. front of the seat. ● Never place hot drinks in the cup holders. – If it is difficult to make the plate clip, tilt the The drink may spill and cause burns when the rear backrest of the large section forwards vehicle is moving. slightly and then lean the backrest back- ● Do not leave cans in the cup holders when Fig. 93 Mobile storage compartment. Mount- wards to make the fitting of the mobile the vehicle is in motion, there is a danger ing. storage compartment onto the mounting that the can may be flung around the vehicle plate easier. and cause injury. – Place the mobile storage compartment on- Operation ● Make sure that the mounting plate is prop- to the foam of the central seat. erly fixed onto the cushion frame. ● When the plate is not in use, store inside – Set both mounting pieces together E the storage compartment. ››› Fig. 93, with both mounting rings G ››› Fig. 94 and press hard until both the ● When the mobile storage compartment is clips completely connect with the rings. not in use, it should always be properly fastened using the storage net in the boot. Removing the mobile storage compartment Safety

Note – Pull each of the buttons ››› Fig. 93 F on Fig. 94 Mobile storage compartment mount- the clips (red buttons) forwards, until they ● Check that the mobile storage compart- ing plate. snap out of place. » ment is fitted correctly, pulling it forward by

97 Operation

– Fold the larger seat down and remove the WARNING ● Using the lighter carefully. Carelessness or mobile storage compartment mounting negligence when using the cigarette lighter Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could plate. can cause burns and serious injuries. ignite the paper in the ashtray and cause a fire. ● The lighter only works when the ignition is turned on or the engine is running. To avoid the risk of fire, never leave children alone in- Ashtray*, cigarette lighter* and side the vehicle. power sockets Cigarette lighter*

Front ashtray*

Fig. 96 The cigarette lighter is located in the power socket of the front centre console.

Fig. 95 Ashtray located in the front cup hold- – Press on the cigarette lighter ››› Fig. 96 to er. activate it ››› . Opening and closing the ashtray – Wait for the lighter to spring out. – To open the ashtray, lift the cover ››› Fig. 95. – Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the – To close, push the cover down. cigarette on the glowing coil.

Emptying the ashtray WARNING – Extract the ashtray and empty it. ● Improper use of the cigarette lighter can lead to serious injuries or start a fire.

98 Transport and practical equipment

Power sockets WARNING – Insert the plug as far as possible (see Ra- dio manual). The power sockets and the connected accessories will only operate when the ignition is on or when the engine is running. Improper use of the sockets or electrical accessories AUX RSE connection* can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. To avoid the risk of injury, never leave children alone inside the vehicle. specifications Technical

Note ● The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause a battery dis- Fig. 97 Power socket, front centre console. charge. Advice ● Before using any electrical accessories, see the instructions in ››› page 147.

Fig. 100 AUX RSE connection.

Auxiliary audio input (AUX-IN)* This connector may be used as an audio input (red and white connectors) or audio and video connector (red, white and yellow con-

nectors). For more details about the use of Operation this audio and video source, see the RSE manual. Fig. 98 Altea XL/Freetrack model: power socket in boot.

Electrical accessories may be connected to the 12 volt power socket in the front centre console ››› Fig. 97 and in the luggage com- Safety partment*. The appliances connected to each Fig. 99 Auxiliary audio connection. power point must not exceed a power rating of 120 Watt. – Lift the AUX cover ››› Fig. 99.

99 Operation

MEDIA-IN* connector First-aid kit, warning triangle, ● The first aid kit must comply with legal re- fire extinguisher quirements. ● Observe the expiry date of the contents of the first aid kit. After it has expired you Warning triangle* and first-aid kit* should purchase a new one. ● Before purchasing accessories and spare parts, see the instructions in ››› page 147.

Fire extinguisher*

The fire extinguisher* can be attached to the Fig. 101 Connection in central armrest com- luggage compartment carpet with Velcro. partment. Note For information concerning the use of this equipment, please see the Radio handbook. Fig. 102 Altea: warning triangle storage un- ● The fire extinguisher does not belong to der the rear shelf. the standard vehicle equipment. ● The fire extinguisher must comply with le- The warning triangle* can be stowed under gal requirements. the rear shelf in a storage compartment ● Make sure the fire extinguisher works. ››› Fig. 102 or in the storage compartment lo- They should therefore be checked. The stick- cated on the boot floor, under the carpet, de- er on the fire extinguisher will inform you of pending on the version. the next date for checking. The first aid kit can be stowed in the storage ● Before purchasing accessories and spare compartment under the carpet on the boot parts, see the instructions in ››› page 147. floor, or in the storage compartment in the boot side lining, depending on the version.

Note ● The warning triangle and the first aid kit do not belong to the standard vehicle equipment.

100 Transport and practical equipment

Luggage compartment if a loose object is struck by an inflating air- through ventilation slits in the side trim of bag. If this happens, objects can be trans- the luggage compartment. Ensure that these Loading the luggage compartment formed into “missiles”. Risk of fatal injury. ventilation slits are never covered. ● Please note that the centre of gravity may ● Straps for securing the load to the fasten- All luggage and other loose objects must be shift when transporting heavy objects; this ing rings are commercially available. safely secured in the luggage compartment. may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac- Unsecured objects which shift back and forth cident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style accordingly, to specifications Technical could impair the driving safety or driving Rear shelf characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the avoid accidents. centre of gravity. ● Never exceed the allowed axle weights or 3 Applies to the model: ALTEA allowed maximum weight. If said weights are – Distribute the load evenly in the luggage exceeded, the driving characteristics of the compartment. vehicle may change, leading to accidents, in- Advice – Place heavy objects as far forward as possi- juries and damage to the vehicle. ble in the luggage compartment. ● Never leave your vehicle unattended, especially when the rear lid is open. Children – Place the heavy objects first. could climb into the luggage compartment, – Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening closing the door behind them; they will be rings ››› page 103. trapped and run the risk of death. ● Never allow children to play in or around WARNING the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors and rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before Fig. 103 Rear shelf. ● Loose luggage and other objects in the lug- you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are Operation gage compartment could cause serious inju- no adults or children in the vehicle. ries. ● Always stow objects in the luggage com- CAUTION partment and secure them on the fastening rings. Hard objects on the boot cover could chafe ● Use suitable straps to secure heavy ob- against the wires of the heating element in jects. the rear window and cause damage. Safety ● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring Note vehicle occupants or passers-by. This in- ● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce creased risk of injury will be further increased fogging of the windows. Used air escapes Fig. 104 Removing the storage compartment. » 101 Operation

Removing the shelf ● If the vehicle is fitted with a storage com- Using the rear shelf – Unhook the loops ››› Fig. 103 B from partment*, it should only be used to store the – Use the handle A to pull the shelf back housings A . emergency triangles* and light objects. until you hear a “click” ››› Fig. 105. – Extract the shelf from its slot, in its rest po- – Press the area marked “PRESS”, and the sition and pull outwards. The storage com- cover is retrieved automatically. partment should remain closed. Retractable rear shelf 3 Applies to the model: ALTEA XL/ALTEA FREETRACK To remove the rear shelf To remove the storage compartment – Press the side pin in the direction of the ar- – Pull outwards until the compartment is row, lift the cover and remove it ››› Fig. 106. freed from the pivot point ››› Fig. 104. – Installation is done in the reverse order. WARNING WARNING Do not place heavy or hard objects on the Do not place heavy or hard objects on the rear shelf, because they will endanger the ve- rear shelf, because they will endanger the vehicle occupants in case of sudden braking. hicle occupants in case of sudden braking.

CAUTION CAUTION ● Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the Fig. 105 Operating the storage compartment ● Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the rear shelf is correctly fitted. shelf. rear shelf is correctly fitted. ● An overloaded luggage compartment could ● An overloaded luggage compartment could mean that the rear shelf is not correctly seat- mean that the rear shelf is not correctly seated and it may be bent or damaged. ed and it may be bent or damaged. ● If the luggage compartment is overloaded, ● If the luggage compartment is overloaded, remove the tray. remove the tray.

Note Note ● Ensure that, when placing items of clothing ● Ensure that, when placing items of clothing on the luggage compartment cover, rear vision the luggage compartment cover, rear visibility is not reduced. bility is not reduced. Fig. 106 Removing the storage compartment shelf. 102 Transport and practical equipment

Fastening rings* WARNING

There can be four fastening rings in the lug- ● If pieces of baggage or other objects are se- gage compartment for fastening luggage and cured to the fastening rings with inappropriate or damaged retaining cords, injuries other objects. could result in the event of braking manoeu- – Always use suitable and undamaged straps vres or accidents. to secure luggage and other objects to the ● Never secure a child seat on the fastening Technical specifications Technical fastening rings ››› in Loading the lug- rings. gage compartment on page 101. – Pull up the fastening rings to attach the Fig. 108 Fastening rings for the separation straps. Cargo separation net* net. 3 Applies to the model: ALTEA XL/ALTEA FREETRACK

During a collision or an accident, even small Advice and light objects can build up so much ener- The separation net prevents loose objects in gy that they can cause very severe injuries. the boot from being thrown forward into the The amount of “energy” depends on the passenger compartment (e.g. when braking speed of the vehicle and the weight of the suddenly). object. The most significant factor, however, – Pull the net from underneath between the is the speed of the vehicle. backrest and the folding tray and fit it to Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying the slots in the roof, first the right then the unsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal col- left ››› Fig. 107. Operation lision at a speed of 50 km/h (30 mph), this – Hook the belts into the front fastening object generates a force corresponding to 20 rings to tense the net ››› Fig. 108. times its weight. This means that the effec- Fig. 107 Separation net. tive weight of the object increases to about 90 kg. Imagine the injuries that may result from said “object” if it hits any passenger when flying through the passenger compartment. This increased risk of injury will be fur- Safety ther increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag.

103 Operation

Storage in the boot floor* tool kit and the spare wheel are located un- Note derneath the luggage compartment. ● Do not exceed the maximum authorised – Secure objects in the luggage compart- weight for the vehicle ››› page 207. ment with suitable straps on the fastening rings.

Note Roof carrier/rack system* ● The maximum weight capacity of the variable boot floor is 100 kg distributed evenly Introduction over the whole floor. Please observe the following points if you intend to carry loads on the roof: Fig. 109 Variable storage in the boot floor. Luggage compartment net* ● For safety reasons, only luggage racks and accessories supplied by SEAT official services are recommended. ● It is essential that you strictly follow the assembly instructions included with the bars, being especially careful to position the boot cover bars on the special housings; you must also respect their position according to the direction of travel indicated in the assembly manual. Not following these instructions may cause marks on the bodywork and the longi- Fig. 110 Boot floor partition. tudinal bars. Fig. 111 Boot storage net. ● Pay special attention to the tightening tor- There is a variable storage compartment* in que of the attachment bolts and check them There is a storage net in the luggage com- the boot floor. following a short journey. If necessary, re- partment for securing objects. – Lift the boot floor and fold it back all the tighten the bolts and check them at regular way ››› Fig. 109. – Use the fastening rings located on the side intervals. of the boot to attach the retaining net ● Distribute the load evenly. A maximum load – Fit the separator A ››› Fig. 110, into the ››› Fig. 111. of 40 kg is permitted for each roof rack sys- side grooves depending on the size of the tem support bar, the load must be objects to be transported. The on-board 104 Transport and practical equipment distributed evenly along the entire length. Attachment points However, the maximum load permitted for the entire roof (including the support system) of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor the total weight recommended for the entire vehicle. See the “Technical Data” ››› page 207 section. ● When transporting heavy or large objects specifications Technical on the roof, any change in the normal vehicle behaviour due to a change in the centre of gravity or an increased wind resistance must Fig. 113 Altea XL/Altea Freetrack model: se- be taken into account. For this reason, a suit- curing points for the roof carrier. able speed and driving style must be used. Advice ● On vehicles fitted with a sliding/tilting sun- Install and remove following the instructions roof*, make sure it does not hit the load on given. the roof upon opening. Securing the base supports and roof carrier system (Altea) Location of the basic roof carrier attachment points ››› Fig. 112.

● A: marks for securing on the rear section. Operation Fig. 112 Altea model: securing points for the ● B: hole for securing on the front section. roof carrier. Securing the base supports and roof carrier system (Altea XL/Altea Freetrack) Always secure the base supports and roof carrier system correctly. The roof carrier system must always be instal- Safety led exactly according to the instructions provided. »

105 Operation

The position holes are located on the inner CAUTION side of the rail ››› Fig. 113. Follow the instructions given in the manual.

106 Air conditioning Air conditioning

Heating

Operating instructions Technical specifications Technical Advice

Fig. 114 Heating controls on the dash panel.

– Use the knobs ››› Fig. 114 1 and 4 and needed to defrost the windows quickly, is on- Air recirculation mode  Operation 5 control to set the temperature, air distri- ly available when the engine has reached its Air recirculation mode 3 prevents strong bution and blower speed. operating temperature. odours in the outside air from entering the – To switch a function on or off, press the ap- vehicle interior, for example when passing Heated rear window  propriate button 2 or 3 . When the func- through a tunnel or in queuing traffic ››› . tion is activated, the display window in the This function 2 will be switched off automat- With low outside temperatures, the air recir- lower left of the button is lit. ically approximately 20 minutes after being culation increases the effectiveness of the switched on. It can also be switched off soon- Temperature heating system by heating the air inside the Safety er by pushing the button. vehicle rather than the air from outside. » With the regulator 1 the heating level is determined. The desired temperature inside the vehicle cannot be lower than the ambient temperature. Maximum heat output, which is 107 Operation

Air distribution  Air distribution towards the footwell ● In air recirculation mode, no cold air from Control 4 for setting the flow of air in the re-  Air distribution towards the windscreen the outside enters the vehicle interior. The quired direction. and the footwell windows can quickly fog over if the heating is switched off. Therefore, never leave the air re-  Air distribution towards the windscreen. Blower circulation mode switched on for a long time If the windscreen air output is on and air (risk of accident). recirculation mode is pressed, it is acti- The air flow can be set at four speeds with the control 5 . The air flow should always be vated. When the recirculation mode is Note on, if the air distribution towards the set at the lowest speed when driving slowly. windscreen mode is selected, the recir- Please observe the general notes ››› page 116. culation mode is deactivated. For safety WARNING reasons, the air recirculation mode ● For road safety all windows must be clear of should not be connected. ice, snow, and condensation. This is essential  Air distribution to the upper body to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the wind- screens.

108 Air conditioning

Climatic*

Controls Technical specifications Technical Advice

Fig. 115 On the dash panel: Climate controls.

The Climatic or semi-automatic air condition- 3  button – Heated rear window The WARNING ing system only works when the engine is heating will be switched off automatically running and the blower is switched on. approximately 20 minutes after switching For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. This is essential on. It can also be switched off before- Operation – Use the knobs ››› Fig. 115 1 and 5 and to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise hand by pushing the button. control 6 to set the temperature, air distri- yourself with the correct operation of the bution and blower speed. 4 Button  – Air recirculation mode heating and ventilation system, including the ››› page 111 anti-fog/defrost functions for the wind- – To switch a function on or off, press the ap- 5 screens. propriate button 2 , 3 or 4 . When the Air distribution control ››› page 110 function is activated, the display window in 6 Blower switch. There are four speed set- the lower corner of the button is lit. tings for the air flow. The air flow should Note always be set at the lowest speed when Please observe the general notes Safety 1 Temperature selector ››› page 110 driving slowly. ››› page 116. 2 A/C button – Cooling system on/off ››› page 110

109 Operation

Heating and cooling the interior

Fig. 116 On the dash panel: Climate controls.

Interior heating – Turn the temperature selector anticlockwise Air conditioner – Turn the temperature selector ››› Fig. 116 until the desired cooling output is reached. When the air conditioning system is switched 1 clockwise to select the desired tempera- – Turn the blower switch to one of the set- on, not only the temperature, but also the air ture. tings 1-4. humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves comfort for the vehicle occu- – Turn the blower switch to one of the set- – Use the air distribution regulator to guide pants and prevents misting of the windows tings 1-4.  the airflow in the required direction (to when the ambient air humidity is high.  – Set the air distribution control to the air the windscreen), (to the upper body),   If the air conditioning system cannot be flow configuration desired:  (towards the (to the footwell) and (to the wind- switched on this may be caused by the fol- windscreen),  (towards the chest),  screen and to the footwell).  lowing reasons: (towards the footwell) and (towards the Heating windscreen and footwell areas). ● The engine is not running. Maximum heat output, which is needed to ● The blower is switched off. Interior cooling defrost the windows quickly, is only available when the engine has reached its operating ● The outside temperature is lower than ap- – Switch on the air conditioner using the but- temperature. proximately +3 °C (+37 °F). ton ››› Fig. 115 A/C .

110 Air conditioning

● The air conditioning system compressor the outside from entering the vehicle, for ex- When the recirculation mode is on, if the air has been temporarily switched off because ample when passing through a tunnel or in a distribution towards the windscreen mode is the engine coolant temperature is too high. traffic jam. selected, the recirculation mode is deactivated. For safety reasons, the air recirculation ● The air conditioner fuse is faulty. With low temperatures outside, the air recir- mode should not be connected. ● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air culation increases the effectiveness of the heating system by warming the air inside the conditioner checked by a specialised work- WARNING vehicle rather than the cold air from outside.

shop. specifications Technical In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the With high outside temperatures, the air recir- outside enters the vehicle interior. If the air culation increases the effectiveness of the air conditioning system is switched off, the win-  Air recirculation mode conditioning system by cooling the air inside dows can quickly mist over. Therefore, never the vehicle rather than the ambient air. leave the air recirculation mode switched on Air recirculation mode ››› Fig. 116 4  pre- If the windscreen air output is on and air re- for a long time (risk of accident). vents strong odours or contaminated air from Advice circulation mode is pressed, it is activated. Operation Safety

111 Operation

2C-Climatronic*

Controls

Fig. 117 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls.

The air conditioner controls the temperature The temperature can be adjusted separately yellow and the symbol appears on the ra- when the engine is running and the blower is for the left and right sides of the vehicle inte- dio or navigator display. switched on. rior. 2  button – Upward air distribution – Turn the temperature control knobs 1 Button  – defrost function for the wind- 3  button – Central air distribution Fig. 117 to adjust the temperature on the ››› screen. The air drawn in from outside the 4  button – Downward air distribution left-hand or right-hand side respectively. vehicle is directed at the windscreen. The 5  button – Manual air recirculation air recirculation mode, if switched on, will – The functions will be switched on when its mode buttons are pressed. When these functions be switched off as soon as the defrost 6  button – Heated rear window The are activated, they are indicated on the ra- function is switched on. At temperatures heating will be switched off automatically dio display. In addition, all these functions over +3 °C (+37 °F), the cooling system approximately 20 minutes after switching are lit with LEDs. Press the button again to will be switched on automatically in order on. However, it may be turned off by switch off the function. to dehumidify the air. The button is lit in pushing the button. The button lights up

112 Air conditioning

yellow and the symbol appears in the dis- Viewing Climatronic information The LEDs on the Climatronic controls indicate play. that the selected function has been activa- 7 AUTO button – Automatic temperature, ted. ventilation and air distribution control In addition, the radio or radio and navigation ››› page 113 displays mounted at factory briefly display 8 SYNC button – Dual zone synchroniser the current Climatronic settings if any of them have been modified. 9 OFF button – Switches the 2C-Climatronic specifications Technical on and off ››› page 114 The symbols used on the radio or radio and 10 Blower control ››› page 114 navigation displays are the same as the symbols used for the Climatronic controls. 11 A/C button – To switch on the cooling system Fig. 118 Navigation display with information Advice WARNING about Climatronic. Automatic mode For road safety all windows must be clear of In automatic mode air temperature, air flow ice, snow, and condensation. This is essential and distribution are automatically regulated to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise so that a specified temperature is attained as yourself with the correct operation of the quickly as possible and then maintained. heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the wind- The temperature can be adjusted separately screens. for the left and right sides of the vehicle inte-

rior. Operation

Switching on automatic mode – Press the AUTO ››› Fig. 117 button. “AUTO Fig. 119 Radio display with information about High” is shown on the radio display (high Climatronic. fan speed). Information about the Climatronic system can – Press the AUTO button again ››› Fig. 117. be displayed on the radio or radio and navi- “AUTO Low” is shown on the radio display Safety gation screen mounted at factory. (low fan speed).

Depending upon the version and finish, the vehicle may include: » 113 Operation

A pleasant temperature is quickly reached in the interior, the blower speed and the air dis- Note automatic mode at a temperature of +22 °C tribution are regulated automatically. The (+72 °F). Therefore, we recommend you not system also considers the sunlight radiation, There are two automatic modes: to change this adjustment, except as neces- so there is no need for manual readjustment. ● Automatic mode LO: this calculates the air sary to suit individual preferences or particu- Therefore, automatic mode almost always flow for two people. lar circumstances. It is possible to select inte- provides the best comfort for the vehicle oc- ● Automatic mode HI: this calculates the air rior temperatures from +18 °C (+64 °F) to cupants throughout the year. flow for more than two people. +26 °C (+80 °F). These are approximate tem- Automatic mode is switched off whenever an peratures and the actual temperature may be adjustment is made using the buttons for the slightly higher or lower depending on out- air distribution, fan or  or the air recircula- side ambient conditions. tion button  . The temperature will continue Climatronic maintains a constant tempera- to be regulated within the parameters man- ture. The temperature of the air supplied to ually selected by the user.

Manual mode

Fig. 120 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls.

114 Air conditioning

In manual mode you can adjust the air tem- Blower (+72 °F) and passenger side temperature +24 perature, air flow and distribution as re- The fan may be adjusted freely using the con- ℃ (+23.89 ℃). quired. trols 10 . Always have the blower running at a When the SYNC button is on (LED lit), the Cli- low setting to ensure a constant flow of fresh matronic climate zone is synchronised. For Switching on manual mode air into the vehicle. Pushing the button  to example: driver side temperature +22 °C – To enter manual mode, press one of the the minimum -1, turns the Climatronic off. (+72 °F) and passenger side temperature +22 buttons ››› Fig. 120 1 to 5 or press the (+22.22 ).

℃ ℃ specifications Technical air flow control 10 . The selected function is Air distribution If the SYNC button is on and the passenger shown on the radio or navigator display. The air distribution is adjusted using the but- side temperature is changed, the function is    Temperature tons , and . It is also possible to automatically deactivated. open and close some of the air vents sepa- There are separate temperature selectors for rately.

the left and right sides of the vehicle interior. Advice Air recirculation mode The selected temperature is displayed above Switching the air conditioning on and off the selector. It is possible to select interior – Press the button  5 to temperatures from +18 °C (+64 °F) to +26 °C When the A/C button is on (LED lit), the air ››› Fig. 120 switch air recirculation mode on or off. It is (+80 °F). These are approximate tempera- conditioning system is on. switched on if the following symbol ap- tures and the actual temperature may be When the A/C button is off (LED off), the air pears in the display . slightly higher or lower depending on the conditioning system is off. outside ambient conditions. When the A/C button is off, the air condition- Air recirculation mode prevents strong If you select temperatures below +18 °C ing system is switched off to save fuel. The odours or contaminated air from the outside Operation (+64 °F), the indication: LO will appear on the temperature continues to self-regulate. The from entering in the vehicle, for example screen. In this setting the system runs at set temperature can only be reached if it is when passing through a tunnel or in a traffic maximum cooling output and the tempera- higher than the outside temperature. jam. ture is not regulated. With low outside temperatures, the air recir- If a temperature above +26 °C (+80 °F) is se- Driver and passenger temperature control culation increases the effectiveness of the lected, the screen will show HI. In this setting The SYNC button controls the synchronisa- heating system by heating the air inside the the system runs at maximum heating output tion of the 2 Climatronic climate zones. vehicle rather than the air from outside. and the temperature is not regulated. Safety When the SYNC button is off (LED off), the Cli- With high outside temperatures, the air recir- matronic climate zone is personalised. For culation increases the effectiveness of the air example: driver side temperature +22 °C conditioning system by cooling the air inside the vehicle rather than the ambient air. »

115 Operation

If the windscreen air output is on and air re- Air conditioner Note circulation mode is pressed, this remains ac- When the air conditioning system is switched ● If the humidity and temperature outside the tive. When the recirculation mode is on, if the on, not only the temperature, but also the air air distribution towards the windscreen mode vehicle are high, condensation can drip off humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. the evaporator in the cooling system and is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti- This improves comfort for the vehicle occu- form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is vated. For safety reasons, the air recirculation pants and prevents misting of the windows normal and does not indicate a leak. mode should not be connected. when the ambient air humidity is high. ● Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to en- WARNING If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on this may be caused by the fol- sure heating and cooling are not impaired, In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the and to prevent the windows from misting lowing reasons: outside enters the vehicle interior. If the air over. conditioning system is switched off, the win- ● The engine is not running. ● The air from the vents flows through the ve- dows can quickly mist over. Therefore, never hicle interior and is extracted by slots de- ● The A/C button is switched off. leave the air recirculation mode switched on signed for this purpose. Therefore, do not for a long time (risk of accident). ● The outside temperature is lower than ap- cover these slots with items of clothing or proximately +3 °C (+37 °F). other objects. ● The air conditioning system compressor ● The air conditioner operates most effective- General notes has been temporarily switched off because ly with the windows and the sliding/tilting the engine coolant temperature is too high. sunroof* closed. However, if the temperature Pollution filter inside the vehicle is excessive because of the ● The air conditioner fuse is faulty. sun, the air inside can be cooled faster by The pollution filter (a combined particulate ● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air opening the windows for a short time. filter and active carbon filter) serves as a bar- conditioner checked by a specialised work- rier against impurities in the outside air, in- ● Do not smoke while air recirculation mode shop. cluding dust and pollen. is on, as smoke drawn into the air conditioning system leaves residue on the evaporator, For the climate control system to work with CAUTION producing a permanent unpleasant odour. maximum efficiency, the pollution filter must ● If you suspect that the air conditioner is ● It is advisable to turn on the air condition- be replaced at the specified intervals in the damaged, switch it off with the A/C button to ing at least once a month, to lubricate the Maintenance Programme. prevent further damage and have it checked system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling capacity is detected, a If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due by a specialised workshop. Technical Service should be consulted to to use in areas reaching very high pollution ● Repairs to the air conditioner require spe- check the system. levels, the pollen filter must be changed cialist knowledge and special tools. There- more frequently than stated in the Service fore, we recommend you to take the vehicle Schedule. to a specialised workshop. 116 Driving

Driving CAUTION ted to the driving style and the road conditions. When the engine is running, do not turn the Power steering (servotronic*) steering wheel to its limit for more than 15 The all-wheel drive is specially designed to seconds. Otherwise, there is a risk of damag- complement the superior engine power. This Power steering assists the driver by reducing ing the power steering. combination gives the vehicle exceptional the force needed to turn the steering wheel. handling and performance capabilities, both In cars equipped with servotronic* power on normal roads and in more difficult condi- Note specifications Technical steering the degree of power assistance is tions, such as snow and ice. regulated electronically according to road ● If the power steering should fail at any time or the engine is switched off (for instance speed. Winter tyres when being towed), the vehicle can still be The power steering will keep on working even steered. However, more effort will be required Thanks to its all-wheel drive, your vehicle will if the servotronic* device fails. The degree of to turn the steering wheel. have plenty of traction in winter conditions, power assistance will, however, no longer ● If the system is leaking or malfunctioning, even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, Advice adapt to different speeds. If the electronic please take the car to a specialised workshop we still recommend that winter tyres or all- regulating system is not working properly, immediately. season tyres should be fitted on all four this is most noticeable when turning the ● The power steering system requires a spe- wheels when winter road conditions are ex- steering wheel at low speeds (for instance cial hydraulic fluid. The container is located pected, mainly because this will give a better when parking), as more effort will be required in the engine compartment (front left). The braking response. than usual. The fault should be corrected by correct fluid level in the reservoir is impor- a specialised workshop as soon as possible. tant for the power steering to function prop- Snow chains erly. The hydraulic fluid level is checked at

On roads where snow chains are mandatory, Operation Power steering does not work if the engine is the Inspection Service. off. In this case the steering wheel requires this also applies to cars with all-wheel drive. much more force to turn. Changing tyres Turning the steering to its limit when the ve- All-wheel drive* hicle is stationary will place an excessive On vehicles with all-wheel drive, all four tyres load on the power steering system. Turning On all-wheel drive models, the engine power must have the same rolling circumference the steering wheel to its limit places a load is distributed to all four wheels ››› page 179.

on the system, which causes noise. It will al- Safety so reduce the idling speed of the engine. General notes WARNING The all-wheel drive system operates com- ● Even with all-wheel drive, you should al- pletely automatically. The propulsion force is ways adjust your speed to suit the conditions. Do not let the extra safety features distributed among the four wheels and adap- » 117 Operation

tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Driving with LPG* ● The engine speed is always above 1,200 rpm. Failure to follow this instruction could result 3 Applies to the model: ALTEA / ALTEA XL in an accident. ● The LPG system check has been completed ● The braking capability of your vehicle is and the established waiting time has elapsed limited by the tyres' grip. Vehicle behaviour (this operation may take several minutes). is no different from a vehicle without four- ● No fault was detected during the system wheel drive. So do not be tempted to drive check. too fast on icy or slippery roads just because the vehicle still has good acceleration in The  green LPG gauge control lamp will these conditions. Failure to do so could result light up. in an accident. ● On wet roads bear in mind that the front Connecting petrol operating mode wheels may lose contact with the road and start to float (aquaplaning) if the vehicle is ● Press the GAS button. Fig. 121 Centre console: gas system control driven too fast. If this should happen, there switch.  will be no sudden increase in engine speed The green control lamp will go out on the when aquaplaning begins to warn the driver, LPG level indicator. Your SEAT vehicle has a bivalent engine able as with a front-wheel drive vehicle. For this Petrol operating mode connects automatical- reason and for that mentioned above, always to run on either LPG or petrol. The LPG tank ››› page 160, Refuelling with LPG is in the ly when the engine is started or when any of choose a driving speed suitable for the road the LPG operating mode conditions are not conditions. Failure to follow this instruction spare wheel well ››› . met. As soon as the necessary conditions are could result in an accident. met again, the LPG operating mode recon- Connecting LPG operating mode nects. ● Press the GAS button. LPG system fault After checking the system, the engine automatically switches from petrol to LPG provi- Message in the instru- How to proceed ded the following conditions are met: ment panel display

● There is enough LPG in the tank. Have the system checked Error: LPG Visit the work- immediately by a special- ● The engine coolant has reached the neces- shop! ised workshop. sary temperature for LPG operation. ● The outside temperature is suitable for LPG to work.

118 Driving

Message in the instru- How to proceed LPG and safety WARNING ment panel display If you smell gas or suspect that there is a Failure to act when you can smell gas in the leak in the LPG system. ››› Check that all conditions vehicle or when refuelling can cause serious injuries. for LPG operating mode ● Stop the vehicle immediately. Gas operating mode cur- have been met ● Carry out the necessary operations. rently impossible See the ››› page 118. If so, have ● Switch the ignition off. ● Leave the danger zone. manual! the system checked imme- ● Open all the doors to properly ventilate the specifications Technical diately by a specialised ● If necessary, warn the emergency services. vehicle. workshop. ● Extinguish cigarettes immediately. Petrol operating mode cur- Have the system checked Note rently impossible. See the immediately by a special- ● Move away from the vehicle or switch off ● The LPG system must be subject to regular manual! ised workshop. objects that may cause sparks or a fire. inspections at a specialised workshop in ac-

● If you continue to smell gas, do not contin- cordance with the Maintenance Plan. Advice ue driving! LPG quality and consumption ● The engine is always started with petrol, Quality requirements for LPG are regulated ● Seek specialist assistance. Have the fault even when LPG was being used when it was for all Europe in DIN EN 589 and permit the repaired. switched off. For this reason the tank should use of LPG throughout Europe without any never be drained of petrol completely. problems. WARNING ● If frequent short journeys are made, especially when the outside temperature is low, LPG is a mixture of propane and butane. LPG is a highly explosive and inflammable substance. It may cause severe burns and the vehicle will tend to run on petrol more of- A difference is drawn between winter gas and other injury. ten than on LPG. Therefore, the petrol tank may empty before the LPG tank. Operation summer gas. Winter gas has a higher propor- ● Due care must be taken to avoid any risk of tion of propane gas. As a result, the driving fire or explosion. ● If while driving the system switches auto- range of winter gas may be lower (due to in- matically to petrol operating mode because ● When parking the vehicle in a closed area creased consumption) than that of summer the LPG tank is almost empty, the next few (for example in a garage), make sure that gas. times the engine starts up, and depending on there is adequate ventilation, either natural the outside temperature and driving style, it The vehicle's engine management adapts au- or mechanical, to neutralise the LPG in the may automatically switch briefly to LPG oper- tomatically to the LPG used. Therefore, both event of a leak. ating mode to use up what is left in the tank. Safety types of LPG can be mixed in the tank, with- ● When the system automatically switches to out the need for comprehensive draining be- petrol operating mode because the LPG tank fore applying a different quality LPG. is almost empty, you can revert to gas operating mode by pressing the ››› Fig. 121 GAS »

119 Operation

button while driving slowly and with low ac- Adhesive strips for headlights Ignition switched off, steering lock 0 celeration. This procedure can be repeated If you have to drive a right-hand drive vehicle In this position ››› Fig. 122, the ignition and several times while driving carefully until all in a left-hand drive country, or vice versa, the the engine are OFF and the steering may be the LPG left in the tank has been used up. asymmetric dipped beam headlights will daz- locked. ● Vehicles that display information or warn- zle oncoming traffic. ing messages on the dash panel may show For the Steering lock to operate without the information related to LPG operation. To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers ignition key, turn the steering wheel until it to certain parts of the headlight lenses. Fur- locks with an audible sound. You should al- ● The notification LPG mode not possible may ther information is available at any Technical ways lock the steering wheel when you leave be displayed. Service. your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle theft ››› . In vehicles with adaptive headlights, the ro- Journeys abroad tation system must previously be disconnected. To do this, please go to a specialised Switching the ignition or the glow plug system on 1 To drive abroad, the following must be taken workshop. into consideration: Turn the ignition key to this position and release it. If the key cannot be turned or it is ● For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter difficult to turn from position 0 to position ensure that unleaded petrol is available for Ignition lock 1 , move the steering wheel from one side to the journey. See the chapter “Refuelling”. Au- the other to release it. tomobile organisations will have information Ignition key positions about service station networks selling unlea- Starting 2 ded fuel. The engine is started when the key is in this ● In some countries, your vehicle model may position. Electrical devices with high power not be available, and therefore some spare consumption are switched off temporarily at parts may not available or technical services the same time. can only carry out limited repairs. Each time that the vehicle is restarted, the ig- SEAT importers and distributors will gladly nition key must be turned to position 0 . The provide information about the technical prep- repetitive start prevention lock of the igni- aration that your vehicle requires and also tion prevents possible damage to the starter about necessary maintenance and repair motor if the engine is already running. possibilities. Fig. 122 Ignition key positions.

120 Driving

WARNING The electronic immobiliser will be activated If the engine does not start immediately, again automatically as soon as you pull the switch the starter off after 10 seconds and try ● The ignition key must NOT be removed from key out of the ignition lock. again after half a minute. If the engine still the lock until the vehicle comes to a stand- does not start, the fuel pump fuse should be still. Otherwise, the steering could be imme- The engine can only be started using a genu- checked ››› page 196, Fuses. diately blocked- Risk of accident! ine SEAT key with its correct code. ● Always remove the key from the ignition WARNING when leaving the vehicle, even if only for a Note ● Never start or run the engine in unventila- specifications Technical short period. This is especially important if A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensured ted or closed rooms. The exhaust gases con- children or disabled people are left alone in if genuine SEAT keys are used. the vehicle. They could accidentally start the tain carbon monoxide, an odourless and col- engine or work electrical equipment such as ourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal acci- the electric windows, resulting in an accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of dent. Starting petrol engines consciousness and result in death. Advice ● Unsupervised use of the key could start the ● Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine or any electrical system, such as the The engine can only be started using a genu- engine is running. electric windows. This could result in serious ine SEAT key with its correct code. ● Never use “cold start sprays”, they could injury. – Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi- explode or cause the engine to run at high tion and depress the clutch pedal thor- revs. Risk of injury. CAUTION oughly and hold it in this position for the starter to turn the engine on. The starter motor will only work when the en- CAUTION gine is stopped (ignition key position 2 ). – Turn the ignition key to the starting posi- ● When the engine is cold, you should avoid tion ››› page 120. high engine speeds, driving at full throttle Operation and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine – Let go of the ignition key as soon as the en- damage. Electronic immobiliser gine starts; the starter motor must not run ● The vehicle should not be pushed or towed on with the engine. The electronic immobiliser prevents unau- more than 50 metres to start the engine. Un- thorised persons from driving the vehicle. After starting a very hot engine, you may burnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it. Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates need to slightly press down the accelerator.

● Before attempting to push-start or tow a ve- Safety the electronic immobiliser automatically When starting a cold engine, it may be a little hicle in order to start it, you should first try to when the key is inserted into the ignition. noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres- start it using the battery of another vehicle. sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com- Note and follow the instructions in pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause ››› page 189, Jump-starting. » for concern. 121 Operation

For the sake of the environment If there are problems starting the engine, see CAUTION the ››› page 189. Do not warm-up the engine by running the ● When the engine is cold, you should avoid engine with the vehicle stationary. Start off high engine speeds, driving at full throttle Glow plug system for the diesel engine immediately, driving gently. This helps the and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine engine reach operating temperature faster To avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat- damage. and reduces emissions. tery, do not use any other major electrical ● The vehicle should not be pushed or towed equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heat- more than 50 metres to start the engine. Un- ing. burnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it. Starting diesel engines Start the engine as soon as the glow plug warning lamp ››› page 41 goes out. ● Before attempting to push-start or tow a ve- The engine can only be started using a genu- hicle in order to start it, you should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. ine SEAT key with its correct code. Starting a diesel engine after the fuel tank Note and follow the instructions in has been completely run dry – Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi- ››› page 189, Jump-starting. tion and depress the clutch pedal thor- If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, oughly and hold it in this position for the it may take longer than normal (up to one mi- For the sake of the environment starter to turn the engine on. nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling. Do not warm-up the engine by running the – Turn the ignition key to position ››› Fig. 122 This is because the fuel system must elimi- engine with the vehicle stationary. You 1 . The warning lamp  will light for en- nate air first. should drive off as soon as you start the engine pre-heating. gine. This helps the engine reach operating WARNING – When the lamp turns off, turn the ignition temperature faster and reduces emissions. ● key to position 2 to start the engine. Do Never start or run the engine in unventila- not press the accelerator. ted or closed rooms. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and col- – Release the ignition key as soon as the en- ourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal acci- Switching off the engine gine starts. The starter motor should not dents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of – Stop the vehicle. turn at the same time. consciousness and result in death. ● Never leave the vehicle unattended if the – Turn the ignition key to position ››› Fig. 122 When starting a cold engine, it may be a little engine is running. 0 . noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres- ● Never use “cold start sprays”, they could sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com- explode or cause the engine to run at high After switching the engine off, the radiator pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause revs. Risk of injury. fan may run on for up to 10 minutes. The fan for concern. may also turn on again if coolant temperature increases from accumulated heat in the 122 Driving engine compartment or due to its prolonged New brake pads Corrosion exposure to solar radiation. New brake pads do not provide optimal per- There may be a tendency for corrosion to formance during the first 400 km; first they form on the discs and dirt to build up on the WARNING must be “run in”. However, the reduced brak- brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently ● Never switch the engine off until the vehi- ing capacity may be compensated by press- or the brakes are not used very often. cle is completely stationary. ing on the brake pedal a little harder. Avoid If the brakes are not used frequently, or if ● The brake servo works only when the en- overloading the brakes during run-in. rust has formed on the disks, it is advisable specifications Technical gine is running. With the engine switched off, to clean off the pads and disks by braking more strength is needed to brake. As normal Wear firmly a few times at a moderately high speed brake operation cannot be performed, risk of The rate of wear on the brake pads depends accidents and serious injury may exist. ››› . a great deal on how you drive and the condi- ● The steering lock can be immediately tions in which the vehicle is operated. Nega- Faults in the brake system blocked once the key is removed from the ig- tive factors are, for instance, city traffic, fre- Advice nition. The vehicle cannot be steered. Risk of If the brake pedal travel should ever increase quent short trips or hard driving with abrupt accident. suddenly, this may mean that one of the two starts and stops. brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately CAUTION to the nearest specialised workshop and Wet roads or road salt have the fault repaired. Drive there slowly When the engine has been running under a In certain conditions, such as in heavy rain, and remember that you will have to apply heavy load for a long period, heat can accu- or after washing the vehicle or driving more pressure on the brake pedal and allow mulate in the engine compartment and cause through water, the full braking effect can be for longer stopping distances. engine damage. For this reason, idle the en- delayed by moisture (or in winter by ice) on gine for approximately 2 minutes before Operation the discs and brake pads. In this case the switching it off. Low brake fluid level brakes should be “dried” by pressing the Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if brake pedal several times. the brake fluid level is too low. The brake flu- The effectiveness of the brakes can also be id level is monitored electronically. Braking and parking temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven for some distance without using the brakes Brake servo Braking capacity and distance when there is a lot of salt on the road in win- The brake servo increases the pressure you Safety ter. In this case, the layer of salt on the brake apply to the brake pedal. It works only when The following factors impair braking capacity: discs and pads has to wear off before brak- the engine is running. » ing.

123 Operation

WARNING Note Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when you park. ● Apply the brakes heavily to clean the brake ● If the brake servo is out of action, for exam- system only in a suitable traffic situation. Do ple when the car is being towed, you will Applying the handbrake not put other road users in danger: there is have to press the brake pedal considerably risk of causing an accident. harder than normal to make up for the lack of – Pull the handbrake lever up firmly ● Ensure the vehicle does not move while in servo assistance. ››› Fig. 123. neutral, when the engine is stopped. Failure ● If you wish to equip the vehicle with acces- to follow this instruction could result in an sories such as a front spoiler or wheel covers, Releasing the handbrake accident. it is important that the flow of air to the front – Pull the lever up slightly and press the re- wheels is not obstructed, otherwise the ● If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is lease knob in the direction of the arrow subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles can brakes can overheat. Before purchasing accessories please observe the relevant instruc- ››› Fig. 123 and guide the handbrake lever form in the brake system. This reduces the ef- down fully ››› . ficiency of the brakes. tions ››› page 147, Technical modifications. ● If a brake system circuit fails, the braking Always pull the handbrake all the way up, so distance will be increased considerably. Con- there is less risk of driving off with it still en- tact a specialised workshop immediately and Operating the handbrake gaged ››› . avoid unnecessary journeys. The handbrake warning lamp  lights up when the handbrake is applied and the igni- CAUTION tion switched on. The warning lamp turns off ● Never let the brakes “drag” by leaving your when the handbrake is released. foot on the pedal when it is not necessary to If you drive faster than 6 km/h (4 mph) with brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in the handbrake on, the following message* longer stopping distances and greater wear. will appear on the instrument panel: HAND- ● Before driving down a long, steep gradient, BRAKE ON. You will also hear an audible it is advisable to reduce speed and select a warning. lower gear. This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes. If you still have to WARNING use the brakes, it is better to brake firmly at Fig. 123 Handbrake between the front seats. intervals than to apply the brakes continu- ● Never use the handbrake to stop the vehi- ously. The handbrake should be applied firmly to cle when it is in motion. The braking distance prevent the vehicle from accidentally rolling is considerably longer, because braking is away. only applied to the rear wheels. Risk of accident!

124 Driving

● If the handbrake is only partially released, Additional notes on parking the vehicle on ● Depending on weather conditions, it may this will cause the rear brakes to overheat, gradients: become extremely hot or cold inside the vehi- which can impair the function of the brake Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle cle. This can be fatal. system and could lead to an accident. This al- rolls against the kerb if it started to roll. so causes premature wear on the rear brake pads. ● If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, Hill driving assistant* turn the front wheels so that they point to- CAUTION wards the kerb. This function is only included in vehicles with specifications Technical Always apply the handbrake before you leave ● If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn ESC. the front wheels so that they point away from the vehicle. Put it in 1st gear as well. The hill driving assistant helps the driver to the kerb. move off and upward on a hill without rolling ● Secure the vehicle as usual by applying the backward.

handbrake firmly and putting it in 1st gear. Advice Parking The system maintains brake pressure for approximately 2 seconds after the driver takes The handbrake should always be firmly ap- WARNING his foot off the brake pedal to prevent the ve- plied when the vehicle is parked. ● Take measures to reduce the risk of injury hicle from rolling backward when starting off. Always note the following points when park- when you leave your vehicle unattended. During these 2 seconds, the driver has ing the vehicle: ● Never park where the hot exhaust system enough time to release the clutch pedal and could ignite inflammable materials, such as accelerate without the vehicle moving and – Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc. without having to use the handbrake, making – ● Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in Apply the handbrake. starting off easier, more comfortable and saf- Operation the vehicle when it is locked. They would be – er. Put it in 1st gear. unable to open the vehicle from the inside, – Switch the engine off and remove the key and could become trapped in the vehicle in These are the basic operation conditions: an emergency. In the event of an emergency, from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel ● being on a ramp or hill/slope, slightly to engage the steering lock. locked doors will delay assistance to vehicle occupants. ● closed doors, – Always take you keys with you when you ● Never leave children alone in the vehicle. ● vehicle completely stationary, leave the vehicle ››› . They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex- Safety ● engine running and foot on the brake, ample, by releasing the handbrake or the gearbox lever. ● besides having a gear engaged or being in neutral for manual gear change and with the selector lever at position S, D or R for an automatic gearbox. » 125 Operation

This system is also active when reversing up- Manual gearbox down thoroughly in order to protect the gear- hill. box. Driving with a manual gearbox The reverse lights switch on when the reverse WARNING gear is selected and the ignition is on. ● If you do not start the vehicle immediately after taking your foot off the brake pedal, the WARNING vehicle may start to roll back under certain conditions. Depress the brake pedal or use ● When the engine is running, the vehicle the hand brake immediately. will start to move as soon as a gear is engaged and the clutch released. ● If the engine stalls, depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake immediately. ● Never select the reverse gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident. ● When following a line of traffic uphill, if you want to prevent the vehicle from rolling back accidentally when starting off, hold the brake Note pedal down for a few seconds before starting Fig. 124 Detailed view of the centre console: ● Do not rest your hand on the gear lever to move. gear shift pattern of a 5- or 6-speed manual while driving. The pressure of your hand gearbox. could cause premature wear on the selector Note forks in the gearbox. The official service or a specialist workshop Engaging the reverse gear ● When changing gear, you should always can tell you if your vehicle is equipped with – The vehicle should be stationary with the depress the clutch fully to avoid unnecessary wear and damage. this system. engine idling. Press the clutch down thoroughly. ● Do not “slip” the clutch to hold the vehicle on a hill. This causes premature wear and – Place the gearbox lever into neutral and damage to the clutch. push the lever downwards. ● Do not leave your foot on the clutch pedal; – Slide the gearbox lever to the left, and then although the pressure may seem insignifi- into the reverse position shown on the lev- cant, it can cause the premature wear of the er. clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you do not need to change gear. The reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When the engine is running and before engaging this gear, wait about 6 seconds with the clutch pressed

126 Driving

Automatic gearbox/DSG Driving programmes Selector lever locking automatic gearbox* The automatic gearbox / DSG gearbox has three programmes. Selector lever positions Selecting the economy programme – This programme selects a higher gear earlier rather than remain in a lower gear. specifications Technical – Put the selector lever into position D to drive forwards. – Put the selector lever into position R to reverse. This position is shared by all pro- Fig. 126 Centre console: automatic gearbox Advice grammes for reversing. selector lever.

Selecting the sport programme The selector lever lock prevents gears from Fig. 125 Centre console: selector lever for au- being engaged inadvertently, which would – Move the lever to position S. tomatic gearbox/DSG automatic gearbox. cause the vehicle to move. If you select sport programme S, the pro- Selector lever positions indicated on the gramme is designed for sport mode, that is, Releasing the selector lever lock cover a programme which changes up at higher en- – Start the vehicle.

P Parking position (lever locked). gine speeds to use the full power of the en- Operation – Press and release the brake pedal, at the R Reverse position. gine. This programme is not recommended for use on the motorway or in the city. same time press the button on the selector N Neutral position (lever locked). This po- lever. sition is similar to the neutral position for manual gearboxes). Selecting the manual programme (Tiptronic) The lock can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary or at a speed of less than D Drive position (economic driving pro- This programme allows driving similar to a 5 km/h (3 mph). It is automatically switched gramme). manual gearbox.

off at higher speeds in position N. Safety S Sports driving position. This programme may be accessed using the selector lever or from the steering wheel con- For rapid gear changes (e.g. from R to D) the +/- Tiptronic driving position (this pro- trols when this option is fitted page 129. lever will not lock. If the lever remains in po- gramme is similar to the operation of a ››› sition N for more than one second it will lock. manual gearbox). With the automatic lock, the lever is » 127 Operation

prevented from passing from P and N to any – Holding down the lock button (button on – Lightly press the selector lever back to other gear without first pressing the brake the selector lever), select R or D. change down. pedal. – Release the lever and wait a little for the The selector lever must be put in the position gearbox to engage the gear (a slight move- Holding the car on a hill P in order to remove the key. ment can be felt). – The brake must be always pressed down to prevent the vehicle from “rolling back- – Release the brake and press the accelerator wards” ››› . Do not try to prevent the vehi- ››› . Driving with automatic gearbox/DSG cle from “rolling backwards” by increasing automatic gearbox* the engine speed while a range of gears is Stopping briefly selected. – If stopping for a short time, keep the vehicle stationary by pressing the foot brake Starting the vehicle up hills hard to prevent the vehicle moving back- – Apply the handbrake. wards on a slope or “creeping” forwards, e.g. at traffic lights. The selector lever does – With a selected gear, accelerate slowly and not need to be put into the positions P or N at the same time, release the handbrake. for this. The steeper the slope, the lower the needed – Do not press the accelerator. gear. This increases the braking effect of the engine. For example, when driving down a Parking very steep slope in third gear. If the engine Fig. 127 Centre console: automatic gearbox – Press and hold the brake pedal until the ve- brake effect is not enough, the vehicle will selector lever. hicle comes to a standstill ››› . speed up. The automatic gearbox automatically changes up to prevent the engine over- The gearbox changes gear ratios automatical- – Apply the handbrake. revving. Use the foot brake to reduce speed ly as the vehicle moves. – By pressing the lock button down, move and change into 3rd gear using Tiptronic* the selector lever to P and release the lock ››› . Starting button. Your vehicle has an automatic interlock – Start the engine with the selector lever in which prevents the selector lever from being position P or N. Driving up and down hills put into a position for driving forwards or in – Press the selector lever from position “D” reverse from positions P or N if the brake Driving to the right into the tiptronic selector gate. pedal is not depressed. – Press and hold the brake pedal.

128 Driving

The ignition key cannot be removed unless ● If you stop the vehicle up hill, always hold Changing gear in Tiptronic mode* the selector lever is in position P. the foot brake strongly depressed down to stop it from rolling back. Control lamp “Pressing brake pedal”  ● Never allow the brake to rub and do not use When the warning lamp next to the selector the brake pedal too often or for long periods. lever lights up, press the brake pedal. This is Constant braking will cause the brakes to necessary when the automatic gearbox selec- overheat and will considerably reduce the Technical specifications Technical tor lever is moved out of positions P or N. A brake effect. This increases the braking dis- text message or instructions to perform nec- tance and could cause the brake system to fail. essary operations may appear on the instrument panel. ● Never allow the car to roll down a gradient with the gear in neutral N, or in selector lever position D, even if the engine is not running. WARNING Fig. 128 Changing gear with Tiptronic. Advice ● As a driver, you should never leave your vehicle if the engine is running and a gear range CAUTION is engaged. If you have to leave your vehicle ● If you stop the vehicle up hills, do not at- while the engine is running, you must apply tempt to stop it from rolling back by depress- the parking brake and put the selector lever ing the accelerator when a gear has been se- in position P. lected. Otherwise, the automatic gearbox ● If the engine is running and if D or R is en- may overheat causing damage. Pull the hand- gaged, you will need to hold the car on the brake up or fully depress the brake pedal to

foot brake. The car will creep forward as the prevent the vehicle from rolling away. Operation power transmission is not fully interrupted ● If you allow the vehicle to roll when the en- even when the engine is idling. gine is not running, or with the selector lever ● Never accelerate when moving the selector in position N, a lack of lubrication in the auto- Fig. 129 Steering wheel with paddle shifters lever or you may cause an accident. matic gearbox will damage it. for automatic gearbox. ● Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving. Risk of accident! The Tiptronic system allows the driver to se- ● lect gears manually. Before driving down a long, steep slope, it Safety is advisable to reduce speed and change into a lower gear. Changing gear with the selector lever – Press the selector lever from position D to the right into the tiptronic selector gate. » 129 Operation

– Lightly press the selector lever forward tor lever position D, “tiptronic” mode will WARNING ››› Fig. 128 + to change up to a higher then also be in third gear. gear. You could lose control of the vehicle if you accelerate on slippery road surfaces. Risk of se- Changing gears in the normal or sport – Lightly press the selector lever backward rious injury. programme using the steering wheel paddle ››› Fig. 128 - to change down to a lower levers ● Be particularly careful when using the kick- gear. down features on slippery road surfaces. With If the paddle levers ››› Fig. 129 are used in a fast acceleration, the vehicle could lose Changing gear with the steering wheel the normal or sport programme, the system traction and skid. paddle levers* switches temporarily to “tiptronic” mode. To ● You should use the kick-down feature only exit “Tiptronic” mode again, press the right – Press the right paddle lever + towards the when traffic and weather conditions allow it paddle shifter +OFF toward the steering steering wheel to change up ››› Fig. 129. to be used safely. wheel for approximately one second. You will – Press the left paddle – towards the steer- also leave “Tiptronic” mode if the paddle lev- ing wheel to change down ››› Fig. 129. ers are not moved for a certain time. Run-in and economical driving Using the paddle levers on the steering Note wheel, you can access manual driving mode Running in a new engine regardless of the pre-selected driving mode. ● The gearbox controls on the steering wheel can operate with the selector lever in any position and with the vehicle in motion. The engine needs to be run in over the first General information about driving in 1,500 km. tiptronic mode When accelerating, the automatic gearbox / Kick-down feature Up to 1,000 kilometres DSG automatic gearbox goes into a higher – Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 gear a little before the engine reaches its This feature allows maximum acceleration. the maximum speed. maximum permitted revolutions. If you press the accelerator down thoroughly, – Do not accelerate hard. If a lower gear is selected, the automatic the gearbox automatically changes down, de- – Avoid high engine revolutions. gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox will only pending on speed and engine speed, into a change down when the engine cannot go lower gear to take full advantage of give the – Do not tow a trailer. over its maximum permitted revolutions. vehicle maximum acceleration. If “tiptronic” is selected whilst the vehicle is The gearbox does not change gear until the in motion and the automatic gearbox / DSG engine reaches the maximum determined en- automatic gearbox is in third gear and selec- gine speed for the gear.

130 Driving

From 1,000 to 1,500 kilometres Choice of materials Catalytic converter – Speeds can be gradually increased to the ● Use of recycled materials. maximum road speed or maximum To maintain the useful life of the catalytic ● Use of compatible plastics in the same part converter permissible engine speed (rpm). if its components are not easily separated. – Use only unleaded petrol with petrol en- ● During its first few hours of running, the in- Use of recycled materials and/or materials gines, as lead damages the catalytic con- ternal friction in the engine is greater than originating from renewable sources. verter. later on, when all the moving parts have bed- ● Reduction of volatile components, includ- specifications Technical – Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank. ded in. ing odour, in plastic materials. ● Use of CFC-free coolants. – For engine oil changes, do not replenish For the sake of the environment with too much engine oil ››› page 168, Top- If the engine is run in gently, its life will be in- Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions ping up engine oil . creased and its oil consumption reduced. dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive – Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump Advice 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa- leads if necessary ››› page 189. valent chromium. Environmental friendliness If you notice misfiring, uneven running or Manufacturing methods loss of power when the vehicle is moving, re- Environmental protection is a top priority in ● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the duce speed immediately and have the vehi- the design, choice of materials and manufac- protective wax for cavities. cle inspected at the nearest specialised workshop. In general, the exhaust warning ture of your new SEAT. ● Use of plastic film as protection during ve- lamp will light up when any of the described hicle transport. Constructive measures to encourage symptoms occur ››› page 35. If this happens, Operation ● recycling Use of solvent-free adhesives. unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system ● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- and escape into the environment. The cata- ● Joints and connections designed for easy tems. lytic converter can also be damaged by over- dismantling ● Recycling and energy recovery from resi- heating. ● Modular construction to facilitate disman- dues (RDF). tling WARNING ● Improvement in the quality of waste water. ● Increased use of single-grade materials.

The catalytic converter reaches very high Safety ● Use of systems for the recovery of residual ● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in temperatures! Risk of fire! heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and ● Never park where the catalytic converter etc.). ISO 1629. could come into contact with dry grass or ● Use of water-soluble paints. flammable materials under the vehicle. » 131 Operation

● Do not apply additional underseal or anti- Diesel engine particulate filter* WARNING corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, cata- ● The diesel engine particulate filter may lytic converter or the heat shields on the ex- reach extremely high temperatures; the vehi- haust system. These materials could catch cle should be parked so that the exhaust pipe fire when the vehicle is being driven. does not come into contact with flammable materials underneath the vehicle. Otherwise CAUTION there is a risk of fire. Never run the fuel tank completely dry because the irregularity of the fuel supply may CAUTION cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt ● Your vehicle is not designed to use biodie- fuel to enter the exhaust system, which could sel fuel. Never, under any circumstances re- cause overheating and damage the catalytic fuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuel converter. Fig. 130 Vehicle data sticker on back cover of could damage the engine and the fuel sys- the Maintenance Programme. tem. The addition of biodiesel to diesel by For the sake of the environment the diesel producer in accordance with stand- Your vehicle is fitted with a DPF (Diesel partic- ard EN 590 is authorised and will not cause Even when the emission control system is ulate filter) if the vehicle data sticker (back damage to the engine or the fuel system. working perfectly, there may be a smell of cover of the “Maintenance Programme)” lists ● Using diesel fuel with a high sulphur con- sulphur from the exhaust gas under some the PR code 7GG or 7MG ››› Fig. 130. conditions. This depends on the sulphur content may significantly reduce the useful life of tent of the fuel used. Quite often the problem The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates the diesel particulate filter. Your Technical can be solved by changing to another brand most of the soot from the exhaust gas sys- Service will be able to tell you which coun- of fuel. tem. Under normal driving conditions, the fil- tries have diesel with a high sulphur content. ter cleans itself. If this is not possible (for example, multiple short trips) the filter will be obstructed by soot and  the diesel engine Economical and environmentally particulate filter warning lamp will light up. friendly driving This does not represent a fault, it is a warning that indicates that the filter has not been Fuel consumption, environmental pollution able to regenerate automatically and that you and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de- must perform a cleaning cycle, as indicated pends in large part on your driving style. By in ››› page 41. adopting an economical driving style and anticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%.

132 Driving

Some tips on how to help you reduce pollu- crease very rapidly at higher speeds. Driving exhaust gas filtration systems should reach tion while saving money are listed below. at moderate speeds will help to save fuel. the optimum operating temperature. With the engine cold, fuel consumption is Drive anticipating the traffic situation Avoid idling proportionally higher. The engine does not A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. It is worthwhile switching off the engine warm up and fuel consumption does not nor- When you anticipate situations, you have to when waiting in a traffic jam, at level cross- malise until having driven approximately four brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If ings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. kilometres. This is why we recommend avoid- Technical specifications Technical it is possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear The fuel saved after only 30 - 40 seconds is ing short trips whenever possible. engaged, for example, if you see a red light greater than the amount of fuel needed to re- ahead. The braking effect achieved in this start the engine. Maintain the correct tyre pressures way helps to reduce the wear of brakes and The engine takes a long time to warm up Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an ad- tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu- equate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pres- reduced to zero (disconnection due to iner- tant emissions are also especially high dur- sure is just one bar (14.5 psi / 100 kPa) too Advice tia). ing this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore low, fuel consumption can increase by as best to drive off immediately after starting much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resist- Change gear early to save energy the engine. Avoid running the engine at high ance, under-inflation also increases tyre wear An effective way of saving fuel is to change speed. and impairs handling. up quickly through the gears. Running the The tyre pressures should always be checked engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses Periodic maintenance when the tyres are cold. an unnecessary amount of fuel. Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, Do not use winter tyres all year round as they

Manual gearbox: shift up from first to second before beginning a journey, you will not con- Operation increase fuel consumption by up to 10%. gear as soon as possible. We recommend sume more than the required amount of fuel. that, whenever possible, you change to a A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit Avoid unnecessary weight higher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Follow of improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi- the “recommended gear” indication that ap- mum reliability and an enhanced resale val- Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- pears on the instrument panel ››› page 47. ue. crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable to always check the luggage compartment to A badly serviced engine can consume up to make sure that no unnecessary loads are be- Avoid driving at high speed 10% more fuel than necessary. ing transported. Safety We advise you not to drive at the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption, Avoid short journeys A roof rack is often left in place for the sake exhaust emissions and noise levels all in- of convenience, even when it is no longer To reduce the consumption and emission of needed. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph) polluting exhaust gases, the engine and the » 133 Operation

and 120 km/h (75 mph) your vehicle will use slope. Fuel consumption will be “zero” and Driver assistance systems about 12% more fuel as a result of the extra the brakes will not suffer. wind resistance caused by the roof rack even when it is not in use. Braking and stability systems

Save electricity Electronic Stability Control (ESC)* The engine activates the alternator, which produces electricity. With the need for electricity, fuel consumption is also increased. Because of this, always turn off electrical devices when you do not need them. Examples of devices that use a lot of electricity are: the fan at high speeds, the rear window heating or the seat heaters*.

Note ● If you vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not rec- Fig. 131 Detailed view of the centre console: ommended to switch this function off. ESC switch. ● It is recommended to close the windows when driving at more than 60 km/h This Electronic Stability System reduces the ● Do not drive with your foot resting on the risk of skidding and improves the vehicle's clutch pedal,, as the pressure can make the stability and ability to hold the road. plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can burn the clutch plate lining, causing a serious Electronic Stability Control (ESC) includes the fault. electronic differential lock (EDL), the traction control system (TCS), the brake assist system ● Do not hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch, use the foot brake or hand brake, us- (BAS) and the trailer stabilisation programme ing the latter to start. The fuel consumption (TSP). The ESC works together with the ABS. will be lower and you will prevent the clutch Both control lamps will light up if the ESC or plate from being damaged. ABS systems are faulty. ● On descents, use the engine brake, chang- The ESC system is started automatically ing to the gear that is more suitable for the when the engine is started.

134 Driver assistance systems

The ESC system is always active and cannot Steering manoeuvre recommendations the tyres can cause the system to reduce en- be switched off. The ESC switch only switches This is a complementary safety function in- gine power when this is not desired. the ASR off. cluded in the ESC. This function aids the driv- ● Any modifications made to the vehicle (for The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin er to better stabilize the vehicle in a critical example, to the engine, brake system, run- is desirable. situation. For example, in case of sudden ning gear or to the combination of wheels braking on a surface with varied adherence, and tyres) may affect the operation of the For example: the vehicle will tend to destabilise its trajec- ABS, EDL, ESC and ASR. Technical specifications Technical ● When driving with snow chains. tory to the right or to the left. In this case, the ESC recognises the situation and assists the ● When driving in deep snow or on loose sur- driver with a counter steering manoeuvre Electronic differential lock (EDL)* faces. from the power steering. ● When the vehicle is stuck, to rock it back- EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accel- This function simply provides the driver with wards and forwards. erate and climb a gradient in slippery condi- a recommended manoeuvre in critical situa- Advice tions where this may otherwise be difficult or Press the button to switch the ASR back on tions. even impossible. when you no longer need wheel spin. The vehicle does not steer itself with this It uses the ABS sensors to monitor the speed function, the driver has full control of the ve- of the driven wheels. In case of an EDL fault, Electronic Stability Control (ESC)* hicle at all times. the warning light for ABS lights up The ESC reduces the risk of skidding by brak- ››› page 41. ing the wheels individually. WARNING At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h The system uses the steering wheel angle ● Remember that not even the ESC can defy

(50 mph), it is able to balance out differences Operation and road speed to calculate the changes of the laws of physics. This should be kept in in the speed of the driven wheels of approxi- direction desired by the driver, and constant- mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads mately 100 rpm/min caused by a partially ly compares them with the actual behaviour and when towing a trailer. slippery road surface. It does this by braking of the vehicle. When irregularities occur, for ● Always adapt your driving style to suit the the wheel which has lost traction and distrib- example, if the vehicle begins to skid, the condition of the roads and the traffic situa- uting more driving force to the other driven ESC brakes the appropriate wheel automati- tion. The greater safety provided by the ESC wheel via the differential. cally. should not encourage you to run any risks.

To prevent the disc brake of the braking Safety The forces acting on the braked wheel bring CAUTION wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out au- the vehicle back to a stable condition. If the tomatically if subjected to excessive loads. vehicle tends to oversteer (the rear end ● To ensure that the ESC works correctly, all The vehicle will continue to function normally slides out), the system will act on the front four wheels must be fitted with the same » wheel on the outside of the turn. tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of 135 Operation

without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not This is when the brake assist system comes Therefore, it is essential that you adjust your informed that the EDL has been switched off. into action. When pressing the brake pedal speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. rapidly, the assistant interprets it as an emer- The EDL will switch on again automatically Do not let the extra safety features tempt you gency. It very quickly builds up the full brake when the brake has cooled down. into taking any risks when driving. pressure so that the ABS can be activated more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing WARNING braking distance. ● When accelerating on a slippery surface, Anti-lock brake system (ABS) for example on ice and snow, press the accel- Do not reduce the pressure on the brake ped- erator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven al, since the brake assist system switches off The anti-lock brake (ABS) system prevents wheels may start to spin. This could impair automatically as soon as you release the the wheels from locking during braking and the vehicle's stability. brake. is an important part of the vehicle's active safety system. ● Always adapt your driving style to suit road conditions and the traffic situation. Do not let Emergency braking warning How the ABS works the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you in- If the vehicle is braked suddenly and continu- to taking any risks when driving, this can ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h, the If one of the wheels turns too slowly in rela- cause accidents. brake light flashes several times per second tion to the vehicle's speed, and is close to to warn vehicles driving behind. If you contin- locking, the system will reduce the braking CAUTION ue braking, the hazard warning lights will pressure to this wheel. The driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the en- come on automatically when the vehicle gine, the brake system, running gear or any comes to a standstill. They switch off auto- of the brake pedal and audible noise. This is components affecting the wheels and tyres) matically when the vehicle starts to move a deliberate warning to the driver that one or could affect the efficiency of the EDL again. more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ››› page 147. ABS control function has intervened. In this WARNING situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully depressed so the ABS can regu- ● The risk of accident is higher if you drive late the brake application. Do not “pump”. Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)* too fast, if you do not keep your distance from the vehicle in front, and when the road sur- If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, The function (Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA) is face is slippery or wet. The increased acci- the best possible control is retained as the only included in vehicles with ESC. dent risk cannot be reduced by the brake as- wheels do not lock. sist system. In an emergency, most drivers brake in time, However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee ● The brake assist system cannot defy the but not with maximum force. This results in laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are shorter braking distances in all conditions. unnecessarily long braking distances. dangerous even with the brake assist system! Braking distance could even be further if you

136 Driver assistance systems brake on gravel or on fresh snow on a entire speed range in conjunction with ABS. ● Always adapt your driving style to suit the slippery surface. If a failure occurs in the ABS, the ASR will al- condition of the roads and the traffic situa- so stop working. tion. The greater safety provided by the ASR WARNING TCS helps the car to start moving, accelerate should not encourage you to run any risks. ● The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the and climb a gradient in slippery conditions laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are where this may otherwise be difficult or even CAUTION dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that impossible.

● specifications Technical the ABS is working (to counteract locked To ensure that the ASR works correctly, wheels under braking), you should reduce The ASR automatically switches on when the identical tyres should be fitted on all four speed immediately to suit the road and traffic engine is started. If necessary, it may be wheels. Any differences in the rolling radius conditions. Do not let the extra safety fea- turned on or off by briefly pushing the button of the tyres can cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired. tures tempt you into taking any risks when on the centre console. driving. ● Any modifications made to the vehicle (for When the ASR is switched off, the  OFF ● example, to the engine, brake system, run- Advice The effectiveness of ABS is also determined warning lamp will light up. The ASR should by the tyres fitted ››› page 175. ning gear or to the combination of wheels normally be left on. Only in exceptional cir- and tyres) may affect the operation of the ● If the running gear or brake system is modi- cumstances, when slipping of the wheels is ABS and ASR. fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se- desired, should it be disconnected. verely limited. ● With compact temporary spare wheel. XDS* ● When using the snow chains. Drive wheel traction control system ● When driving in deep snow or on soft ter- When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-

(ASR) rain. tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turn Operation ● at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In The traction control system prevents the driv- When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it by “rocking.” this way, the wheel that is turning faster (out- en wheels from spinning when the vehicle is er wheel) receives less drive torque than the accelerating. The ASR should be switched on again as inner wheel. This may mean that in certain soon as possible. situations the torque delivered to the inner Description and operation of the traction wheel is too high, causing the wheels to control system during acceleration (ASR WARNING spin. On the other hand, the outer wheel is Safety receiving a lower drive torque than it could On front-wheel drive vehicles, the ASR sys- ● Remember that not even the ASR can defy tem intervenes, reducing engine power and the laws of physics. This should be kept in transmit. This causes an overall loss of lateral preventing the driven wheels from slipping mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads grip on the front axle, resulting in understeer during acceleration. The system works in the and when towing a trailer. or “lengthening” of the trajectory. »

137 Operation

The XDS system can detect and correct this have to press the brake pedal considerably ● The temperature of the passenger compart- effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC. harder than normal. ment must be within comfort limits (button A/C 11 ››› Fig. 120 should be selected). Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside wheel and counter the excess driving torque ● The windscreen de-mist function must be off. of that wheel. This means that the driver's Start-Stop System* desired trajectory is much more precise, ● If not, it requires an increase in airflow 10 ››› Fig. 120 for more than three presses. The XDS system works in combination with Description and operation the ESC and is always active, even when ASR ● The temperature must not be set to HI or traction control is disconnected. The Start-Stop function stops the engine LO. when the vehicle is stopped and starts it au- ● The driver door must be closed. tomatically when required. ● The diesel particulate filter must not be in Brake servo – When the vehicle is stopped, put it in neu- regeneration mode, for diesel engines. tral and release the clutch pedal. The en- The brake servo increases the pressure you ● The battery charge must not be low for the gine will stop. apply to the brake pedal. It works only when next start. the engine is running. – When the clutch pedal is pressed, the en- ● Battery temperature must be between -1 °C gine starts again. (+30 °F) and +55 °C (+131 °F). If the brake servo is not functioning, e.g. due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle is being – The instrument panel display shows infor- ● The Parking aid system (Park Assist*) must towed, you will have to press the brake pedal mation about the status of the Start-Stop not be activated. considerably harder to make up for the lack function ››› Fig. 133. of servo assistance. Start-Stop function interruption Start-Stop function conditions In the following situations, the Start-Stop WARNING ● The driver seat belt must be buckled. function will be interrupted and the engine The braking distance can also be affected by ● The bonnet must be closed. will automatically start: external factors. ● The engine must be at operating tempera- ● The vehicle starts moving. ● Never let the vehicle coast with the engine ture. switched off. Failure to follow this instruction ● The brake pedal is pressed several times in ● The steering wheel must be straight. could result in an accident. The braking dis- a row. tance is increased considerably when the ● The vehicle must not be on a steep gradi- ● The battery has been discharged excessive- brake servo is not active. ent. ly. ● If the brake servo is not working, for exam- ● The vehicle must not be in reverse. ● The Start-Stop System is manually deacti- ple when the vehicle is being towed, you will ● A trailer must not be connected. vated. 138 Driver assistance systems

● The windscreen de-mist function is turned ● When the conditions for the Start-Stop deactivated, the pushbutton indicator on. function are not fulfilled, the instrument pan- lights. ● The temperature of the passenger compart- el displays the Start-Stop indicator dimmed. – If the Start-Stop function is operating then ment exceeds comfort limits (button A/C 11 ● If the steering wheel is turned more than the engine starts immediately. ››› Fig. 120 should be selected). 270°, Stop will not function; however, the angle of steering wheel turn does not affect ● If in an increase in airflow 10 ››› Fig. 120 is Switching the Start-Stop function on starting the vehicle. manually

required for more than three presses. specifications Technical ● Temperature setting HI or LO is selected. – Press the A ››› Fig. 132 located in the cen- ● The engine coolant temperature is insuffi- tre console. The indicator on the button will Activating and deactivating the Start- go out. cient. Stop function ● The alternator is faulty, for example the V-

belt has ruptured. Advice Driver messages ● If any of the conditions described in the previous section are not fulfilled.

WARNING Never allow the vehicle to move with the engine off for any reason. You could lose control of your vehicle. This could cause an accident and serious injury. Operation ● Power steering does not work when the engine is not running. That is why it is much Fig. 132 The Start-Stop function button. more difficult to turn the steering wheel. Every time the ignition is switched on, the ● Turn off the Start-Stop system when driving Fig. 133 Display on the instrument panel dur- Start-Stop function is automatically activa- through water (fording streams, etc.). ing Start-Stop function operation. ted.

Note When the engine is turned off by the Start- Manually deactivating the Start-Stop Stop function, this is displayed on the instru- Safety ● For vehicles with the Start-Stop function function ment panel. » and a manual gearbox, when the engine is – Press the A ››› Fig. 132 located in the cen- started, the clutch must be pressed. tre console. When the Start-Stop function is

139 Operation

Note SEAT Parking System: description sponsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres. There are different versions of the dash pan- The Parking System is an acoustic parking ● The sensors have blind spots in which ob- el; the display of indications on the screen aid. may differ. stacles are not registered. Always look out for Sensors are located in the rear bumper. small children and animals because the sys- When the sensors detect an obstacle, you are tem will not always detect them. Always pay alerted by audible warnings. The measuring attention when reversing to avoid accidents. Parking aid acoustic system* range of the sensors starts at approximately: ● Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full use of the rear vi- General notes Side 0.60 sion mirrors. Rear Centre 1.60 Various parking aid systems are available to CAUTION help you when parking or manoeuvring in The audible warnings sound with increasing tight spaces, depending on the equipment Please note that low obstacles detected by frequency as you approach the obstacle. the system may no longer be registered by fitted on your vehicle. When the vehicle is less than 0.30 m away the sensors as the car moves closer, so the The SEAT Parking System* gives an audible from the obstacle, the warning tone will system will not give any further warning. Cer- warning if there are any obstacles behind sound continuously. Do not drive on! tain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences, your vehicle. chains, thin painted posts or trailer draw The volume of the warning beeps will gradu- bars, etc) may not always be detected by the When you are parking, the SEAT Parking Sys- ally decrease after about 4 seconds if the ve- system, so take care not to damage the vehi- tem Plus* warns you acoustically and optical- hicle remains at a constant distance from a cle in such cases. ly1) about obstacles “in front of” and “be- detected obstacle (it does not affect the per- hind” the vehicle. manent acoustic signal). Note The parking aid is switched on automatically Note Please refer to the notes on towing when reverse gear is engaged. You will hear a ››› page 141. To ensure the acoustic parking aid works brief confirmation tone. properly, the sensors must be kept clean and free of snow and ice. WARNING ● The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver is personally re-

1) Vehicles with a navigation system. 140 Driver assistance systems

SEAT Parking System Plus*: Activating/deactivating cle. The amber colour segments combined description with a discontinuous beep indicate the presence of an obstacle. As the vehicle gets clos- The Parking System Plus is an acoustic and er to the obstacle, the colour of the segment optical parking aid. changes to red and the acoustic signal beeps continuously. When the penultimate segment Sensors are located in the front and rear is displayed, this means that the vehicle has bumpers. When the sensors detect an obsta- reached the collision zone. Stop moving im- specifications Technical cle, you are alerted by audible and optical mediately! ››› in SEAT Parking System: de- warnings. The measuring range of the sen- scription on page 140. sors starts at approximately: Note Side 0.90 Front Fig. 134 Centre console: Switch for parking ● Please refer to the notes on towing Advice Centre 1.20 aid. ››› page 141. Side 0.60 ● There is a slight delay in the picture dis- Rear Activate play. Centre 1.60 – Connects the radio navigator. The audible warnings sound with increasing – Press the switch  on the centre console frequency as you approach the obstacle. ››› Fig. 134 or on the gear indicator. You will Towing bracket When the vehicle is less than 0.30 m away hear a brief confirmation tone and the LED from the obstacle, the warning tone will on the switch will light up. In towing mode, the rear parking aid sensors Operation sound continuously. Stop moving immediate- are not enabled when you select reverse gear or press the switch . This function may not ly! Deactivating be guaranteed on towing brackets that are The volume of the warning beeps will gradu- – Drive forward faster than 10 km/h (6 mph), not factory fitted. This results in the following ally decrease after about 4 seconds if the ve- or restrictions: hicle remains at a constant distance from a – Press the switch  or detected obstacle (it does not affect the per- SEAT Parking System* manent acoustic signal). – Switch the ignition off. No warning is given. Safety Segments in the optical display Some colour segments in front and behind SEAT Parking System Plus* and an audible warning enable the driver to There is no rear distance warning. The system assess the distance with respect to an obsta- will still give a warning when obstacles are » 141 Operation

detected while driving forward. The optical WARNING Switching the cruise control system display changes to towing mode. It could be dangerous to use the cruise con- on and off trol system if it is not possible to drive at constant speed. Fault messages ● Do not use the cruise control system when driving in dense traffic, on roads with lots of If you hear a long beep for a few seconds and bends or on roads with poor conditions (with  the LED on the switch * starts flashing ice, slippery surfaces, loose grit or gravel), as when you switch on the parking aid, a system this could cause an accident. fault has occurred. Contact a SEAT official ● Always switch the cruise control system off service or specialised workshop. after using it in order to avoid involuntary use. Note ● It is dangerous to use a set speed which is If the fault is not corrected before you switch Fig. 135 Turn signal and main beam head- too high for the current road, traffic or weath- light lever: switch and rocker switch for the off the ignition, it will only be indicated by er conditions. Risk of accident. the flashing LED on the switch  the next cruise control. time you switch on the parking aid. Note Switching on the cruise control system The cruise control cannot maintain a constant – Push the switch ››› Fig. 135 B to the left to speed when descending downhill. It will in- ON. Cruise speed* (cruise control crease due to its own weight. Use the foot system - CCS) brake to slow the vehicle. Switching off the cruise control system – Either push the switch B to the right to Description OFF or turn the ignition off when the vehicle is stationary. The CCS is able to maintain the set speed in the range from approx. 30 km/h (19 mph) to When cruise control is on and a speed is pro- 180 km/h (112 mph). grammed, the indicator  on the dash panel is lit.1) Once the speed setting has been saved, you may take your foot off the accelerator. If the cruise control system is switched off, the  symbol is switched off. The system will

1) Depending on the model version 142 Driver assistance systems also be switched off fully when the 1st gear Setting a higher speed Switching off cruise control is engaged.* – Press the upper part RES/+ of the rocker temporarily* switch ››› Fig. 136 A to increase the speed. The vehicle will continue to accelerate as Setting speed* long as you keep the rocker switch pressed. When you release the switch, the new speed is stored. Technical specifications Technical

Setting a lower speed – Press the lower part SET/– ››› Fig. 136 A of the rocker switch to reduce the speed. The vehicle will automatically reduce its speed

for as long as you keep the switch pressed. Fig. 137 Turn signal and main beam head- Advice When you release the switch, the new light lever: switch and rocker switch for the speed is stored. cruise control. Fig. 136 Turn signal and main beam head- When you increase speed with the accelera- light lever: switch and rocker switch for the The cruise control system will be switched off tor and then release the pedal, the system cruise control. in the following situations: will automatically restore the set speed. This will not be the case, however, if the vehicle – Press the lower part SET/- of the rocker ● if the brake pedal is depressed, speed exceeds the stored speed by more switch ››› Fig. 136 A once briefly when you ● if the clutch pedal is depressed, have reached the speed you wish to set. than 10 km/h (6 mph) for longer than 5 mi- Operation nutes. The speed will have to be stored ● if the vehicle is accelerated to over When you release the rocker switch, the cur- again. 180 km/h (112 mph), ● when the ESC or ASR is used. rent speed is set and held constant. Cruise control is switched off if you reduce speed by depressing the brake pedal. You ● when the lever B is moved to the position can reactivate the control by pressing once CANCEL without reaching the OFF position. Adjusting set speed* on the upper part of the rocker switch RES/+ Once the CANCEL operation is complete, when the lever is released it returns to its ini- ››› Fig. 136 A . Safety The speed can be altered without touching tial position. the accelerator or the brake. To resume cruise control, release the brake or clutch pedal or reduce the vehicle speed to less than 180 km/h (112 mph) and press » 143 Operation once on the upper part of the rocker switch Towing bracket device power and therefore the vehicle climbing RES/+ ››› Fig. 137 A . ability are impaired because of the reduced air density. The maximum trailer weight has Trailer towing to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the Complete system deactivation* vehicle and trailer combination must be re- Instructions to follow duced by 10% for every further 1000 m (or Vehicles with a manual gearbox part thereof). The gross combination weight Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer is the actual weight of the laden vehicle plus The system is completely turned off by mov- when fitted with the correct equipment. the actual weight of the laden trailer. When ing the control B ››› Fig. 137 all the way to possible, operate the trailer with the maxi- the right (OFF engaged), or when the vehicle If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted tow- mum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint is stationary, by switching off the ignition. ing bracket it will already have the necessary technical modifications and meet the statuto- of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified limit. Vehicles with automatic gearbox/DSG ry requirements for towing a trailer. If you automatic gearbox wish to retrofit a towing bracket, consult The figures for trailer weights and drawbar ››› page 146. loads that are given on the data plate of the To completely disengage the system, the se- towing bracket are for certification purposes lector lever must be placed in one of the fol- Connectors only. The correct figures for your specific lowing positions: P, N, R or 1 or with the vehi- model, which may be lower than these fig- cle stopped and the ignition turned off. Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection between the ures for the towing bracket, are given in the trailer and the vehicle. vehicle documentation or in ››› chapter Tech- nical Data. If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. It is available at any Distributing the load Technical Service. Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as possible. Trailer weight/drawbar load Loads carried in the trailer must be secured Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If to prevent them moving. you do not load the trailer up to the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly steeper slopes. The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine 144 Towing bracket device

Tyre pressure Ball coupling of towing bracket* Speed Set tyre pressure to the maximum permissi- The stability of the vehicle and trailer is re- ble pressure shown on the sticker on the in- Depending on the model version, the spheri- duced with increasing speed. For this reason, side of the fuel tank flap. Set the tyre pres- cal head on the trailer hook may be stored in it is advisable not to drive at the maximum sure of the trailer tyres in accordance with the the tool box. permissible speed in an unfavourable road, trailer manufacturer's recommendations. The ball coupling is provided with instruc- weather or wind conditions. This applies es- tions on fitting and removing the ball cou- pecially when driving downhill. Technical specifications Technical Exterior mirrors pling of the towing bracket. You should always reduce speed immediately Check whether you can see enough of the if the trailer shows the slightest sign of snak- road behind the trailer with the standard rear WARNING ing. Never try to stop the “snaking” by in- vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you The towing bracket ball coupling must be creasing speed. should have additional exterior mirrors fitted. stored securely in the luggage compartment Always brake in due course. If the trailer has Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on to prevent them being flung through the vehi- Advice an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at hinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrors cle and causing injury. first and then, firmly. This will prevent the to give sufficient vision to the rear. jerking that can be caused by locking of trail- Note er wheels. Select a low gear in due course WARNING ● By law, the ball coupling must be removed before going down a steep downhill. This en- Never transport people in a trailer. This could if a trailer is not being towed if it obscures ables you to use the engine braking to slow result in fatal accidents. the number plate. down the vehicle.

Note Reheating Operation ● Towing a trailer places additional demands Driving tips At very high temperatures and during pro- on the vehicle. We recommend additional longed slopes, driving in a low gear and high services between the normal inspection inter- Driving with a trailer always requires extra engine speed, always monitor the coolant vals if the vehicle is used frequently for tow- care. temperature gauge ››› page 31. ing a trailer. ● Find out whether special regulations apply Weight distribution Electronic Stability Control* to towing a trailer in your country. The weight distribution of a loaded trailer The ESC* system helps to stabilise the trailer Safety with an unladen vehicle is very unfavourable. in case of skidding or rocking. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow for the unbalanced weight distribution.

145 Operation

Fitting a towing bracket* The attachment points for the towing bracket ● Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear A are on the lower part of the vehicle. bumper, must be removed and reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be The distance between the centre of the ball tightened using a torque wrench, and a pow- coupling and the ground should never be er socket must be connected to the vehicle lower than the indicated value, even with a electrical system. This requires specialised fully loaded vehicle and including the maxi- knowledge and tools. mum drawbar load. ● Figures in the illustration show the eleva- Elevation values for securing the towing tion value and the attachment points which bracket: must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket. ALTEA FREE- ALTEA ALTEA XL TRACK WARNING B 65 mm (minimum) The towing brackets should be fitted at a specialised workshop. C 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle) ● If the towing bracket is incorrectly instal- D 357 mm 344 mm led, there is a serious danger of accident. ● E 569 mm 531 mm For your own safety, please observe the tow bracket manufacturer's instructions. F 875 mm 1,044 mm

G 1040 mm CAUTION ● If the power socket is incorrectly installed, Fitting a towing bracket this could cause damage to the vehicle electrical system. ● Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort Fig. 138 Attachment points for towing brack- for the vehicle. Therefore, before fitting a et. towing bracket, please contact a Technical Note Service to check whether your cooling system For the sports model (Altea FR), fitting of a If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the ve- needs modification. trailer bracket is not recommended due to the hicle is purchased, this must be completed ● The legal requirements in your country design of the bumpers. according to the instructions of the towing must be observed (e.g. the fitting of a sepa- bracket manufacturer. rate control lamp).

146 Care and maintenance

Despite a continuous observation of the mar- Unauthorised modifications to the electronic Advice ket, SEAT is not able to assess the reliability, components or software in the vehicle may safety and suitability of parts that SEAT has cause malfunctions. Due to the way the elec- Care and maintenance not approved. For this reason, SEAT cannot tronic components are linked together in net- assume responsibility for any non-genuine works, other indirect systems may be affec- parts used, even if these parts have been ap- ted by the faults. This can seriously impair Accessories and technical proved by an official testing agency or are safety, lead to excessive wear of compo- modifications covered by an official approval certificate. nents, and also invalidate your vehicle regis- specifications Technical tration documents. Any retro-fitted equipment which has a direct Accessories, modifications and spare effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is driv- SEAT Technical Services cannot be held liable parts en, such as a cruise control system or elec- for any damage caused by modifications tronically-controlled suspension), must be and/or work incorrectly performed. Your vehicle is designed to offer a high

SEAT-approved for use in your vehicle and Advice For this reason, we recommend having all standard of active and passive safety. bear the e mark (the European Union's au- work performed by a SEAT Technical Service thorisation symbol). Before purchasing accessories and parts, using SEAT® Original Spare Parts. and before making technical changes to your If any additional electrical devices are fitted vehicle, we recommend that you consult your which do not serve to control the vehicle it- WARNING Technical Service. self (e.g. refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator Any type of work or modification performed SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide fan), these must bear the CE mark (European incorrectly on your vehicle can lead to mal- you with the latest information about the Union manufacturer conformity declaration). functions and can cause accidents. use, legal requirements and recommenda- Operation tions from the manufacturer regarding acces- WARNING sories and spare parts. Accessories, for example telephone holders Roof aerial* or cup holders, should never be fitted on the We recommend you use only SEAT Approved covers or within the working range of the air- Accessories® and SEAT Approved Spare The vehicle may be fitted with a foldable* bags. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury if ® and anti-theft* aerial that may be positioned Parts . This way, SEAT can guarantee that the airbag is triggered in an accident. the product in question is suitable, reliable parallel to the roof. and safe. SEAT Technical Services have the Safety necessary experience and facilities to ensure To fold down Technical modifications that parts are correctly and professionally in- Unscrew the rod, position parallel to the roof stalled. and tighten once again. Modifications must always be carried out ac- » cording to our specifications. 147 Advice

To return to working position Note Products for vehicle maintenance Continue in the reverse order to the previous Please observe the operating instructions of Car-care products are available in your Tech- instruction. your mobile telephone/two-way radio. nical Services. Keep the product instructions until you have used them up. CAUTION If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, be- WARNING fore entering the tunnel, put the aerial down Care and cleaning ● Car-care products can be toxic. Because of parallel to the roof and do not tighten to this, they must always be kept closed in their avoid damage. General information original container. Keep them out of the reach of children. Failure to comply could result in Vehicle maintenance poisoning. Mobile phones and two-way radios Regular care and washing help to maintain ● Always read and observe the instructions the value of the vehicle. This may also be one and warnings on the package before using First consult your Technical Service if you of the requirements for acknowledging war- car-care products. Improper use could cause wish to use a mobile telephone or a two-way ranty claims in the event of bodywork corro- health problems or damage the vehicle. The use of certain products may produce noxious radio with a transmitting power output in ex- sion or paint defects. vapours; they should be used in well ventila- cess of 10 watts. Here you will receive infor- The best way to protect your vehicle against ted areas. mation concerning the technical possibilities the harmful effects of the environment is for retrofitting this equipment. ● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail through correct maintenance and frequent varnish remover or other volatile fluids. Mobile telephones and two-way radios washing. The longer substances such as in- These are toxic and highly flammable. Risk of should be only fitted by a specialised work- sect remains, bird droppings, resinous tree fire and explosion. shop, for example a SEAT dealership. sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or ● Before washing your vehicle, or carrying road salt and other aggressive materials re- out any maintenance, switch the engine off, WARNING main on the vehicle, the more damage they apply the handbrake firmly and remove the ● Always concentrate primarily on driving. If do to the paintwork. High temperatures, for key from the ignition. you are distracted while driving you could instance in strong sunlight, further intensify have an accident. the corrosive effect. CAUTION ● Never attach the telephone mountings to After winter, a period when salt is put on the Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if the surfaces covering the airbag units or roads, it is important to have the underside the surface of the vehicle is dry. Never use a within the range of the airbags. There is a of the vehicle washed thoroughly. dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. high danger of injury if the airbag is trig- This could damage the paintwork or the win- gered. dows of your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty of water. 148 Care and maintenance

For the sake of the environment could be wet, or even frozen in winter. “Dry” – Dry the vehicle surface gently with a cha- the brakes by braking several times. mois leather. ● When purchasing products for your vehicle maintenance, select the ones which are not – In cold temperature, dry the rubber seals WARNING harmful to the environment. and their surfaces to prevent them from ● The waste from car-care products should Water, ice and salt on the brake system can freezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber not be disposed of with ordinary household reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci- seals. waste. Observe the disposal information on dent. Technical specifications Technical the package. After washing the vehicle CAUTION – After washing, avoid sudden and sharp Before putting the vehicle through the car braking. “Dry” the brakes by braking sever- Care of the vehicle exterior wash, do not tighten the aerial if it is folded al times ››› page 123, Braking capacity and because it can be damaged. distance. Advice Automatic car wash tunnel WARNING The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the Washing by hand ● Wash your vehicle with the ignition switch- vehicle can normally be washed without ed off. problems in an automatic car wash tunnel. Vehicle washing ● Protect your hands and arms from cuts on However, the paintwork wear depends to a – First soften the dirt and rinse it off with wa- sharp metal edges when cleaning the under- large extent on the kind of the car wash tun- ter. body, the inside of the wheel housings etc. nel, the brushes used, its water filtering and Risk of injury. – Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with the type of cleaning and preservative prod- ● Water, ice and salt on the brake system can Operation a soft sponge, a glove or a brush. Use very ucts. reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci- light pressure. dent. Before going through a vehicle wash, be sure – Rinse the sponge or glove often with clean to take the usual precautions such as closing water. the windows and sunroof. CAUTION – Special car shampoo should only be used If the vehicle has special accessories such as ● Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehi- for very stubborn dirt. spoilers or a roof rack or two-way radio aerial, cle surface is dry. Never use a dry cloth or

sponge for cleaning purposes. This could Safety etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash – Leave the wheels, sill panels etc. until last, scratch the paintwork or glass on your vehi- tunnel operator. using a different sponge or glove. cle. » After washing, the brakes could take some – Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water. time to respond as the brake discs and pads

149 Advice

● Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: – Do not use a high pressure cleaner to re- Vehicle paint maintenance when washing the vehicle with a hose, do not move ice or snow from windows direct water into the lock cylinders or the ››› page 151. Regular waxing protects the paintwork. gaps around the doors, rear lid, or sunroof. – Never use concentrated jet nozzles (“rotat- You need to apply wax to your vehicle if water Risk of freezing. ing jets”) ››› . does not form small drops and run off the paintwork when it is clean. – After washing, avoid sudden and sharp For the sake of the environment braking. “Dry” the brakes by braking sever- Good quality hard wax products are available To protect the environment, the vehicle al times ››› page 123. at your Technical Service. should be washed only in specially provided Regular wax applications help to protects the wash bays, to prevent toxic, oil-laden waste WARNING water from entering the sewer system. In paintwork from environmental contaminants. some places, washing vehicles outside wash ● Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet ››› page 148. It also protects against minor bays is prohibited. (“rotating nozzle”). Even at large spraying scratches. distances and short cleaning times, damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an ac- Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the Note cident. vehicle washing tunnel, it is advisable to pro- Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. ● Water, ice and salt on the brake system can tect the paint with a hard wax coating at least reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci- twice a year. dent. Washing the vehicle with a high Polishing the paintwork pressure cleaner CAUTION ● Do not use water hotter than +60 °C Polishing is only necessary if the paint has Be particularly careful when using a high (+140 °F). This could damage the vehicle. lost its shine, and the gloss cannot be pressure cleaner! ● To avoid damage to the vehicle, keep a suf- brought back by applying wax. Polishing – Always observe the instructions for the ficient distance from sensitive materials such products can be purchased in your Technical high-pressure cleaner, particularly those as flexible hoses, plastic, soundproofing ma- Service. concerning the pressure and the spraying terial, etc. This also applies to bumpers pain- The vehicle must be waxed after polishing if distance. ted in the colour of the bodywork. The closer the nozzle is to the surface, the greater the the polish used does not contain wax com- – Increase the spraying distance for soft ma- wear on the material. pounds to seal the paint ››› page 150, Vehicle terials and painted bumpers. paint maintenance.

150 Care and maintenance

CAUTION Removing snow ● The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the window. To To prevent damage to the paintwork: – Use a small brush to remove snow from the windows and mirrors. prevent damage, do not put stickers over the ● Do not use polishes and hard wax on pain- heating elements on the inside of the win- ted parts with a matt finish or on plastic dow. parts. Removing ice ● Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or – Use a de-icer spray.

dusty environment. specifications Technical Use a clean cloth or chamois leather to dry Cleaning windscreen wiper blades the windows. The chamois leathers used on painted surfaces are not suitable to clean Clean wiper blades improve visibility. Caring for plastic parts windows because they are soiled with wax 1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt deposits which could smear the windows. If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, from the windscreen wiper blades. clean them with approved solvent-free plas- If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove 2. Use window cleaner to clean the wind- Advice tic cleaning and care products. ice. If you use an ice scraper, push it in one screen wiper blades. Use a sponge or a direction only without swinging it. cloth to remove stubborn dirt. CAUTION Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to ● The use of liquid air freshener directly over clean rubber, oil, grease and silicone depos- the air vents of the vehicle may damage plas- its off. Care of rubber seals tic parts if the liquid is accidentally spilled. Wax deposits can only be removed with a If rubber seals are well looked after, they will ● Cleaning products which contain solvents special cleaner available at your Technical

not freeze so quickly. Operation will damage the material. Service. Wax deposits on the windscreen could cause the wiper blades to judder. Add- 1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt ing a window cleaner that dissolves wax to from the rubber seals. Cleaning windows and exterior the windscreen washer fluid prevents wiper 2. Apply a specialist care product to the rub- mirrors blades from juddering, but wax deposits are ber seals. not removed. Cleaning windows The rubber strips on the doors, windows, etc.

– Moisten the windows with commercially CAUTION will remain pliable and last longer if they are Safety available, alcohol based glass cleaner. ● Never use warm or hot water to remove treated with a suitable rubber care product snow and ice from windows and mirrors. This from time to time (for example silicone – Dry the windows with a clean chamois could cause the glass to crack! spray). » leather or a lint-free cloth.

151 Advice

Caring for rubber seals will also prevent pre- Steel wheel rims Alloy wheels require regular attention to premature ageing and leaks. The doors will be serve their appearance. If road salt and brake easier to open. If rubber seals are well looked – Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a dust are not often removed, the aluminium after, they will not freeze so quickly in winter. separate sponge. finish will be impaired.

Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy dust. Any damage to the paint on steel wheel wheel rims. Door lock cylinder rims should be repaired before starting to Car polish or other abrasive agents should rust. The door lock cylinders can freeze up in win- not be used for maintaining the rims. If the ter. protective coating is damaged, e.g. by flying WARNING stones, the damaged area should be re- To de-ice the lock cylinders you should only ● Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even paired immediately. use spray with lubricating and anti-corrosive at large spraying distances and short clean- properties. ing times, damage can occur to the tyres. WARNING This may cause an accident. ● Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even ● Water, ice and salt on the brake system can at large spraying distances and short clean- Cleaning chrome parts reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci- ing times, damage can occur to the tyres. dent. Directly after washing, avoid sudden This may cause an accident. 1. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth. and sharp braking. “Dry” the brakes by brak- ● Water, ice and salt on the brake system can ing several times ››› page 123. 2. Polish chrome parts with a soft, dry cloth. reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden If this does not provide satisfying results, use and sharp braking. “Dry” the brakes by brak- a specialist chrome cleaning product. Alloy wheel rims ing several times ››› page 123. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains from the surface. Every two weeks – Wash salt and brake dust from alloy Underbody protection CAUTION wheels. To prevent scratching chrome surfaces: The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it – Use an acid free detergent to clean the from chemical and mechanical damage. ● Never use an abrasive cleaning product on wheel rims. chrome. The protective coating can be damaged when ● Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a Every 3 months driving. We recommend that you check the sandy or dusty environment. protective coating under the body and on the – Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.

152 Care and maintenance running gear, and retouch it if necessary, necessary workshop equipment. For this rea- For the sake of the environment before and after the winter season. son, we recommend having this work performed by them. Fuel, grease and oil deposits can be removed We recommend that you go to your Technical when the engine is washed. The polluted wa- Service to carry out repair work and addition- The anti-corrosion protection is usually re- ter must be cleaned in an oil separator. For al anti-corrosion work. moved if the engine compartment is cleaned this reason, engine washing should be car- with grease removing solutions, or if you ried out only by a specialised workshop or a WARNING have the engine cleaned. On commissioning petrol station. Technical specifications Technical Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion this work, ensure that all surfaces, seams, coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con- joints and components in the engine com- verter or the heat shields on the exhaust sys- partment are given anti-corrosion treatment. Caring for the vehicle interior tem. The heat of the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite. Risk of WARNING Introduction fire. ● When working in the engine compartment, Advice always observe the safety warnings The dye used in many modern garments, for ››› page 163. example dark jeans, is not always sufficiently Cleaning the engine compartment ● Before opening the bonnet, switch the en- colour-fast. Seat upholstery (material and gine off, apply the handbrake firmly and al- leather), especially when light-coloured, may Take special care when cleaning the engine ways remove the key from the ignition. visibly discolour if the dye comes out of compartment. ● Allow the engine to cool before you clean clothing (even when used correctly). This is the engine compartment. not an upholstery defect but indicates that Anti-corrosion treatment ● Do not clean, for example, the vehicle un- the dye in the item of clothing is not suffi- Operation The engine compartment and the surface of derbody, wheel arches or wheel trims without ciently colour-fast. the power unit are given anti-corrosion treat- protecting your hands and arms. You may cut The longer stains or dirt remain on the vehi- ment at the factory. yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. Failure to comply could result in injury. cle surfaces, especially the fabrics covering Good corrosion protection is particularly im- the padded upholstery, the more difficult it ● Moisture, ice and salt on the brake system portant in winter when the vehicle is fre- may affect braking effectiveness. Risk of acci- becomes to clean and maintain them. If quently driven on salted roads. To prevent dent. Directly after washing, avoid sudden stains and dirt are left for a long time, it may the salt corroding the vehicle, the entire en- be that they are impossible to remove.

and sharp braking. Safety gine compartment should be thoroughly ● Never touch the radiator fan. It is tempera- WARNING cleaned before and after winter. ture-controlled and could start automatically, Technical Services have the proper products even when the key is removed from the igni- Car-care products may be toxic and hazard- for cleaning and preservation as well as the tion! ous. Using unsuitable car-care products or, » 153 Advice

using them in the wrong way, may cause acci- ● Stains and dirt containing aggressive sub- CAUTION dents, serious injury, burns or intoxication. stances or solvents attack the material and If you ignore this checklist, which is impor- may damage it irreparably, even when they ● Keep your car-care products in their origi- tant for maintaining your seat upholstery, the are cleaned quickly. nal containers. fabric may be damaged or stained. ● Dirt and stains should not be allowed to dry ● Read the instructions. ● Consult the checklist and carry out the op- and should be cleaned as quickly as possible. ● Never keep car-care products in empty food erations it describes. containers, bottles or other similar contain- ● In the case of stubborn stains, take the ve- ers. Other people may confuse them. hicle to a specialised workshop to avoid damage. Note ● Keep all car-care products out of the reach SEAT recommends you take the vehicle to a of children. specialised workshop to treat any stains on ● Some products may give off harmful va- Treating your upholstery the upholstery caused by the discolouration pours during use. Therefore, they should be of clothing. used outdoors in well-ventilated places. To treat and maintain your seat upholstery, ● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail- keep the following in mind ››› : varnish remover or any other volatile product How to clean the upholstery, trim for washing, maintenance or cleaning. These Before entering the vehicle, close any Velcro ® are toxic and highly flammable. fasteners that might snag on the upholstery fabrics and Alcantara or trim fabric. Any open Velcro fasteners may Cleaning the fabric on heated seats and damage the trim or upholstery fabrics. WARNING electrically adjustable seats or seats with Unsuitable maintenance and cleaning of vehi- To prevent damage, avoid direct contact be- airbag components tween sharp decorative objects and the up- cle components may impair proper operation There may be important airbag components of safety equipment and cause serious injury. holstery and trim fabrics. Decorative objects and electrical connections inside the driver include zips, rivets and rhinestones on cloth- ● Maintain and clean vehicle components ac- seat, passenger seat and possibly the outer ing and belts. cording to the manufacturer's instructions. rear seats. If these seats and seat backrests ● Only use approved or recommended clean- From time to time, clean the dust that gath- are damaged, or are cleaned and are treated ing products. ers in the perforations, folds and seams so incorrectly, or if they get wet, the vehicle that the surfaces of the seats are not dam- electric system may be destroyed and the air- CAUTION aged by its abrasive effect. bag system damaged ››› . ● Cleaning products which contain solvents Make sure clothes are colour-fast to avoid Electric and heated seats contain compo- have a corrosive effect and may damage the them running and staining the upholstery. nents and electrical connections that may be material irreparably. This is especially important if the upholstery damaged if the seats are cleaned or incor- is light in colour. rectly treated ››› . Similarly, damage may be 154 Care and maintenance

® caused at other points in the vehicle's electri- ● Clean Alcantara surfaces with a slightly CAUTION cal system. damp cotton or woollen cloth, or a standard lint-free microfibre cloth ››› . If the upholstery on electrically operated For this reason, bear the following indica- seats or seats with airbag components gets tions in mind for cleaning: If the dirt on the trim and upholstery fabrics soaked, the vehicle's electric system and cer- is only superficial, you can use a standard tain other components may be damaged. ● Do not use high-pressure or steam cleaning foam cleaner. ● If the seat gets soaked, take the vehicle im- equipment or cold aerosols. mediately to a specialised workshop to be Technical specifications Technical ● Do not use cream detergents or detergent- If the upholstery and trim are very dirty, be- dried and for the system components to be based solutions for delicate garments. fore cleaning them we recommend you find inspected. out about the most suitable cleaning options ● ● Do not use steam cleaning equipment as Prevent the fabric from getting wet at all from a professional cleaning company. If nec- times. the dirt becomes more encrusted and fixed in essary, cleaning should be done by a special- the material. ● Only use cleaning products approved by ised firm. SEAT. ● High-pressure cleaning equipment and cold Advice aerosols may damage the upholstery. ● If in doubt, take the vehicle to a professio- Stain removal nal cleaning company. When removing stains, it may be necessary CAUTION to clean the whole surface and not just the Cleaning the fabric on unheated seats, non- stain itself. Especially if the surface has been ● Brushes should only be used to clean the electrically adjustable seats and seats dirtied through normal use. If you only clean mats and floor mat! Other fabrics may be without airbag components the stained area, that part may then look damaged if cleaned with a brush. ● Before using any cleaning products, con- lighter than the rest. If in doubt, take the ve- ● If cream detergents or detergents for deli- sult and keep in mind the instructions of use, hicle to a professional cleaning company. cate garments are applied with a damp cloth Operation or sponge, they may, for example, leave rings indications and warnings on the container. WARNING when dry because of the surfactant compo- ● Use a vacuum cleaner (with the brush at- nents they contain. Generally, such rings are tachment) on the trim and seat fabrics, the If there is a fault in the airbag system, it is very difficult or almost impossible to remove. Alcantara® upholstery of the seats and the likely that the airbag will not deploy correct- carpet. ly, not deploy at all, or do so unexpectedly, which could cause serious or fatal injuries. CAUTION ● Do not use high-pressure or steam cleaning ● ®

● Do not let water soak into Alcantara car- Safety equipment or cold aerosols. Have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. pet under any circumstances. ● For general cleaning, use a soft sponge or ● Do not use leather cleaning products, sol- an ordinary lint-free microfibre cloth ››› . vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers or similar products on Alcantara®. » 155 Advice

● Never use brushes for cleaning damp mate- ● Remove recent ball-point pen and ink ● If the vehicle is left standing in the sun for rial as they could damage the surface. stains, lipstick, shoe cream and similar long periods, the leather should be protected stains as soon as possible. against direct sunlight to prevent it from fad- ● Maintain the colour of the leather. To do ing. Cleaning and maintenance of natural this, use a special cream especially coloured leather upholstery for leather to achieve the same overall colour, Note if necessary. The leather will usually change colour slight- Consult a professional cleaning workshop if ● Afterwards, go over it with a soft cloth. ly with use. you have any doubts on cleaning and maintaining the leather equipment in your vehicle. Cleaning the vehicle SEAT recommends using a slightly damp cot- Cleaning synthetic leather upholstery Maintenance and treatment ton or woollen cloth for general cleaning pur- Nappa natural leather is delicate because it poses. Before cleaning synthetic leather upholstery, has no additional protective layer. bear in mind the following recommendations Generally, the leather should never be ››› page 154, Cleaning the fabric on heated soaked at any point, nor should water pene- ● After cleaning, regularly apply a condition- seats and electrically adjustable seats or trate the seams. er with sun-screen and impregnating action. seats with airbag components These products nourish the leather, soften it Before cleaning the leather upholstery, bear Only use water and neutral cleaning products and make it more breathable, as well as re- in mind the following recommendations to clean synthetic leather upholstery. hydrating it. They also provide it with a pro- ››› page 154, Cleaning the fabric on heated tective film. seats and electrically adjustable seats or CAUTION ● Clean the leather every two or three months seats with airbag components. and remove stains as they appear. Do not use solvents, floor wax, shoe cream, stain removers or similar products on syn- ● CAUTION Treat the leather regularly (about twice a thetic leather. These will stiffen the material, year) with a suitable maintenance product. ● On no account use solvents, wax polish, causing it to crack prematurely. ● Apply as few cleaning and maintenance shoe cream, stain removers or similar materials on leather. products as possible, always using a dry, lint- free cotton or woollen cloth. Do not apply ● If the stain remains on the leather for long, it will soak in and be impossible to remove. Cleaning plastic parts and the cleaning and maintenance products directly instrument panel to the leather. ● In the event of spilt liquids, dry immediately with an absorbent cloth to prevent the liq- – Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic uid penetrating through the leather or seams. parts and the dash panel. 156 Care and maintenance

– If this does not provide satisfactory results, Cleaning the radio and climate of any of the belts is damaged, the belt must use a special solvent-free plastic cleaning controls be replaced by a specialised workshop. product. ● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat To clean the radio and/or climate controls, belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- WARNING use a soft damp cloth. For more resistant dirt, moved or modified in any way. Never clean the dash panel and the airbag a neutral soap solution may be used. module surface with cleaners containing sol-

CAUTION specifications Technical vents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the airbag triggered, plastic parts Seat belts cleaning After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry com- could become detached and cause injuries. pletely before rolling them up. Otherwise, the A dirty belt may not work properly. Check all belt retractors could become damaged. CAUTION seat belts regularly and keep them clean.

Cleaning products which contain solvents will Advice Seat belts cleaning damage the material. – Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll it. Wooden trim cleaning* – Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution. – Clean the wooden trim with a water-mois- tened clean cloth. – Allow it to dry. – Do not roll the seat belt up until it is dry. – If this does not provide satisfactory results, Operation use a gentle soap solution. If large stains form on the belts, the automatic belt retractor will not work correctly. CAUTION Cleaning products which contain solvents will WARNING damage the material. ● Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can impair the strength of

the webbing. Ensure that seat belts do not Safety come into contact with corrosive fluids. ● Check the condition of the seat belts at regular intervals. If you notice that the belt webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle 157 Advice

Checking and refilling levels – Unscrew the cap, turning it anticlockwise. – For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi- Closing the fuel tank cap Fuel cle. The canister could be damaged in an – Screw the tank cap to the right until it accident and leak. “clicks”. ● If, in exceptional circumstances, you have Refuelling to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe – Turn the key in the lock, without releasing the following: the cap, clockwise through 180°. – Never fill the spare fuel canister inside – Remove the key and close the flap until it the vehicle or on it. An electrostatic clicks into place. The tank cap is secured charge could build up during filling, caus- with an anti-loss attachment ing the fuel fumes to ignite. This could cause an explosion. Always place the If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor- canister on the ground to fill it. rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as the – Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of tank is full. Never attempt to fill beyond this the canister as far as possible. point, as this will fill the expansion chamber. – If the spare fuel canister is made of met- Fuel may leak out if ambient conditions are al, the filling nozzle must be in contact Fig. 139 Tank flap open. warm. with the canister during filling. This The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv- helps prevent an electrostatic charge building up. The tank flap is released manually and is lo- en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank cated at the rear of the vehicle on the right. flap. Here you will find further information on – Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the The tank holds approximately 55 litres. For fuel. luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are explosive. Danger of death. all-wheel drive vehicles, the tank capacity is approximately 60 litres. WARNING CAUTION Vehicles using LPG have two fuel tanks: one ● Fuel is highly flammable and can cause se- for LPG and another for petrol ››› page 160. rious burns and other injuries. ● Fuel spills should be removed from the – Never smoke or come into contact with paintwork immediately. Opening the fuel tank cap sparks when filling the fuel tank of the ● Never run the tank completely dry. Irregular vehicle or a spare fuel canister with fuel. fuel supply can cause misfiring. As a result, – Lift the lid. This is an explosion hazard. unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic convert- – Hold the cap firmly with one hand, then in- – Follow legal requirements for the use of er and cause damage. sert the key into the lock and rotate 180° to spare fuel canisters. the left. 158 Checking and refilling levels

● When filling the fuel tank after having run it ever, this has no advantage in terms of fuel fuel system clean and prevent deposits from completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel en- consumption and engine power. building up in the engine. gine the ignition must be switched on for at If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi- CAUTION least 30 seconds before starting the engine. tives is not available or engine problems Subsequently, when you start the engine it ● Petrol with standard EN 228 may be mixed arise, the necessary additives must be added may take longer than normal to start firing with small quantities of ethanol. However, when refuelling. (up to one minute). This is due to the fact that the so-called “bioethanol fuels” available at the fuel system has to purge itself of air be- commercial establishments with reference Not all petrol additives have been shown to specifications Technical fore starting. E50 or E85, which contain a high percentage be effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad- of ethanol, may not be used, as they will ditives may cause significant damage to the For the sake of the environment damage the fuel system. engine and the catalytic converter. Metal additives should never be used. Metal additives Do not try to put in more fuel after the auto- ● Even one tankful of leaded fuel would per- may also be contained in petrol additives for matic filler nozzle has switched off; this may manently impair the efficiency of the catalyt- Advice cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm. ic converter. improving anti-detonation ratings or octane ● High engine speed and full throttle can ratings. damage the engine when using petrol with an SEAT recommends “genuine Volkswagen octane rating lower than the correct grade for Group fuel additives for petrol engines”. Petrol the engine. These additives can be bought at SEAT Au- thorised Services, where information on how Petrol types For the sake of the environment to use them can also be obtained.

The recommended fuel types are listed on a Just one full tank of leaded fuel would seriously impair the efficiency of the catalytic CAUTION Operation sticker inside the fuel tank flap. converter. Do not refuel if the filler indicates that the Only unleaded petrol conforming to standard fuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacement DIN EN 228 may be used for vehicles with petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of catalytic converters (EN = “European Stand- Petrol additives metal additives. Using them may damage the ard”). engine! Petrol types are categorised according to The quality of the fuel influences the behav- their octane number, e.g. 91, 95, 98 RON iour, power and service life of the engine. Safety (RON = “research octane number”). You may This is why the petrol you use should carry use petrol with a higher octane number than suitable additives already included by the the one recommended for your engine. How- petrol industry, free of metals. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the 159 Advice

Diesel Winter operation LPG system (Liquefied petroleum gas)* Diesel* Winter-grade diesel When using “summer-grade diesel fuel”, dif- Refuelling with LPG Diesel fuel must conform to DIN EN 590 (EN = ficulties may be experienced at temperatures “European Standard”). It must have a cetane below 0 °C (+32 °F) because the fuel thickens 3 Applies to the model: ALTEA / ALTEA XL number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane num- due to wax separation. For this reason, “win- ber indicates the ignition quality of the diesel ter-grade diesel fuel” is available in some fuel. countries during the cold months. It can be used at temperatures as low as -22 °C (-8 °F). Notes on refuelling ››› page 158. In countries with different climatic conditions the diesel fuel generally sold has different Biodiesel* temperature characteristics. Check with the Technical Services or filling stations in the country concerned regarding the type of die- CAUTION sel fuels available. ● Your vehicle is not designed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any circumstances re- Filter pre-heater fuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuel could damage the engine and the fuel sys- Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter glow tem. The addition of biodiesel to diesel fuel plug system, making it well equipped for op- by the diesel manufacturer in accordance eration in winter. This ensures that the fuel with standard EN 590 or DIN 51628 is author- system remains operational to approx. -24 °C ised and will not cause damage to the engine (-11 °F), provided you use winter-grade diesel or the fuel system. which is safe to -15 °C (+5 °F). ● The diesel engine has been designed to be However, if the fuel has waxed to such an ex- used exclusively with diesel fuel conforming tent that the engine will not start at tempera- to standard EN 590. Never refuel or use petrol, kerosene, fuel oil or any other type of tures of under -24 °C (-11 °F), simply leave the vehicle in a heated area for a while. fuel. If you accidentally fill up the vehicle Fig. 140 Fuel tank open with LPG filler neck with the wrong type of fuel, do not start the and adapter engine. Seek assistance from specialised per- CAUTION sonnel. The composition of these fuels may Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called “thin- severely damage the fuel system and the en- ners”, or similar additives with diesel fuel. gine. 160 Checking and refilling levels

● Refuel as indicated in the pump instruc- ● If the outside temperature is very high, the tions. protection against overheating for the LPG ● The fuel tank will be full when the pump pump may disconnect automatically. compressor automatically cuts the supply. ● If the outside temperature is very high, the ● If you wish to finish refuelling sooner, re- pressure of the LPG tank may be equal to or lease the button on the pump to stop the greater than that of the gas tank of the LPG pump. In this case, refuelling will be physi-

flow. specifications Technical cally impossible. Closing the fuel tank cap ● The filling nozzles of LPG pumps can differ in the way they are operated. If you do not ● Fig. 141 LPG tank in spare wheel well Unscrew the adapter from the gas filler know, ask a qualified employee at the petrol neck 2 . station to do the refuelling. Before refuelling, turn off the engine and ● Screw the cap onto the gas filler neck 1 . ● Noises heard when refuelling are normal Advice switch off the ignition and mobile telephone ● Close the fuel tank flap. The cover should and do not indicate the presence of a fault in the system. ››› . be flush with the bodywork. Read carefully the instructions on how to use the LPG pump. WARNING Incorrect handling of LPG can cause explo- Opening the fuel tank cap sions, fire, serious burns and other injuries. The LPG filler neck is behind the fuel cap, ● LPG is a highly explosive and inflammable next to the petrol filler neck. substance. Operation ● Small quantities of LPG may leak out after ● The tank flap is located on the rear right- refuelling. If LPG comes into contact with the hand side of the vehicle. skin there is a risk of freezing. ● Open the fuel tank flap. Note Refuelling ● The vehicle includes one adapter for the ● Remove the plug from the gas filler mouth country in question, the most common one. Safety ››› Fig. 140 1 . We generally recommend that you carry all ● Screw the required adapter 2 onto the the adapters in your vehicle, as some coun- LPG gas filler neck. tries use more than one type of filling system.

161 Advice

Adapter for the pling 2 , the bayonet 3 or the EURO adapt- Fixed adapter er 4 . 3 Applies to the market: Spanish The filler systems and corresponding adapters vary according to country. As petrol stations abroad do not always have the necessary adapters for your LPG system, we recommend you purchase the appropriate adapter before travelling abroad. Check that the adapters are suited to your filling system.

Note The four most common types of adapter in Eu- rope are the ACME adapter 1 , the Dish Cou- pling adapter 2 , the bayonet adapter 3 and the EURO adapter 4 . We generally recommend that you carry all four adapters in your Fig. 143 Fuel tank flap open with EURO-type vehicle, as some countries use more than one connector. type of filling system. The introduction of a single system (Euronozzle) throughout Eu- The end of the filling tube has a EURO-type rope is being studied. connector so that you can refill LPG without Fig. 142 General table of LPG filler neck having to use an additional adapter adapters ››› Fig. 143.

An adapter is required due to the existence of a range of pumps with different nozzles. LPG fuel

1 ACME adapter (adapter for Europe) LPG is an alternative vehicle fuel and is a 2 Dish Coupling Adapter (adapter for Italy) blend of propane and butane. 3 Bayonet adapter The success of LPG is due to the strict regula- 4 EURO adapter (adapter for Spain) tions concerning exhaust gas emissions. Compared to other fossil fuels, LPG is charac- The supply includes the adapter for the coun- terised by its reduced emissions. try in question, the ACME 1 , the Dish Cou- 162 Checking and refilling levels

LPG quality and consumption ● A solenoid type main valve disconnects the ● When parking the vehicle in a closed area Quality requirements for LPG are regulated supply of gas to the engine compartment (e.g. in a garage), make sure that there is ad- for all Europe in DIN EN 589 and permit the when the engine is switched off or running equate ventilation, either natural or mechani- use of LPG throughout Europe. on petrol. cal, to neutralise the LPG in the event of a ● A safety valve in the LPG tank with pipes to leak. A difference is drawn between winter gas and the outside prevents the gas from entering summer gas. Winter gas has a higher propor- the vehicle interior. Note tion of propane gas. As a result, the driving specifications Technical range of winter gas may be lower (due to in- ● All anchorage points and materials have For any fault in the LPG system, please refer creased consumption) than that of summer been designed to ensure the maximum pos- to the SEAT web page, which lists the work- gas. sible levels of safety. shops authorised to repair these faults. The condition of the LPG system should be LPG supplier network checked regularly to guarantee safe driving Advice The number of LPG pumps is constantly in- conditions ››› . These checks are included Working in the engine creasing. in the Maintenance Programme. compartment Lists of existing LPG pumps may be found on WARNING Internet. Safety instructions on working in the ● If there is a smell of gas or a suspected engine compartment leak, stop the vehicle immediately and switch off the ignition. Open the doors to ventilate LPG safety Before starting any work on the engine or in the vehicle. Do not carry on driving! Take the the engine compartment:

vehicle to a specialised workshop and have Operation A series of collision tests performed on this the fault repaired. vehicle while running with LPG have con- 1. Switch off the engine and remove the key firmed its high level of safety. ● Immediately extinguish any cigarettes and from the ignition. remove from the vehicle any objects which 2. Apply the handbrake. The safety of the LPG system guarantees op- might produce a spark or cause a fire, and eration without risk. The following safety switch off immediately if gas is smelt or a 3. Move the gear lever to neutral or the selec- measures have been adopted: leak is detected. tor lever to position P. ● LPG tanks are subject to pressure and must

● 4. Wait for the engine to cool down. Safety The LPG tank has a solenoid valve which be checked regularly. The owner of the vehi- closes automatically when the engine is cle must check that these services are per- 5. Keep children away from the vehicle. switched off (ignition off) or when running on formed correctly. petrol. 6. Raise the bonnet ››› page 165. »

163 Advice

You should not do any work in the engine ● Never touch hot engine parts. There is a belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and from compartment unless you know exactly how to risk of burns. the high-voltage ignition system. You should carry out the jobs and have the correct tools! ● Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a also observe the following: Have the work carried out by a specialised hot exhaust gas system. This is a fire hazard. – Never touch the electrical wiring of the workshop if you are uncertain. ● Avoid causing short-circuits in the electri- ignition system. All service fluids and consumables, e.g. cool- cal system, particularly at the points where – Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing and ant, engine oil, spark plugs and batteries, the jump leads are attached ››› page 190. The long hair do not get trapped in rotating are under constant development. SEAT pro- battery could explode. engine parts. Danger of death. Before vides a constant flow of information to Tech- ● Never touch the radiator fan. It is tempera- starting any work remove jewellery, tie nical Services concerning modifications. For ture controlled and could start automatically, back and cover hair, and wear tight-fit- this reason, we recommend you have service even when the engine has been switched off ting clothes. fluids and consumables replaced by a Techni- and the key removed from the ignition! – Never accelerate with a gear engaged cal Service. Please observe the relevant in- ● Never cover the engine with additional in- without taking the necessary precau- structions ››› page 147. The engine compart- sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of tions. The vehicle could move, even if the ment of the vehicle is a hazardous area. fire! handbrake is applied. Danger of death. ››› . ● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant ex- ● If work has to be carried out on the fuel pansion tank when the engine is hot. If the system or on electrical components, you WARNING coolant is hot, the cooling system will be must observe the following safety notes in addition to the above warnings: All work on the engine or in the engine com- pressurised! partment, e.g. checking and refilling fluids, ● Protect face, hands and arms by covering – Always disconnect the battery from the involves the danger of injury and burns, acci- the cap with a large, thick cloth to protect on-board network. The vehicle must be dents and even fire. against escaping coolant and steam. unlocked when this is done, otherwise the alarm will be triggered. ● Never open the bonnet if you see steam, ● Always make sure you have not left any ob- smoke or coolant escaping from the engine jects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in the – Do not smoke. compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine compartment. – Never work near naked flames. sustaining burns. Wait until no more steam or ● If you have to work underneath the vehicle, – Always have a fire extinguisher on hand. coolant is emitted, then allow the engine to you must use suitable stands additionally to cool before carefully opening the bonnet. support the vehicle, there is a risk of acci- CAUTION ● Switch off the engine and remove the key dent!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for se- from the ignition. curing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury. When topping up service fluids, make sure ● Apply the handbrake and move the gear ● If any work has to be performed when the not to mistake them. Using the wrong fluids lever to neutral or selector lever to position P. engine is started or with the engine running, could cause serious malfunctions and engine damage! ● Keep children away from the vehicle. there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the rotating parts, such as the drive 164 Checking and refilling levels

For the sake of the environment ● Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet, then carefully Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi- open the bonnet. ronment. For this reason you should make regular checks on the ground underneath ● When working in the engine compartment, your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other always observe the safety warnings fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a speci- ››› page 163. alised workshop. Technical specifications Technical

Closing the bonnet Opening the bonnet Fig. 145 Handle for releasing the bonnet. – Slightly lift the bonnet.

The bonnet is released from inside the vehi- – Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its Advice cle. support. Before opening the bonnet ensure that the – At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fall windscreen wipers are in rest position. so it locks. – To release the bonnet, pull the lever under If the bonnet does not close, do not press the dash panel ››› Fig. 144 in the direction downwards. Open it once more and let it fall indicated (arrow). The bonnet will be re- as before. leased by a spring action ››› . WARNING Fig. 144 Detail of footwell area on driver side: – Lift the bonnet using the release lever (ar- Operation lever for unlocking the bonnet row) and open the bonnet. If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving and completely – Release the bonnet stay and secure it in obscure your view of the road. Risk of acci- the fixture designed for this in the bonnet. dent. ● After closing the bonnet, always check that WARNING it is properly secured. The bonnet must be Hot coolant can scald! flush with the surrounding body panels. Safety ● Never open the bonnet if you see steam, ● If you notice that the bonnet latch is not se- smoke or coolant escaping from the engine cured when the vehicle is moving, stop the compartment. vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. Risk of accident.

165 Advice

Checking fluid levels Overview Service intervals You will find further explanations, instruc- Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife tions and restrictions on the technical speci- service) or fixed (dependent on time/dis- fications as of ››› page 207. tance travelled). If the PR code that appears on the back of the Maintenance Programme booklet is PR QI6, Engine oil this means that your vehicle is programmed with the LongLife service. If it lists the codes General notes QI1, QI2, QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service is dependent on time/distance travelled. Fig. 146 Diagram for the location of the vari- The engine comes with a special, multi-grade ous elements. oil that can be used all year round. Flexible service intervals (LongLife service intervals*) From time to time, the levels of the different Because the use of high-quality oil is essen- fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never tial for the correct operation of the engine Special oils and processes have been devel- fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious and its long useful life, when topping up or oped which, depending on characteristics damage to the engine may be caused. changing oil, use only those oils that comply and individual driving profiles, allow for with VW standards. greater intervals between oil change services 1 Coolant expansion tank (LongLife service intervals). The specifications (VW standards) set out on 2 Windscreen washer reservoir the following page should appear on the con- Because this oil is essential for extending the 3 Engine oil filler cap tainer of the service oil; when the container service intervals, it must only be used observing the following indications: 4 Engine oil dipstick displays the specific standards for petrol and diesel engines together, it means that the oil 5 Brake fluid reservoir ● Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service in- can be used for both types of engines. 6 Vehicle battery (underneath the cover) tervals. We recommend that the oil change indicated ● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the The checking and refilling of service fluids in the Maintenance Programme be performed engine oil level is too low ››› page 167 and are carried out on the components men- by a technical service or a specialised work- LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to tioned above. These operations are descri- shop. top up (once) with oil for fixed service inter- bed in the ››› page 163. The correct oil specifications for your engine vals ››› page 167 (up to a maximum of 0.5 li- are listed in the ››› page 167, Oil properties. tres).

166 Checking and refilling levels

Fixed service intervals* you cannot obtain the oil specified for your Note vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil If your vehicle does not have the “LongLife Before a long trip, we recommend finding an service interval” or it has been disabled (by (once) conforming to the VW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or engine oil that conforms to the correspond- request), you may use oils for fixed service ing VW specifications and recommend keep- ACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l). intervals, which also appear in ››› page 167, ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en- Oil properties. In this case, your vehicle must gine oil will always be available for a top-up if be serviced after a fixed interval of 1 needed. year/15 000 km (10 000 miles)(whatever Oil properties specifications Technical comes first) ››› Booklet Maintenance Pro- gramme. Engine type Specification Checking the engine oil level ● In exceptional circumstances, if the engine Petrol without flexible VW 502 00/VW 504 00 oil level is too low ››› page 167 and you can- service interval not obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, Advice Petrol with flexible serv- VW 504 00 you can put in a small quantity of oil con- ice interval (LongLife) forming to the specification ACEA A2 or ACEA A3 (petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or Diesel. Engines without VW 505 01/VW 506 01/VW ACEA B4 (diesel engines) (up to 0.5 l). Particulate filter (DPF) 507 00 Diesel. Particulate Filter VW 507 00 Vehicles with a diesel particulate filter* Engines (DPF). With or without flexible The Maintenance Programme states whether service interval (with your vehicle is fitted with a diesel particulate a) Operation and without LongLife) Fig. 147 Engine oil dipstick. filter. a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash engine. The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of formation, may be used in diesel engines the oil. equipped with particulate filter. Using other Engine oil additives types of oil will cause a higher soot concen- Checking oil level No type of additive should be mixed with the tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There- engine oil. The deterioration caused by these – Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. fore: Safety additives is not covered by the warranty. – Briefly run the engine at idle speed until ● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils. the operating temperature is reached and ● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the then stop. engine oil level is too low ››› page 167 and – Wait for about two minutes. » 167 Advice

– Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with ● When working in the engine compartment, – Top-up oil in small amounts, using the cor- a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it always observe the safety warnings rect oil. in as far as it will go. ››› page 163. – To avoid over-filling with engine oil, you – Then pull it out once more and check the oil should top-up using small quantities, wait level ››› Fig. 147. Top up with engine oil if CAUTION a while and check the oil level before add- necessary. ing any more oil. If the oil level is above the area A do not start the engine. This could result in damage Oil level in area A – As soon as the oil level is in area B , care- to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact fully close the cap. – Do not add oil ››› . a Technical Service. The position of the oil filler opening is shown Oil level in area B in the corresponding engine compartment il- – You can add oil, but keep the level in Topping up engine oil  lustration ››› page 166. this zone. Engine oil specification ››› page 166.

Oil level in area C WARNING – Oil must be added. Afterwards, the oil Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil level should be in the lined area B . comes into contact with hot engine components when topping up. Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the vehicle is used, oil consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil CAUTION consumption is likely to be higher for the first If the oil level is above the area A do not 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level start the engine. This could result in damage must be checked at regular intervals, prefera- Fig. 148 In the engine compartment: Engine to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact bly when filling the tank and before a jour- oil filler cap a specialised workshop. ney. Before opening the bonnet, read and observe For the sake of the environment WARNING the warnings ››› in Safety instructions on The oil level must never be above area A . Any work carried out in the engine compart- working in the engine compartment on Otherwise oil can be drawn in through the ment or on the engine must be carried out page 163. crankcase breather and escape into the at- cautiously. – Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening mosphere via the exhaust system. ››› Fig. 148.

168 Checking and refilling levels

Changing engine oil CAUTION scaling and considerably raises the boiling point of the coolant. The engine oil must be changed at the inter- No additives should be used with engine oil. To protect the engine cooling system, the vals given in the service schedule. This could result in engine damage. Any damage caused by the use of such additives percentage of additive must always be at We recommend that you have the engine oil would not be covered by the factory warranty. least 40 %, even in warm climates where an- changed by a Technical Service. ti-freeze protection is not required.

The oil change intervals are shown in the For the sake of the environment If greater frost protection is required in very specifications Technical Maintenance Programme. ● Because of disposal problems and the spe- cold climates, the proportion of additive can cial tools and specialist knowledge required, be increased. However, the percentage of ad- WARNING we recommend that you have the engine oil ditive should not exceed 60%, as this would Only change the engine oil yourself if you and filter changed by a Technical Service. reduce frost protection and, in turn, decrease have the specialist knowledge required! ● Never pour oil down drains or into the cooling capacity. Advice ● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- ground. When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture serve the warnings ››› page 163, Safety in- ● Use a suitable container when draining the of distilled water and, at least, 40 % of the G structions on working in the engine compart- used oil. It must be large enough to hold all 13 or G 12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive ment. the engine oil. (both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti- ● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil corrosion protection ››› . The mixture of G may cause burn injuries. 13 with G 12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G 12 (red) or ● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such Cooling system G 11 (green-blue) engine coolants will signifi- as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil. cantly reduce the anticorrosion protection

and should, therefore be avoided ››› . Operation ● When removing the oil drain plug with your Engine coolant specifications fingers, keep your arm horizontal to help pre- WARNING vent oil from running down your arm. The engine cooling system is supplied from ● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into the factory with a specially treated mixture of If there is not enough anti-freeze in the cool- contact with engine oil. water and, at least, 40 % of the additive G 13 ant system, the engine may fail leading to se- ● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be (TLVW 774 J). The engine coolant additive is rious damage. stored in a safe place out of the reach of chil- recognisable by its purple colour. This mix- ● Please make sure that the percentage of additive is correct with respect to the lowest dren. ture of water and additive gives the necessa- Safety ry frost protection down to -25°C (-13 F) and expected ambient temperature in the zone protects the light alloy parts of the cooling where the vehicle is to be used. system against corrosion. It also prevents ● When the outside temperature is very low, the coolant could freeze and the vehicle » 169 Advice

would be immobilised. In this case, the heat- Checking the coolant level and – If the level is below the “MIN” mark, top up ing would not work either and inadequately topping up with coolant. dressed passengers could die of cold. Topping up coolant CAUTION – Only use new coolant liquid. The original additives should never be mixed – Do not fill above the “MAX” mark. with coolants which are not approved by SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causing Closing the coolant expansion tank severe damage to the engine and the engine cooling system. – Screw the cap on again tightly. ● If the fluid in the expansion tank is not pur- The position of the coolant expansion reser- ple but is, for example, brown, this indicates voir is shown in the corresponding engine that the G 13 additive has been mixed with compartment illustration ››› page 166. an inadequate coolant. The coolant must be Fig. 149 Engine compartment: coolant expan- changed as soon as possible if this is the sion tank cap. Make sure that the coolant meets the re- case! This could result in serious faults and quired specifications ››› page 169. Do not use engine damage. Top up coolant when the level is below the a different type of additive if additive G12+ is MIN (minimum) mark. not available. In this case use only water and For the sake of the environment Before opening the bonnet, read and observe bring the coolant concentration back up to the warnings ››› in Safety instructions on the correct level as soon as possible by put- Coolants and additives can contaminate the ting in the specified additive ››› page 169. environment. If any fluids are spilled, they working in the engine compartment on should be collected and correctly disposed page 163. Always top up with new coolant. of, with respect to the environment. Do not fill above the “MAX” mark. Otherwise Opening the coolant expansion tank the excess coolant will be forced out of the – Switch off the engine and allow it to cool. cooling system when the engine is hot. – To prevent scalding, cover the cap on the The coolant additive G12+ (dyed purple) may coolant expansion tank with a thick cloth be mixed with G12 (dyed red) and also with G and carefully unscrew the cap ››› . 11.

Checking coolant level – Look into the open coolant expansion tank and read off the coolant level. 170 Checking and refilling levels

WARNING Windscreen washer reservoir WARNING Any work carried out in the engine compart- Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out Topping up washer fluid  ment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously. cautiously. ● When working in the engine compartment, ● When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings always observe the safety warnings page 163. page 163. ››› ››› specifications Technical ● When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised! Do not unscrew CAUTION the cap on the coolant expansion tank when the engine is hot. This is a burn injury risk. ● Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen washer fluid. ●

Always use approved windscreen cleansing Advice CAUTION products diluted as per instructions. If you ● When mixed with other additives the colour use other washer fluids or soap solutions, Fig. 150 In the engine compartment: Cap of of G12 will change to brown. If this occurs the tiny holes in the fan-shaped nozzles windscreen washer fluid reservoir you should have the coolant changed imme- could become blocked. diately. Failure to do so will result in engine The windscreen washer and the headlight damage! washers are supplied with fluid from the ● If a lot of coolant fluid has been lost, wait windscreen washer fluid container in the en- for the engine to cool. This avoids damaging gine compartment. The container holds ap- the engine. Large coolant losses are an indi- prox. 3 litres; in vehicles with headlight Operation cation of leaks in the cooling system. See a specialised workshop immediately and have washers* it holds approx. 5.5 litres. the cooling system checked. Otherwise, there The reservoir is located on the right-hand is a risk of engine damage. side of the engine compartment. Plain water is not enough to clean the windscreen and headlights. We recommend that you always add a product to the windscreen washer fluid. Approved windscreen cleaning Safety products exist on the market with high detergent and anti-freeze properties, these may be added all-year-round. Please follow the dilu- tion instructions on the packaging. 171 Advice

Brake fluid WARNING brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT Before opening the bonnet to check the brake 4. Checking the brake fluid level fluid level, read and observe the warnings ››› page 163. Using any other kind of brake fluid or one that is not of a high quality may affect operation of the brake system and reduce its effec- Changing the brake fluid tiveness. Never use a brake fluid if the container does not state that it complies with VW The Maintenance Programme indicates brake 501 14, DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or fluid change intervals. USA standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.

We recommend that you have the brake fluid WARNING changed by a Technical Service. Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid im- Before opening the bonnet, please read and pairs the braking effect. Fig. 151 Engine compartment: brake fluid follow the warnings ››› in Safety instruc- ● Before opening the bonnet to check the reservoir cap tions on working in the engine compartment brake fluid level, read and observe the warn- on page 163 in section “Safety notes for ings ››› page 163. – Read off the fluid level at the transparent working in the engine compartment”. ● Brake fluid should be stored in the closed brake fluid reservoir. It should always be original container in a safe place out of reach between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks. In the course of time, brake fluid becomes hygroscopic and absorbs water from the am- of children. There is a toxic risk. The position of the brake fluid reservoir is bient air. If the water content in the brake flu- ● Perform the brake fluid change according to shown in the corresponding engine compart- id is too high, the brake system could cor- the Maintenance Programme. Heavy use of ment illustration ››› page 166. The brake fluid rode. This also considerably reduces the boil- the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the reservoir has a black and yellow cap. ing point of the brake fluid. Heavy use of the brake fluid is left in the brake system for too brakes may then cause a vapour lock which long. This would seriously affect the effec- The brake fluid level drops slightly when the could impair the braking effect. tiveness of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle is being used as the brake pads are vehicle. This may cause an accident. automatically adjusted as they wear. Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid. Only use brake fluid that expressly meets the However, if the level goes down noticeably in CAUTION VW 501 14 standard. a short time, or drops below the “MIN” mark, Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork. there may be a leak in the brake system. A You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluid Wipe off any brake fluid from the paintwork display on the instrument panel will warn you at a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official Serv- immediately. if the brake fluid level is too low ››› page 35. ice. If none is available, use only high-quality 172 Checking and refilling levels

For the sake of the environment ● Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear ● Switch off all electrical devices before re- protective gloves and eye protection. Do not connecting the battery. Reconnect first the The brake pads and brake fluid must be col- tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through positive cable and then the negative cable. lected and disposed of according the applica- the vents. Rinse battery acid from eyes imme- Never reverse the polarity of the connections. ble regulations. The SEAT Technical Service diately for several minutes with clear water. This could cause an electrical fire. network has the necessary equipment and Then seek medical care immediately. Neutral- qualified personnel for collecting and dispos- ● Never charge a frozen battery, or one which ise any acid splashes on the skin or clothing ing of this waste material. has thawed. This could result in explosions with a soapy solution, and rinse off with plen- and chemical burns. Always replace a battery specifications Technical ty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, which has frozen. A flat battery can also consult a doctor immediately. freeze at temperatures close to 0 °C (+32 °F). Vehicle battery ● Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are ● Ensure that the vent hose is always connec- prohibited. When handling cables and electri- ted to the battery. cal equipment, avoid causing sparks and Warnings on handling the battery ● Never use a defective battery. This could electrostatic charge. Never short the battery Advice terminals. High-energy sparks can cause in- cause an explosion. Replace a damaged bat-  Wear eye protection jury. tery immediately. ●  Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro- A highly explosive mixture of gases is re- tective gloves and eye protection! leased when the battery is under charge. The CAUTION batteries should be charged in a well-ventila- ● Never disconnect the battery if the ignition  Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are ted room only. is switched on or if the engine is running. prohibited! ● Keep children away from acid and batteries. This could damage the electrical system or  A highly explosive mixture of gases is released ● Before working on the electrical system, electronic components. when the battery is under charge. you must switch off the engine, the ignition ● Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight Operation and all electrical devices. The negative cable over a long period of time, as the intense ul- Keep children away from acid and batteries!  on the battery must be disconnected. When a traviolet radiation can damage the battery light bulb is changed, you need only switch housing. WARNING off the light. ● If the vehicle is left standing in cold condi- Always be aware of the danger of injury and ● Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlock- tions for a long period, protect the battery chemical burns as well as the risk of accident ing the vehicle before you disconnect the bat- from “freezing”. If it freezes it will be dam- or fire when working on the battery and the tery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered. aged. Safety electrical system: ● When disconnecting the battery from the ● Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, vehicle on-board network, disconnect first skin and clothing from acid and particles con- the negative cable and then the positive ca- taining lead. ble.

173 Advice

Checking the electrolyte level Charging and changing the vehicle WARNING battery The electrolyte level should be checked regu- ● We recommend you use only maintenance- larly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun- free or cycle free leak-proof batteries which The battery is maintenance-free and is comply with standards T 825 06 and tries and in older batteries. checked during the inspection service. All VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of – Open the bonnet and open the battery cov- work on the vehicle battery requires special- 2001. ist knowledge. er at the front ››› in Safety instructions ● Before starting any work on the batteries, on working in the engine compartment on If you often drive short distances or if the ve- you must read and observe the warnings page 164 ››› in Warnings on handling hicle is not driven for long periods, the bat- ››› in Warnings on handling the battery on the battery on page 173. tery should be checked by a specialised page 173. – Check the colour display in the "magic eye" workshop between the scheduled services. on the top of the battery. If the battery has discharged and you have For the sake of the environment – If there are air bubbles in the window, tap problems starting the vehicle, the battery Batteries contain toxic substances such as the window gently until they disperse. might be damaged. If this happens, we rec- sulphuric acid and lead. They must be dis- ommend you have the vehicle battery posed of appropriately and must not be dis- The position of the battery is shown in the checked by a Technical Service where it will posed of with ordinary household waste. corresponding engine compartment diagram be re-charged or replaced. ››› page 166. Charging the battery The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top of the battery changes colour, depending on The vehicle battery should be charged by a the charge state and electrolyte level of the specialised workshop only, as batteries us- battery. ing special technology have been installed and they must be charged in a controlled en- There are two different colours: vironment. ● Black: correct charge status. Replacing a vehicle battery ● Transparent/clear yellow: the battery must be replaced. Contact a specialised workshop. The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has special safety features. Genuine SEAT batteries meet the maintenance, performance and safety specifications of your vehicle. 174 Wheels Wheels Concealed damage 1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily from the sticker. The values refer to Sum- mer tyres. For winter tyres, you must add Wheels and tyres visible. If you notice unusual vibrations or the vehicle pulling to one side, this may indicate 0.2 bar (2.9 psi / 20 kPa) to the values that one of the tyres is damaged. They given for summer tyres. General notes should be checked immediately by a Techni- 2. The tyre pressures should only be checked cal Service. when the tyres are cold. The slightly raised Avoiding damage specifications Technical pressures of warm tyres must not be re- – If you have to drive over a kerb or similar Tyres with directional tread pattern duced. obstacle, drive very slowly and at a right An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di- angle. 3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you rection of rotation on tyres with directional are carrying. – Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres. tread. Always observe the direction of rota-

tion indicated when fitting the wheel. This Tyre pressure Advice – Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters, etc.). Remove any guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid The correct tyre pressure is especially impor- foreign objects embedded in the treads. aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear. tant at high speeds. The pressure should therefore be checked at least once a month WARNING Storing tyres and before starting a journey. ● New tyres do not have maximum grip dur- – When you remove the tyres, mark them in The sticker with the tyre pressure values can ing the first 500 km (300 miles). Drive partic- be found on the inside of the fuel tank flap. order to maintain the same direction of ro- ularly carefully to avoid possible accidents. tation when they are installed again. The tyre pressure values given are for cold ● Never drive with damaged tyres. This may tyres. Do not reduce the slightly raised pres- Operation – When removed, the wheels and/or tyres cause an accident. sures of warm tyres ››› . should be stored in a cool, dry and prefera- ● If you notice unusual vibrations or if the ve- bly dark location. hicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the WARNING – Store tyres in a vertical position if they are vehicle immediately and check the tyres for damage. ● Check the tyre pressure at least once per not fitted on wheel rims. month. Checking the tyre pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too New tyres low, there is an increased danger of accidents Safety New tyres must be run in ››› page 130. Checking tyre pressure - particularly at high speeds. The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac- ● A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the low, causing an accident! » cording to the type and make of tyre and the sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap. tread pattern. 175 Advice

● At continuously high speeds, a tyre with in- messages in the instrument panel display. Significant tyre pressure loss sufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it The system operates via the ESC ››› page 134. The tyre symbol  is displayed and indicates becomes too hot, and this can cause tread Note that tyre pressure also depends on tyre that the tyre pressure of at least one tyre is separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe temperature. Said pressure increases around the recommended tyre pressures. insufficient. 0.1 bar (2.9 psi/10 kPa) for each +10 °C ● If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, (+50 °F) in tyre temperature increase. The tyre – Stop the vehicle. the tyres will wear prematurely and the vehi- heats up while the vehicle is being driven – Switch the ignition off. cle will not handle well. Risk of accident! and the tyre pressure will rise accordingly. Therefore, you should only adjust the tyre – Check the tyre(s). For the sake of the environment pressure when they are cold (i.e. approxi- – Change the wheel if necessary. Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- mately at ambient temperature). sumption. To ensure that the tyre pressure monitoring system works reliably, you should check and, if necessary, adjust the tyre pressures at reg- Tyre pressure monitoring ular intervals and store the correct pressures (reference values) in the system. The tyre pressure monitoring system con- A tyre pressure information label is attached stantly checks the pressure of the tyres. to the inside of the fuel tank flap. The system uses the speed sensors of the ABS wheels. It operates by analysing the WARNING speed and frequency spectrum of each ● Never adjust tyre pressure when the tyres wheel. are hot. This may damage or even burst the For optimum performance, use genuine SEAT tyres. Risk of accident! tyres. In addition, check and adjust tyre pres- ● An insufficiently inflated tyre flexes a lot sures regularly. more at high speeds and causes significant heating of the tyre. Under these conditions, Whenever the tyre pressure is are changed or the tyre bead may be released or the tyre may one or more tyres are changed, the system burst. Risk of accident! should be reset by pressing the SET button on the centre console. For the sake of the environment The system warns the driver in the event of a Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel loss of pressure by means of symbols and consumption and tyre wear. 176 Wheels

Tyre useful life pending on the make, there will be 6 to 8 of Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as them evenly spaced around the tyre. Mark- they otherwise cause excessive wear on ings on the tyre sidewall (for instance the let- steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must ters “TWI” or other symbols) indicate the po- also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted. sitions of the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by law is 1.6 mm Incorrect wheel alignment (measured in the tread grooves next to the Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tread wear indicators). Worn tyres must be re- specifications Technical tyre wear, impairing the safety of the vehicle. placed. Different figures may apply in export If tyres show excessive wear, you should countries . ››› have the wheel alignment checked by a Tech- nical Service. Tyre pressure Fig. 152 Tyre tread wear indicators. Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature WARNING Advice wear and could cause tyre blow-out. For this There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre reason, the tyre pressure should be checked bursts during driving! at least once per month ››› page 175. ● The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread wear indicators are worn Driving style ››› page 177. Failure to follow this instruction Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard could result in an accident. Worn tyres do not braking all increase tyre wear. grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater risk of “aquaplaning”.

Changing wheels around ● At continuously high speeds, a tyre with in- Operation sufficient pressure flexes more. This causes it If the front tyres are worn considerably more to overheat. This can cause tread separation than the rear ones it is advisable to change Fig. 153 Diagram for changing wheels and tyre blow-out. Risk of accident. Always them around as shown ››› Fig. 153. The use- observe the recommended tyre pressures. ful life of all the tyres will then be about the The useful life of tyres is dependent on tyre ● If tyres show excessive wear, you should pressure, driving style and fitting. same time. have the running gear checked by a Technical Service. Wheel balance Safety Wear indicators ● Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake The original tyres on your vehicle have The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. fluid away from tyres. 1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators” However, various factors encountered in nor- ● Damaged wheels and tyres must be re- ››› Fig. 152, running across the tread. De- mal driving can cause them to become unbal- placed immediately! » anced, which results in steering vibration. 177 Advice

For the sake of the environment The run-flat tyres have a tag on the side of ● there is a smell of rubber, the tyre, with the description: “DSST”, “Eufo- ● the vehicle vibrates, Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- nia”, “RFT”, “ROF”, “RSC”, “SSR” or “ZP”. sumption. ● there is a rattling noise. The sides of this type of tyre are reinforced. When the tyres lose air they are supported on When is it no longer possible to continue Run-flat tyres the sides (emergency driving). driving even using run-flat tyres? The loss of pressure in the tyre is shown on ● If one of the tyres has been severely dam- Run-flat tyres allow you to continue driving the instrument panel. You can then drive a aged in an accident, etc. If a tyre has been even with a punctured tyre, in the majority of maximum of 80 km (50 miles) and if the cir- badly damaged there is a risk that parts of cases. cumstances are favourable (e.g. low load), the tread can be thrown off and cause dam- In vehicles that are factory-fitted with run-flat even more. age to the fuel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler. tyres1) the loss of tyre pressure is indicated The damaged tyre should be changed as ● It is also advisable to stop driving if severe on the instrument panel. soon as possible. The rim should be checked vibrations occur, or if the wheel starts over- in a specialised workshop to detect possible heating and gives off smoke. Driving with run-flat tyres (emergency damage and replace it if necessary. We rec- running) ommend you contact your technical service. WARNING – Leave the ESC/ASR on (Electronic Stability If more than one tyre is being used under When driving in emergency conditions, the Control), or switch it on ››› page 137. emergency conditions, this reduces the dis- driving quality of the vehicle is considerably tance that can be travelled. impaired. – Continue driving carefully and slowly ● The maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h (80 km/h [50 mph] maximum). Starting driving in emergency conditions (50 mph) is subject to road and weather con- – Avoid sudden manoeuvres and sharp turns. When loss in tyre pressure is displayed on ditions. Please observe related legal requirements. – Avoid driving over obstacles (e.g. kerbs) or the instrument panel, this means that at least ● potholes. one tyre is being driven in emergency condi- Avoid sharp turns and rapid manoeuvres, tions ››› . and brake earlier than usual. – Pay attention if the ESC/ASR activates of- ● Avoid driving over obstacles (e.g. kerbs) or ten, if smoke comes from the tyres or there End of emergency operation potholes. is a smell of rubber, the vehicle vibrates or Do not drive on if: ● If one or more tyres are being driven in there are clattering noises. If any of these emergency conditions, the driving quality of occur, stop the vehicle. ● smoke is coming from one of the tyres,

1) Depending upon version and country. 178 Wheels

the vehicle is impaired and there is a risk of rect tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designa- Any technical service has full information on accident. tions marked on the sidewall, for example: the technical requirements when installing or changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims. 195/65 R15 91T On vehicles with all-wheel drive, all four tyres Note This contains the following information: must always be fitted with tyres of the same ● The run-flat tyres do not “deflate” on losing pressure because they are supported on the 195 Tyre width in mm type, make and tread pattern, as otherwise the driveline can be damaged by continuous reinforced sides. Therefore defects in the tyre 65 Height/width ratio in % specifications Technical cannot be detected with a visual inspection. differences in the wheel speeds. For this rea- R Tyre construction: Radial son, the spare wheel should have the same ● Snow chains must not be used on front wheel dimensions as the normal wheels so tyres used in emergency conditions. 15 Rim diameter in inches 91 Load rating code that it will fit if there is a puncture. You may also use the factory-supplied compact tem- T Speed rating

porary spare wheel. Advice New tyres and wheels The tyres could also have the following infor- WARNING New tyres and wheels have to be run in. mation: ● We recommend that you use only wheels The tyres and wheel rims are an essential ● A direction of rotation symbol and tyres which have been approved by SEAT part of the vehicle's design. Those approved ● “Reinforced” denotes heavy-duty tyres. for your model. Failure to do so could impair by SEAT are specially matched to the charac- vehicle handling. Risk of accident. teristics of the vehicle and make a major con- The manufacturing date is also indicated on ● Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are tribution to good road-holding and safe han- the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the inner more than 6 years old. If you have no alterna- dling ››› . side of the wheel). tive, you should drive slowly and with extra Operation care at all times. Note for Italy: A SEAT Service Centre should “DOT... 1103...” means, for example, that the be consulted whether different sized wheels tyre was produced in the 11th week of 2003. ● Never use old tyres or those with an un- or tyres to those originally fitted by SEAT may known “history of use”. We recommend that work on tyres and be fitted, as well as the combinations al- ● If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must en- wheels be carried out by a Technical Service. lowed between the front axle (axle 1) and sure that the flow of air to the brakes is not They are familiar with the procedure and back axle (axle 2). restricted. This could cause the brake system have the necessary special tools and spare to overheat. Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and parts as well as the proper facilities for dis- Safety ● All four wheels must be fitted with radial posing of the old tyres. not individually (i.e. both front tyres or both tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumfer- rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre des- ence) and the same tread pattern. » ignations makes it easier to choose the cor-

179 Advice

For the sake of the environment After the wheels have been changed, the mer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread tightening torque of the wheel bolts should pattern) provide less grip on ice and snow. Old tyres must be disposed of according to be checked as soon as possible with a torque the laws in the country concerned. Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure of wrench ››› . The tightening torque for steel 0.2 bar (2.9 psi/20 kPa) higher than the pres- and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. sures specified for summer tyres (see sticker Note on fuel tank flap). ● For technical reasons, it is not generally WARNING Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels. possible to use the wheels from other vehi- If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, cles. This can also apply to wheels of the the wheel could become loose while driving. Information on permitted winter tyre sizes same model. The use of wheels or tyres Risk of accident. can be found in the vehicle's registration which have not been approved by SEAT for ● The wheel bolts must be clean and turn documentation. Use only radial winter tyres. use with your model may invalidate the vehi- easily. Never apply grease or oil to them. All tyre sizes listed in the vehicle documenta- cle's type approval for use on public roads. ● Use only wheel bolts which belong to the tion also apply to winter tyres. ● If the spare tyre is not the same as the wheel. tyres that are mounted on the vehicle (e.g. Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the winter tyres) you should only use the spare ● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm. tyre for a short period of time and drive with is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehi- The speed rating code extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight- ››› page 179, New soon as possible. ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and tyres and wheels determines the following threads can be damaged. speed limits for winter tyres: ››› Q max. 160 km/h CAUTION Wheel bolts S max. 180 km/h The prescribed tightening torque for wheel T max. 190 km/h The design of wheel bolts is matched to the bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. rims. If different wheel rims are fitted, the H max. 210 km/h correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt heads must be used. In some countries, vehicles which can exceed This ensures that wheels are fitted securely Winter service the speed rating of the fitted tyre must have and that the brake system functions correctly. an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of Winter tyres view. These stickers are available from your In certain circumstances, you should not use technical service. The legal requirements of wheel bolts from a different vehicle, even if it In winter conditions winter tyres will consid- each country must be followed. is the same model ››› page 147. erably improve the vehicle's handling. Sum- Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with summer tyres 180 Emergencies handle better when the roads are free of All-wheel drive: where snow chains are com- Emergencies snow and ice. pulsory, this normally also applies to all- wheel drive vehicles. Snow chains may only If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the be fitted to the front wheels (also on vehicles Vehicle tools, spare wheel notes on the spare wheel ››› page 179, New with all-wheel drive). tyres and wheels. Vehicle Tools WARNING WARNING The vehicle tools are located under the floor specifications Technical Snow chains should be correctly tightened in The maximum speed for the winter tyres must panel in the luggage compartment. accordance with the manufacturer's instruc- not be exceeded. Otherwise, this could lead tions. This will prevent the chains coming in- to damage and risk of accident. – Lift the cover of the luggage compartment, to contact with the wheel housing. by pulling it up with a finger in the fitting.

For the sake of the environment – Take the vehicle tools out of the vehicle.

CAUTION Advice Fit your summer tyres again as soon as possi- Remove the snow chains to drive on roads The vehicle tool kit includes: ble. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly without snow. Otherwise they will impair and reduce fuel consumption. ● Jack.* handling, damage the tyres and wear out very quickly. ● Hook for removing wheel covers* or wheel trims* Snow chains Note ● Box spanner for wheel bolts.* ● Snow chains are only permitted on front ● In some countries, the maximum permitted Towing ring. wheels and only for tyres 195/65R15 and speed with snow chains is 50 km/h (31 mph). ● Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts* Operation 205/55R16. These tyres may only be fitted The legal requirements of each country must with fine-pitch link chains which do not probe followed. Some of the items listed are only provided in trude more than 15 mm ››› page 210. ● We recommend that you ask your technical certain model versions, or are optional ex- service for information about appropriate tras. Other tyres may use fine-pitch links which do wheel, tyre and snow chain size. not protrude more than 9 mm, including ten- WARNING sion device. ● The factory-supplied jack is only designed Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings be- for changing wheels on this model. On no ac- Safety fore fitting snow chains. For safety reasons, count attempt to use it for lifting heavier ve- cover caps, available at any technical service, hicles or other loads. Risk of injury. must then be fitted over the wheel bolts. ● Use the jack only on a firm, level ground. »

181 Advice

● Never start the engine when the vehicle is The temporary spare wheel is stored under WARNING on the jack. Risk of accident. the floor panel in the luggage compartment and is attached by a thumbnut. ● The tyre pressures must be checked and ● If work is to be carried out underneath the corrected as soon as possible after fitting the vehicle, this must be secured by suitable temporary spare wheel. The pressure of the stands. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury. How to use the temporary spare wheel spare wheel sized 125/70R16 125/70R18 Should you ever have a punctured tyre, the 135/90R16 should be 4.2 bar Note compact temporary spare wheel is only inten- (61 psi/420 kPa). For other sizes, check the ded for temporary use until you can reach a label on the fuel cap. Failure to follow this in- The jack does not generally require any main- workshop. The standard-size road wheel struction could result in an accident. tenance. If required, it should be greased us- should be replaced as soon as possible. ● Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph), ing universal-type grease. since higher speeds can cause an accident. Please note the following restrictions when ● using the temporary spare wheel. This tem- Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering. Risk of accident. porary spare wheel has been specially de- Compact spare wheel* (temporary ● Never use more than one temporary spare spare wheel) signed for your vehicle, thus, it cannot be replaced by a temporary spare wheel from an- wheel at the same time, risk of accident. other vehicle. ● No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact No other type of tyre (normal summer or win- temporary spare wheel rim. ter tyre) may be fitted on the compact temporary spare wheel rim.

Snow chains Wheel change For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the compact temporary spare Preparation work wheel. – If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the If you have a puncture on one of the front Fig. 154 Luggage compartment. Accessing vehicle as far away from the flow of traffic the spare wheel. wheels when using snow chains, fit the com- as possible. Choose a location that is as pact temporary spare wheel in place of one of level as possible. The compact spare wheel (temporary spare the rear wheels. You can then attach the – All vehicle occupants should leave the ve- wheel for vehicles without the anti-puncture snow chains to the wheel taken from the rear hicle. They should wait in a safe area (for kit) should only be used when strictly neces- and use this wheel to replace the punctured instance behind the roadside crash barri- sary. front wheel. er). 182 Emergencies

– Switch off the engine. Switch on the hazard – Remove the wheel cover. Also refer to wheel, they must be replaced before having warning lights. ››› Fig. 155. the wheel bolt tightening torque checked. – Apply the handbrake firmly. – Slacken the wheel bolts. ● For safety reasons, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt tightening torque – Engage the first gear, or put the selector – Raise the vehicle with the jack at the corre- has been checked. lever to position P for those vehicles with sponding area. an automatic gearbox. – Remove the wheel and put on the spare Technical specifications Technical – If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from one. Wheel trims your vehicle. – Lower the vehicle. – Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheel – Tighten the wheel bolts firmly with the box out of the luggage compartment. spanner.

WARNING – Replace the hub cap. Advice Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in position. This is for your own safety and also warns other road After changing a wheel users. – Put the tools back in their storage location. CAUTION – Place the wheel with the defective tyre in If you have to change the tyre on a gradient, the luggage compartment and secure it. block the wheel opposite the wheel being – Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted Operation Fig. 155 Changing a wheel: remove the wheel changed by placing a stone or similar object tyre as soon as possible. under it to prevent the vehicle from rolling trim. away. – Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible with a The wheel trims must be removed to gain ac- torque wrench. The prescribed torque must cess to the wheel bolts. Note be 120 Nm. Please observe related legal requirements. Removing Note – Insert the extraction hook from the tools in- Safety ● If you notice that the wheel bolts are corro- to the designated ring, located in one of Changing a wheel ded and difficult to turn when changing a the bolt hole covers of the wheel cover ››› Fig. 155. » Change the wheel as described below: 183 Advice

– Pull off the hub cap. Loosening the wheel bolts WARNING Loosen the wheel bolts (only about one turn) before raising the vehicle with the jack, oth- Wheel covers* erwise there is a risk of accident.

Note ● If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and take care not to slip. Fig. 157 Changing a wheel: loosen the wheel bolts.

Fig. 156 Changing a wheel: remove the wheel The wheel bolts must be loosened before cover. raising the vehicle.

The wheel covers must be removed for access Loosening to the wheel bolts. – Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt. Removing – Grasp the box spanner by the end turn it – Remove the wheel cover using the wire about one full turn to the left ››› Fig. 157. hook ››› Fig. 156. – Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the Tightening wheel cover. – Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt. Fitting – Grasp the box spanner close to the end and – Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by turn the bolt to the right until it is secured. pressing it firmly. Put pressure initially on the point of the cut-out for the valve. Then – An adapter is required to unscrew or tight- press the wheel cover onto the steel rim so en the anti-theft wheel bolts. that it engages all round. 184 Emergencies

Lifting the vehicle rectly below the vertical rib under the door Jack position points for vehicles with sill. sill panel trim* – Align the jack so that the arm of the jack fits around the rib under the door sill and the movable base plate of the jack is flat on the ground ››› Fig. 159.

– Raise the vehicle until the defective wheel specifications Technical is just clear of the ground.

Recesses at the front and rear of the door sills mark the jacking points ››› Fig. 158. There is only one jacking point for each

Fig. 158 Jack position points wheel. Do not fit the jack anywhere else. Advice Fig. 160 Plastic sill panel trim with jack an- An unstable surface under the jack may chor cover. cause the vehicle to slip off the jack. There- fore, it must be fitted on solid ground offer- Vehicles with plastic sill panel trim, with ing good support. Use a large and stable cover* base, if necessary. On a hard, slippery sur- – Remove the cap A to access the anchor face (such as tile) use a rubber mat or similar point for the vehicle jack . to prevent the jack from slipping. ››› Fig. 160 – Pull on the cover and remove it from its al- Operation WARNING lotment in the direction of the arrow ● Take all precautions so that the base of the ››› Fig. 160. jack does not slip. Failure to follow this in- – Once the cover has been released, it will re- Fig. 159 Fitting the jack. struction could result in an accident. main connected to its strap so that is not ● The vehicle can be damaged if the jack is lost. In order to remove the wheel, the vehicle not applied at the correct jacking points. must be raised with a jack. There is also a risk of injury since the jack can Safety – Locate the jacking point under the door sill slip off suddenly if it is not properly engaged. closest to the punctured wheel ››› Fig. 158. – Place the jack under the jacking point and turn the crank until the arm of the jack is di- 185 Advice

Removing and fitting the wheel Anti-theft wheel bolts* Tyres with directional tread pattern

Change the wheel as described below after A directional tread pattern can be identified loosening the wheel bolts and raising the ve- by arrows on the sidewall that point in the di- hicle with the jack. rection of rotation. Always note the direction of rotation indicated when fitting the wheel. Removing a wheel This is important so that these tyres can provide maximum grip and avoid excessive – Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box noise, tread wear and aquaplaning. spanner and place them on a clean surface. If, in an emergency, you have to mount the Fitting a wheel spare wheel so it rotates in the wrong direc- – Screw on the wheel bolts in position and tion, you must drive extremely carefully. The Fig. 161 Anti-theft wheel bolt. tighten them loosely with a box spanner. tyre will not give optimum performance. This is particularly important when driving on wet The wheel bolts should be clean and easily A special adapter is required to turn the anti- roads. theft wheel bolts. screwed. Before fitting the spare wheel, in- To benefit from the advantages of tyres with spect the wheel condition and hub mounting – Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and this type of tread pattern, the defective tyre surfaces. These surfaces must be clean be- push it on as far as it will go ››› Fig. 161. should be replaced as soon as possible so fore fitting the wheel. – Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over that all tyres again rotate in the correct direc- If tyres with a specific direction of rotation the adapter. tion. are fitted, note the direction of rotation. – Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appropriate. Tyre repair Code The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* is stamped onto the front part of the adaptor. The Anti-puncture Kit* (Tyre Mobility System) The code number should be noted and kept will reliably seal punctures caused by the in a safe place, as it is only by using the code penetration of a foreign body of up to about number that a duplicate adaptor can be ob- 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign obtained from the SEAT Official Services. jects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

186 Emergencies

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, ● All passengers and particularly children ● Drive only during 10 minutes at a maximum you must again check the tyre pressure about must keep a safe distance from the work area. speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and subsequently 10 minutes after starting the engine. ● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn check the tyre. You should only use the tire mobility set if other road users. the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are ● Use the tyre mobility system only if you are For the sake of the environment familiar with the procedure and you have the familiar with the necessary procedures. Oth- Dispose of used or expired sealant observing necessary tire mobility set! Otherwise, you erwise, you should seek professional assis- any legal requirements. specifications Technical should seek professional assistance. tance. ● The tyre mobility set is intended for tempo- The tyre sealant must not be used in the rary emergency use only until you can reach Note following cases: the nearest specialised workshop. ● A new bottle of sealant can be purchased at SEAT dealerships. ● If the wheel rim has been damaged. ● Replace the repaired tyre with the tire mo-

bility set as soon as possible. ● Take into account the separate instruction Advice ● In outside temperatures below -20 °C manual from the tyre mobility set* manufac- (-4 °F). ● The sealant is a health hazard and must be cleaned immediately if it comes into contact turer. ● In the event of cuts or perforations in the with the skin. tyre greater than 4 mm. ● Always keep the tire mobility set out of the ● If you have been driving with very low pres- reach of small children. Contents of the tyre mobility system* sure or a completely flat tyre. ● Never use an equivalent jack, even if it has ● If the sealant bottle has passed its use by been approved for your vehicle. date. ● Always stop the engine, apply the hand- Operation brake lever firmly and engage gear if using a WARNING manual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk of vehicle involuntary movement. Using the tyre mobility system can be dangerous, especially when filling the tyre at the roadside. Please observe the following rules WARNING to minimise the risk of injury: A tyre filled with sealant does not have the ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. same performance properties as a conven- Park it at a safe distance from surrounding tional tyre. Safety traffic to fill the tyre. ● Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). ● Ensure the ground on which you park is flat ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and and solid. Fig. 162 Standard representation: contents of fast cornering. the tyre mobility system. » 187 Advice

The tyre mobility set is located underneath Sealing and inflating a tyre Inflating the tyre the floor covering in the boot. It includes the ● Securely screw the tyre inflator tube following components : Sealing a tyre ››› Fig. 162 ››› Fig. 162 5 of the compressor into the tyre ● Unscrew the tyre valve cap. 1 Tyre valve remover valve. ● Use the enclosed extractor to unscrew the ● 2 Sticker indicating maximum speed “max. Check whether the air bleed screw 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph” valve insert ››› Fig. 162 1 and place the ››› Fig. 162 7 is closed. valve insert on a clean surface. ● 3 Filler tube with cap Start the vehicle engine and leave it run- ● Vigorously shake the sealant bottle ning. 4 Air compressor ››› Fig. 162 10 for several seconds. ● Attach the connector ››› Fig. 162 9 to one 5 Tube for inflating tyres ● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 162 3 se- of the vehicle's 12 volt sockets ››› page 99. 6 Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- curely into the sealant bottle in a clockwise ● Connect the air compressor with the toring system1) direction. The seal on the mouth of the bottle ON/OFF switch ››› Fig. 162 8 . 2) moves automatically. 7 Air bleed screw ● Keep the air compressor running until it 8 ON/OFF switch ● Remove the lid from the filling tube reaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi / ››› Fig. 162 3 and screw the open end of the 9 12 volt connector 200-250 kPa) ››› . Maximum operation time tube into the tyre valve. 8 minutes ››› . 10 Bottle of sealant ● Hold the tyre sealant can upside down and ● Disconnect the air compressor. 11 Spare tyre valve fill the complete contents of the can into the ● tyre. If it is not possible to achieve an air pres- The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the sure of 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi / lower end for a valve insert. The valve insert ● Remove the tyre sealant bottle from the 200-250 kPa), unscrew the tyre inflator tube can only be screwed or unscrewed in this valve. from the tyre valve. way. This also applies to its replacement part ● Screw the valve insert into the tyre valve ● Move the vehicle some 10 metres forward 11 . again with the corresponding tool ››› Fig. 162 or backward so that the sealant is evenly dis- 1 . tributed in the tyre interior. ● Securely screw the compressor tyre inflator tube into the tyre valve and repeat the inflation process.

1) It can also be integrated in the compressor. 2) In its place, the compressor may have a button. 188 Emergencies

● If the indicated pressure still cannot be compressor again, let it cool for several mi- Jump-starting reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. The nutes. tyre cannot be sealed with the anti-puncture Jump leads kit. Do not continue driving. You should obtain professional assistance ››› . Check after 10 minutes of driving The jump lead must have a sufficient wire ● Disconnect the air compressor and unscrew cross section. the flexible inflator tube from the tyre valve. Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 162 5 again If the engine fails to start because of a dis- specifications Technical ● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and and check the pressure on the gauge 6 . charged battery, the battery can be connec- 2.0 bars, immediately continue driving with- ted to the battery of another vehicle to start out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower: the engine. ● After 10 minutes, Check the pressure again ● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed ››› page 189. sufficiently with the tyre mobility set. Jump leads ● You should obtain professional assistance Jump leads must comply with standard DIN Advice WARNING ››› . 72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc- When inflating the wheel, the air compressor tions). The wire cross section must be at least and the inflator tube may become hot. 1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher: 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least 2 ● Protect hands and skin from hot parts. ● Set the tyre pressure to the correct value 35 mm for diesel engines. ● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or again. Note hot air compressor on flammable material. ● Carefully resume your journey until you ● Allow them to cool before storing the de- reach the nearest specialised workshop with- ● The vehicles must not touch each other, vice. out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). otherwise electricity could flow as soon as Operation the positive terminals are connected. ● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at ● Have the damaged tyre replaced. least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is ● The discharged battery must be properly too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a connected to the on-board network. WARNING good condition to seal the tyre. Do not continue driving. Seek specialist assistance. Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous and can cause accidents and serious injury. ● Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure CAUTION Safety is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower. Switch off the air compressor after a maxi- ● Seek specialist assistance. mum of 8 operational minutes to prevent it from overheating! Before switching on the air

189 Advice

How to jump start: description 2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to Removing the jump leads the positive + terminal of the vehicle 9. Before you remove the jump leads, switch with the flat battery A ››› Fig. 163. off the dipped beam headlights (if they 3. Connect the other end of the red jump are switched on). lead to the positive terminal + in the ve- 10.Turn on the heater blower and heated rear hicle providing assistance B . window in the vehicle with the flat battery. 4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system: This helps minimise voltage peaks which connect one end of the black jump lead to are generated when the leads are discon- the negative terminal – in the vehicle nected. providing assistance B ››› Fig. 163. 11.When the engine is running, disconnect – For vehicles with Start-Stop system: Con- the leads in reverse order to the details Fig. 163 Diagram of connections for vehicles nect one end of the black jump lead X to a given above. without Start-Stop system. suitable ground terminal, a solid piece of metal in the engine block, or to the engine Connect the battery clamps so they have good metal-to-metal contact with the battery block itself ››› Fig. 164. terminals. 5. Connect the other end of the black jump If the engine fails to start, switch off the start- lead X to a solid metal component bolted to the engine block or to the engine block er after about 10 seconds and try again after itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. about a minute. Do not connect it to a point near the bat- WARNING tery A . ● Please note the safety warnings referring to 6. Position the leads in such a way that they working in the engine compartment cannot come into contact with any moving ››› page 163, Working in the engine compart- Fig. 164 Diagram of connections for vehicles parts in the engine compartment. ment. with Start-Stop system. ● The battery providing assistance must have Starting the same voltage as the flat battery (12 V) Jump lead terminal connections 7. Start the vehicle's engine with the boost- and approximately the same capacity (see 1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles ing battery and let it run at idling speed. imprint on battery). Failure to comply could . result in an explosion. ››› 8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat ● Never use jump leads when one of the bat- battery and wait 2 or 3 minutes until the teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even engine is “running”. 190 Emergencies after the battery has thawed, battery acid Towing and tow-starting General notes could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced. Tow-starting Please observe the following points if you ● Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes use a tow rope: away from batteries, danger of explosion. We recommend that you do not tow-start your Failure to comply could result in an explo- vehicle. Jump-starting is preferable Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle sion. ››› page 189. – Drive slowly at first until the tow rope is ● Observe the instructions provided by the taut. Then accelerate gradually. specifications Technical manufacturer of the jump leads. However, if your vehicle has to be tow- – Begin and change gears cautiously. If you ● started: Do not connect the negative cable from the are driving an automatic vehicle, accelerate other vehicle directly to the negative terminal – Engage 2nd or 3rd gear. gently. of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of – Keep the clutch pressed down. – Remember that the brake servo and power Advice explosion. – Switch the ignition on. steering are not working in the vehicle you ● Do not attach the negative cable from the are towing. Brake sooner than normal and other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to – Once both vehicles are moving, release the pressing the pedal gently. the brake line. clutch. ● The non-insulated parts of the battery – As soon as the engine starts, press the Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle clamps must not be allowed to touch. The clutch and move the gear lever into neutral. – Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at all jump lead attached to the positive battery This helps to prevent driving into the tow- times when towing. terminal must not touch metal parts of the ve- ing vehicle. hicle, this can cause a short circuit. Tow rope or tow bar Operation ● Position the leads in such a way that they WARNING It is easier and safer for the vehicle to be tow- cannot come into contact with any moving ed using a tow bar. You should only use a parts in the engine compartment. The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed can easily col- tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar. ● Do not lean on the batteries. This could re- lide with the towing vehicle. sult in chemical burns. A tow rope should be slightly elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles. It is advis- CAUTION able to use a tow rope made of synthetic fi-

Note Safety When tow-starting, fuel could enter the cata- bre or similarly elastic material. The vehicles must not touch each other, oth- lytic converter and damage it. erwise electricity could flow as soon as the Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to the positive terminals are connected. towline anchorages provided or a towing bracket. »

191 Advice

Driving style ● Do not tow further than 50 km. Towline anchorages Towing requires some experience, especially ● If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle when using a tow rope. Both drivers should must be towed with the front wheels raised. be familiar with the technique required for towing. Inexperienced drivers should not at- Note tempt to tow. ● Observe legal requirements when towing or Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle tow-starting. and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope. ● Switch on the hazard warning lights of both When towing on an unpaved road, there is al- vehicles. However, observe any regulations ways a risk of overloading and damaging the to the contrary. anchorage points. ● For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be tow-started. The ignition of the vehicle being towed must Fig. 165 Fitting the front towline anchorage be switched on to prevent the steering wheel ● If there is no lubricant in the gearbox as the to the front right section of the vehicle. from locking and also to allow the use of the result of a fault, you must raise the driven turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and wheels while the vehicle is being towed. washers. ● If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km, the front wheels should be raised dur- The brake servo only works when the engine ing towing, and towing should be carried out is running. When not running, you must ap- by a qualified person. ply considerably more pressure to the brake ● The steering wheel is locked when the vehi- pedal. cle has no electrical power. The vehicle must As the power assisted steering does not work then be towed with the front wheels raised. if the engine is not running, you will need Towing should be carried out by a qualified more strength to steer than you normally person. ● The towline anchorage should always be would. Fig. 166 Fitting the towline anchorage to the kept in the vehicle. Please refer to the notes rear of the vehicle. ● The vehicle must not be towed faster than on ››› page 191, Tow-starting. 50 km/h (31 mph). Front towline anchorage Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox – Take the towline anchorage from the on- board tool set. ● Put the selector lever into position “N”. ● Do not drive faster than 50 km/h (31 mph). – Remove the cover by pressing down on its left-hand side. 192 Emergencies

– Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left, in Emergency locking and will expose a circular element with a groove the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 165. in the centre. Insert the key into the groove unlocking and rotate the element clockwise for the right Rear towline anchorage hand side doors and anticlockwise for the Emergency manual locking left hand side doors. – Take the towline anchorage from the on- board tool set. Replace the cap and close the door. Once the door has been locked it can no longer be – Remove the cover by pressing down on its specifications Technical opened from the outside. right-hand side. – Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left, in Unlocking the manually (emergency) locked the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 166. driver door After use, unscrew the towline anchorage Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and and put it back in the vehicle tool kit. Replace rotate anticlockwise for the left hand side Advice the cover on the bumper. The towline anchor- doors and clockwise for the right hand side age should always be kept in the vehicle. doors. Fig. 167 Emergency door locking. The door lock is released and the door may be opened using the exterior door handle. This permits mechanical locking of the doors in case of central locking system failure. Unlocking the remaining manually (emergency) locked doors Locking the driver door manually First the driver door must be unlocked to gain Operation Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and entry to the vehicle. Operate the internal door rotate in a clockwise direction for the left handle for the required door. If the childproof hand side door and anticlockwise for the lock is activated on the rear doors, when the right hand side door. interior door release lever is operated the Once the door has been closed it can no lon- door is unlocked but does not open. The door ger be opened from the outside. must be opened from the outside. Safety Manual (emergency) locking of the Note remaining doors Once the vehicle is open, if you wish to lock it Open the door and remove the cap A manually, repeat the previous instructions. ››› Fig. 167 printed with a lock image. This 193 Advice

Emergency boot hatch opening Changing the wiper blades To change the blades it is necessary to move the wipers from the rest position into the Changing windscreen wiper blades service position. Service position (for changing wiper blades) – Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen. – Turn the ignition on and off and then (within approximately 8 seconds), push the windscreen wiper lever out of the short wipe position. The windscreen wipers will move to the service position.

Fig. 168 Rear lid: emergency opening. Changing the windscreen wiper blades This allows the vehicle to be opened if the – Lift the wiper arm away from the wind- Fig. 169 Windscreen wipers in the service po- central locking does not work (for example, if sition. screen. the battery is flat) – Push the side buttons, free the blade and There is a groove in the luggage compart- pull in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 170 ment allowing access to the emergency opening mechanism. Fitting the wiper blade – Insert a blade of identical length and de- Opening the rear lid from inside the luggage sign into the wiper arm. compartment – Slide the blade until it clicks into position. – Insert the key in the groove and unlock the locking system, turning the key from right – Push the wiper arms back against the wind- to left, as shown by the arrow ››› Fig. 168. screen.

Fig. 170 Changing the windscreen wiper The windscreen wiper arms return to their blades original position when the ignition is turned on and the windscreen wiper lever is operat- Perfect wiper blade condition is essential for ed, or when driving faster than 6 km/h. clear vision. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.

194 Emergencies

If the windscreen wipers scratch, they should Note Fitting the wiper blade be replaced if they are damaged, or cleaned – With one hand, hold the top end of the wip- if they are soiled. ● The windscreen wiper arms can be moved to the service position only when the bonnet er arm. If this does not produce the desired results, is properly closed. – Place the blade as shown in ››› Fig. 171 B the setting angle of the windscreen wiper and slide the adapter along until it engag- arms might be incorrect. They should be es. checked by a specialised workshop and cor- Changing the rear wiper blade specifications Technical rected if necessary. Check the condition of the wiper blade regu- 3 Applies to the model: ALTEA larly. Change as required. WARNING If the windscreen wiper scrapes, it should be Do not drive unless you have good visibility replaced if damaged, or cleaned if soiled. through all windows!

If this is not sufficient, refer to a specialised Advice ● Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all workshop. windows regularly. ● The wiper blades should be changed once WARNING or twice a year. Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows! CAUTION ● Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all ● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could Fig. 171 Changing the rear window wiper windows regularly. scratch the windscreen. blade. ● The wiper blades should be changed once Operation ● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint or twice a year. thinner or similar products to clean the win- Perfect rear wiper blade condition is essential dows. This could damage the windscreen for clear rear vision. Damaged wiper blades CAUTION wiper blades. should be replaced immediately. ● Never move the windscreen wiper or wind- ● A damaged or dirty window wiper could screen wiper arm manually. This could cause Removing the wiper blade scratch the rear window. damage. ● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint – Lift the wiper arm away from the glass

● To prevent damage to the bonnet and the thinner or similar products to clean the win- Safety windscreen wiper arms, the latter should only – Slide the blade adapter in the direction of dow as they may damage the blades. be lifted off the windscreen when in service the arrow and remove the blade ››› Fig. 171 ● Never move the windscreen wiper by hand. position. A. This could cause damage.

195 Advice Changing the rear wiper blade If the windscreen wiper scrapes, it should be Fuses and bulbs replaced if damaged, or cleaned if soiled. 3 Applies to the model: ALTEA XL/ALTEA FREETRACK If this is not sufficient, refer to a specialised Fuses workshop. Introduction WARNING Do not drive unless you have good visibility Due to the constant updating of vehicles, through all windows! fuse assignments based on equipment and ● Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all the use of the same fuse for various electrical windows regularly. components, it is not possible to provide an ● The wiper blades should be changed once up-to-date summary of the fuse positions for or twice a year. the electrical components at the time this manual was printed. For detailed information Fig. 172 Changing the rear window wiper about the fuse positions, please consult a blade. CAUTION technical service. ● A damaged or dirty window wiper could Perfect rear wiper blade condition is essential scratch the rear window. In general, a fuse can be assigned to various for clear rear vision. Damaged wiper blades electrical components. Likewise, an electrical ● should be replaced immediately. Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint component can be protected by several thinner or similar products to clean the win- fuses. dow as they may damage the blades. Removing the wiper blade ● Never move the windscreen wiper by hand. Only replace fuses when the cause of the – Lift the rear wiper arm. This could cause damage. problem has been solved. If a newly inserted – Release the blade 1 by pulling it in the di- fuse blows after a short time, you must have rection of the arrow 2 . the electrical system checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible. Fitting the wiper blade Additional information and warnings: – Insert the wiper blade onto the windscreen wiper arm until it clicks into place. ● Working in the engine compartment ››› page 163. Check the condition of the wiper blade regularly. Change as required.

196 Fuses and bulbs

WARNING Note The high voltages in the electrical system can ● One component may have more than one give serious electrical shocks, causing burns fuse. and even death! ● Several components may run on a single ● Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni- fuse. tion system.

● Take care not to cause short circuits in the specifications Technical electrical system. Vehicle fuses

WARNING Fig. 174 In the engine compartment: fuse box Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or cover

bridging a current circuit without fuses can Advice cause a fire and serious injury. Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same ● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only amperage (same colour and markings) and replace fuses with a fuse of the same amper- size. age (same colour and markings) and size. ● Never repair a fuse. Identifying fuses situated below the driver- side dash panel by colours ● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple or similar. Fig. 173 Left side of dash panel fuse box cov- Colour Amp rating

er Purple 3 Operation CAUTION Light brown 5 ● To prevent damage to the vehicle's electric system, before replacing a fuse turn off the Brown 7.5 ignition, the lights and all electrical elements and remove the key from the ignition. Red 10 ● If you replace a fuse with higher-rating Blue 15 fuse, you could cause damage to another part of the electrical system. Yellow 20 Safety ● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- White or trans- 25 vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can parent damage the electrical system. Green 30 » 197 Advice

Colour Amp rating Note To replace a fuse ● Remove the fuse. Orange 40 In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter. These should ● Replace the blown fuse by one with an only be changed by a specialised workshop. identical amperage rating (same colour and Opening and closing the fuse box situated markings) and identical size ››› . below the dash panel ● Replace the cover again or close the fuse ● Opening: fold the cover down ››› Fig. 173. Replacing a blown fuse box lid. ● Closing: push back the cover it in until it clicks into place. CAUTION If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, To open the engine compartment fuse box you could cause damage to another part of ● Open the bonnet  ››› page 163. the electrical system. ● Press the locking tabs in the direction indicated by the arrows to release the fuse box cover ››› Fig. 174. Changing the lights ● Then lift the cover out. ● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. General notes Push the locking tabs down, in the opposite Fig. 175 Image of a blown fuse direction to that indicated by the arrows, un- Before changing any bulb, first turn off the til you hear them click into place. Preparation failed device. ● Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec- Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with CAUTION trical equipment. your bare hands. The fingerprints left on the ● Always carefully remove the fuse box cov- ● Open the corresponding fuse box glass will vaporise as a result of the heat gen- ers and refit them correctly to avoid problems ››› page 197. erated by the bulb, reducing bulb life and with your vehicle. causing condensation on the reflector sur- ● Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid Identifying a blown fuse face, thus reducing effectiveness. the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humid- A bulb must only be replaced by one of the ity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured same type. The type is indicated on the bulb, the electrical system. ››› Fig. 175. either on the glass part or on the base. Point a lamp at the fuse. This will make it easier to see if the fuse is blown. It is highly recommended to keep a box of spare bulbs in the vehicle. At the very least, 198 Fuses and bulbs the following spare bulbs, which are essen- Upper tail light (ALTEA) Side turn signal tial for road safety, should be kept in the ve- Stop/Position - P21W3) Side turn signal - W5W hicle. Turn signal - R10W Number plate light Main headlights Lower tail light (ALTEA) Number plate light - C5W Dipped beam - H7 Fog light - P21W

Main beam - H1 Note specifications Technical Reverse light - P21W Position - W5W ● Depending on weather conditions (cold or Turn signal - PY21W Fixed tail light (ALTEA XL / ALTEA FREETRACK) wet), the headlights, the fog lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be temporari- Stop/Position - P21W3) ly misted. This has no influence on the useful Xenon headlights1) /adaptive* Turn signal - P21W life of the lighting system. By switching on 2) Dipped and full beam - D1S the lights, the area through which the beam Advice of light is projected will quickly be demisted. Daylight - P21W SLL Mobile tail light (ALTEA XL / ALTEA However, the edges may continue to be mis- Position - W5W FREETRACK) ted. Turn signals - PY21W Fog light (driver side) - P21W ● Please check at regular intervals that all Reverse (passenger side) - P21W lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is Front fog light Position - W5W » Front fog light - H3 Operation

1) On this type of headlight, the bulb changes must be made by the technical service, given that complex elements must be removed from the vehicle and the incorporated automatic control system must be reset. 2) The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.5 times the light flux and have an average lifespan of 5 times more than that of halogen bulbs, this means that, except due to Safety unusual circumstances, there is no need to change the bulbs for the whole life of the vehicle. 3) Electronically controlled single filament bulb for Stop/side bulbs. If the bulb blows it will not work in either position or Stop. 199 Advice

not only in the interest of your own safety, Turn signal bulbs Dipped lights but also that of all other road users. ● Due to difficulty of access to some of the bulbs, any replacement work should be done by a technical service. However, the following is a description of how to change the lamps except for the fog lights* and interior lamps.

Main headlight bulbs

Fig. 177 Turn signal bulb. Fig. 178 Dipped beam headlights.

– Raise the bonnet. – Rotate the bulb holder ››› Fig. 177 A to the left and pull. – Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and turn it anti-clockwise at the same time.

Fig. 176 Main headlight bulbs. – Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence. A Turn signal Fig. 179 Dipped beam headlights. B Dipped beam headlights C Main beam headlights – Raise the bonnet. D Side light – Move the loops ››› Fig. 178 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove the cover. – Remove connector ››› Fig. 179 2 from the bulb.

200 Fuses and bulbs

– Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 179 3 – Raise the bonnet. pressing inwards to the right. – Remove the cover ››› Fig. 180 C by pulling – Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so on this. that the lug on the base fits into the recess – Remove connector ››› Fig. 181 1 from the on the reflector. bulb. – Press the spring ››› Fig. 181 2 inwards and Technical specifications Technical Main beam lights to the right. – Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that it sits correctly into the cut-out on the Fig. 183 Side light. reflector. – Installation involves all of the above steps – Raise the bonnet. Advice in reverse sequence. – Remove the cover ››› Fig. 182 D by pulling on this. Side lights – Extract the bulb holder ››› Fig. 183 1 outwards. – Replace the bulb by pulling it out and in- Fig. 180 Main beam headlight. serting the replacement. – Installation is done in the reverse order. Operation

Fig. 182 Side light. Safety

Fig. 181 Main beam headlight.

201 Advice

Side lights/ brake lights – Unscrew the plastic fitting ››› Fig. 185 B Turn signal light securing the tail light. Inserting a screw- 3 Applies to the model: ALTEA 3 Applies to the model: ALTEA driver under the plastic fitting may help to loosen it. – Partially remove the tail light from its cas- ing taking care not to pull on the cable. – Remove the bulb holder connector. – Unscrew the bolts ››› Fig. 186 C from the bulb holder and pull on this. – Press on the bulb and rotate to the left then fit the replacement.

Fig. 184 Side lights and brake lights. – To refit follow the steps in reverse order, Fig. 186 Turn signal light. taking special care when fitting the bulb holder. The metal contacts of the bulb holder ends should be correctly fitted with respect to the rear light contacts.

Fig. 185 Side lights and brake lights. Fig. 187 Turn signal light.

– Open the rear lid. – Remove the lamp from its housing ››› page 202. – Remove the bolts ››› Fig. 184 A . – Unscrew the bolts ››› Fig. 186 C from the – Remove the cover of the luggage compart- bulb holder and pull on this. ment lateral panel.

202 Fuses and bulbs

– Pull out the turn signal bulb holder using a Turn signal, side and brake lights on – Remove the blown bulb and change it for a screw driver in the direction of the arrow the body new one. ››› Fig. 187. 3 Applies to the model: ALTEA XL/ALTEA FREETRACK – To refit follow the steps in reverse order, – Fit the replacement bulb by pressing it taking special care when fitting the bulb down and rotating to the left. holder. – Installation involves all of the above steps

in reverse sequence. specifications Technical

Reverse light/rear fog light 3 Applies to the model: ALTEA Advice

Fig. 189 Lights on the vehicle body. Operation

Fig. 188 Lamp on interior side of bumper.

– Rotate the bulb holder to the left and remove it in the direction of the arrow Fig. 190 Lights on the vehicle body. ››› Fig. 188. – – Replace the bulb by pressing on it and ro- Open the cover of the luggage compart- Safety tating at the same time to the left ment side panel ››› Fig. 189. – Turn the bulb holder to the left ››› Fig. 190.

203 Advice

Position light, fog light and reverse – Take the lampholder out pressing on the Side turn signals light on the rear lid securing pins and extract it outwards. 3 Applies to the model: ALTEA XL/ALTEA FREETRACK – Remove the blown bulb and replace it with another. – To refit follow the steps in reverse order, taking special care when fitting the bulb holder.

Fog light and reverse lights B – Open the rear lid. – Pull the cover off. Fig. 193 Side turn signal. – Turn the bulb holder to the left. – Press the turn signal to the left or to the Fig. 191 Lights on the boot. – Remove the blown bulb and replace it with right to remove the bulb. another. – Remove the bulb holder from the turn sig- – Installation involves all of the above steps nal. in reverse sequence. – Remove the failed glass bulb and replace with a new bulb. – Insert the bulb holder in the turn signal guide until it clicks into place. – First place the turn signal in the opening in the bodywork, fixing the tabs ››› Fig. 193, arrow 1 . Fig. 192 Side light. – Insert the bulb as shown by the arrow 2 Side light A ››› Fig. 193. – Open the rear lid. – Pull the cover off.

204 Fuses and bulbs

Luggage compartment lights Registration light Registration light 3 Applies to the model: ALTEA 3 Applies to the model: ALTEA XL/ALTEA FREETRACK Technical specifications Technical

Fig. 194 Boot light. Advice Fig. 196 Number plate light. Fig. 198 Number plate light. Operation

Fig. 195 Boot light. Fig. 197 Number plate light. Fig. 199 Number plate light. – Extract the bulb by pressing on its inside edge -arrow- using the flat side of a screw- – Remove the bulb, carefully using the flat – Unscrew the screws to remove the bulb driver ››› Fig. 194. side of a screwdriver as a lever inserted in ››› Fig. 198. Safety the crack as shown by the arrow – Press the bulb sideways and remove it from – Remove the bulb, moving it outward and in ››› Fig. 196. its housing ››› Fig. 195. the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 199. – Remove the bulb, moving it outward and in – Installation involves all of the above steps the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 197. in reverse sequence. 205 Advice

Sun visor light

Fig. 200 Removing the sun visor light.

Fig. 201 Removing the sun visor light.

– Carefully remove the lamp, using the flat side of a screwdriver, as shown in the figure ››› Fig. 201. – Remove the bulb, moving it outward and in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 201.

206 Technical features

Technical specifications Ab- Meaning brevia- tion Technical features rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed. Important information Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

litres specifications Technical Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km (70 Important per miles). 100 km The information in the vehicle documentation Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per km always takes precedence over the informa- g/km (mile) travelled. tion in this Instruction Manual.

CO Carbon dioxide Advice All technical specifications provided in this 2 documentation are valid for the standard Cetane number, indication of the diesel com- CN model in Spain. The vehicle data card inclu- bustion power. ded in the Maintenance Programme or the Research octane number, indication of the RON vehicle registration documents shows which knock resistance of petrol. engine is installed in the vehicle. The figures may be different depending whether additional equipment is fitted, for different models, for special vehicles and for Operation other countries.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifications section

Ab- Meaning brevia- tion Safety

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly used to PS denote engine power. 207 Technical specifications

Vehicle identification data Vehicles for certain export countries do not Chassis number have an identification plate. The chassis number can be read from outside the vehicle through a viewer in the wind- Identification plate screen ››› Fig. 203. This is located on the left- The identification plate is located on the left hand side of the vehicle in the lower corner rib inside the engine compartment. of the windscreen. It is also located on the right hand side of the engine compartment. Vehicle data The data sticker is placed on the inside of the spare wheel well, in the boot and on the rear Information on fuel cover of the Maintenance Programme. consumption The following information is provided on the vehicle data sticker: ››› Fig. 202 Fuel consumption 1 Vehicle identification number (chassis The consumption and emission details number) shown on the vehicle data sticker differ from 2 Vehicle type, model, displacement, en- one vehicle to another. gine type, finish, engine power and gear- Fig. 202 Vehicle data sticker (boot). box type Vehicle fuel consumption and CO2 emissions can be consulted on the vehicle data sticker 3 Engine code, gearbox code, external in the spare wheel well, inside the boot and paint code and internal equipment code on the rear cover of the Maintenance Pro- 4 Optional extras and PR numbers gramme. 5 Consumption values (l/100 km) and CO 2 The fuel consumption and CO2 emission val- emissions (g/km) ues refer to the weight category assigned to A Urban cycle consumption your vehicle according to the engine and B Out-of-town consumption gearbox combination, as well as the specific equipment fitted, and is only used to com- C Combined consumption and CO2 pare between the different models. emissions Fig. 203 Chassis number. The fuel consumption and CO2 emissions do not depend only on the performance of the

208 Technical features vehicle, they can also differ from the estab- For special versions and optional equipment official vehicle documentation takes prece- lished values depending on other factors fittings or for the addition of accessories, the dence over these data at all times ››› . such as driving style, road conditions, traffic weight of the vehicle will increase ››› . conditions, environmental conditions, load Drawbar loads and number of passengers. WARNING The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ● Please note that the centre of gravity may ball joint of the towing bracket must not ex- Calculation of fuel consumption shift when transporting heavy objects; this ceed 75 kg. Technical specifications Technical The consumption values have been calcula- may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac- In the interest of road safety, we recommend ted based on measurements performed or cident. Always adjust your speed and driving that you always tow approaching the maxi- supervised by certified CE laboratories ac- style to suit road conditions and require- mum drawbar load. The response of the trail- cording to the latest version of directives ments. er on the road will be poor if the drawbar load 715/2007/EC and 80/1268/CEE (for more in- ● Never exceed the gross axle weight rating is too small. formation consult the European Union Publi- or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per- Advice cations Office at EUR-Lex: © European Union, missible axle load or the permissible total If the maximum permissible drawbar load http://eur-lex.europa.eu/en/index.htm) and weight is exceeded, the driving characteris- cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and tics of the vehicle may change, leading to ac- are valid for the kerb weight indicated for the light-weight single axle trailers or tandem cidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle. vehicle. axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1 metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer Note weight is legally required for the drawbar load. In practice, and considering all the factors Towing a trailer mentioned here, consumption values can differ from those calculated in the current Euro- Trailer weights WARNING Operation pean regulations. ● For safety reasons, you should not drive at Trailer weight speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing a trailer. This also applies in countries where The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap- higher speeds are permitted. Weights proved are selected in intensive trials according to precisely defined criteria. The ap- ● Never exceed the maximum trailer weights Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is excee- fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without the EU and generally, for maximum speeds of Safety ded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle optional extras. The figure quoted includes 80 km/h (50 mph) (in certain circumstances 75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver. may change, leading to accidents, injuries up to 100 km/h (62 mph)). The figures may and damage to the vehicle. be different in other countries. All data in the

209 Technical specifications

Wheels ● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen while the vehi- Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and bolts threads can be damaged. Tyre pressures Note The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the fuel tank flap. We recommend that you ask your Technical The tyre pressure values given there are for Service for information about appropriate cold tyres. Do not reduce the slightly raised wheel, tyre and snow chain size. pressures of warm tyres ››› .

Snow chains Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels. Consult the section “wheels” of this manual.

Wheel bolts After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench ››› . The tightening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING ● Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.

210 Technical features

Engine specifications

Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 PS)

Engine specifications

No. of cylinders/dis- Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Fuel placement (cm3) specifications Technical

LPG Petrol LPG Petrol Super 95 4/1,595 LPG RONa)/Normal 91 72 (98)/5,600 75 (102)/5,600 144/3,800 148/3,800 RONb) a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol. b) Slight power loss. Advice

ALTEA ALTEA ALTEA XL ALTEA XL Performance (LPG) (Petrol) (LPG) (Petrol)

Top speed (km/h) 178 181 178 181

Acceleration 0-80 km/h (seconds) 9.2 8.9 9.3 9.0

Acceleration 0-100 km/h (seconds) 13.8 13.2 14 13.4 Operation Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,951 1,951 2,039 2,039

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,456 1,456 1,495 1,495

Gross front axle weight 965 967 970 971

Gross rear axle weight 1,000 980 1,085 1,025 Safety Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg) Trailer without brakes 720 720 740 740 » 211 Technical specifications

ALTEA ALTEA ALTEA XL ALTEA XL Performance (LPG) (Petrol) (LPG) (Petrol)

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 1,500 1,500 1,500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200

212 Technical features

Petrol engine 1.2 77 kW (105 PS) Start-Stop

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

77 (105)/5,000 175/1,550-4,100 4/1,197 Super 95 RONa)/Normal 91 RONb) a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol. specifications Technical b) With a slight power loss

Performance ALTEA ALTEA XL

Top speed (km/h) 184 184

Acceleration 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.3 7.5 Advice

Acceleration 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.3 11.6

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,880 1,939

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,360 1,395

Gross front axle weight 970 980 Operation Gross rear axle weight 980 1,025

Permitted roof load 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 680 690

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,500 1,500 Safety Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,200 1,200

213 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

92 (125)/5,000 200/1,500-4,000 4/1,390 Super 95 RONa)/Normal 91 RONb)

a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol. b) With a slight power loss

Performance ALTEA ALTEA XL ALTEA FREETRACK

Top speed (km/h) 194 194 188

Acceleration 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.9 7.0 7.2

Acceleration 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.3 10.5 10.8

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,959 2,022 2,032

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,439 1,478 1,488

Gross front axle weight 1,008 1,004 1,010

Gross rear axle weight 987 1,036 1,035

Permitted roof load 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 710 730 740

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,500 1,500 1,500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,300 1,300 1,300

214 Technical features

Petrol engine 1.8 118 kW (160 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

118 (160)/4,500-6,200 250/1,500-4,500 4/1,798 Super 95 RONa)/Normal 91 RONb) a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol. specifications Technical b) With a slight power loss

Performance ALTEA ALTEA XL

Top speed (km/h) 210 210

Acceleration 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.8 6.0 Advice

Acceleration 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.4 8.6

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 2,015 2,069

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,495 1,525

Gross front axle weight 1,062 1,068 Operation Gross rear axle weight 994 1,043

Permitted roof load 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 740 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,500 1,500 Safety Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,400 1,400

215 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 2.0 155 kW (211 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

155 (211)/5,300-6,200 280/1,700-5,200 4/1,984 Super 95 RONa)/Normal 91 RONb)

a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol. b) With a slight power loss

ALTEA FREETRACK ALTEA FREETRACK Performance Front-wheel drive Four-wheel drive

Top speed (km/h) 220 218

Acceleration 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.5 5.3

Acceleration 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.7 7.6

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 2,150 2,205

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,606 1,661

Gross front axle weight 1,115 1,140

Gross rear axle weight 1,055 1,085

Permitted roof load 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 750 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,650 1,650

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,400 1,650

216 Technical features

Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 66 kW (90 PS) with/without DPF

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

Diesel according to standard DIN EN 590, 66 (90)/4,200 230/1,500-2,500 4/1,598 min. 51 CNa) Technical specifications Technical a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Performance ALTEA ALTEA XL

Top speed (km/h) 172 172

Acceleration 0-80 km/h (seconds) 9.1 9.3 Advice

Acceleration 0-100 km/h (seconds) 13.8 14.1

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,975 2,029

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,455 1,485

Gross front axle weight 1,045 1,040 Operation Gross rear axle weight 960 1,010

Permitted roof load 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 720 740

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,500 1,500 Safety Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,400 1,400

217 Technical specifications

Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) with/without DPF

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

Diesel according to standard DIN EN 590, 77 (105)/4,400 250/1,500-2,500 4/1,598 min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.

ALTEA ALTEA XL Performance Automatic gearbox Automatic gearbox

Top speed (km/h) 183 183

Acceleration 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8 8.1

Acceleration 0-100 km/h (seconds) 12.4 12.6

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,995 2,049

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,475 1,505

Gross front axle weight 1,065 1,060

Gross rear axle weight 960 1,010

Permitted roof load 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 730 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,500 1,500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,400 1,400

218 Technical features

Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) DPF Start-Stop

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

Diesel according to standard DIN EN 590, 77 (105)/4,400 250/1,500-2,500 4/1,598 min. 51 CNa) Technical specifications Technical a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Performance ALTEA ALTEA XL

Top speed (km/h) 183 183

Acceleration 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8 8.2 Advice

Acceleration 0-100 km/h (seconds) 12.2 12.4

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,970 2,024

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,450 1,480

Gross front axle weight 1,045 1,040 Operation Gross rear axle weight 960 1,010

Permitted roof load 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 720 740

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,500 1,500 Safety Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,400 1,400

219 Technical specifications

Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 103 kW (140 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

Diesel according to standard DIN EN 590, 103 (140)/4,200 320/1,750-2,500 4/1,968 min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.

ALTEA XL ALTEA FREETRACK Performance ALTEA ALTEA XL Four-wheel drive Four-wheel drive

Top speed (km/h) 201 201 198 193

Acceleration 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.6 6.7 6.9 6.9

Acceleration 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.7 9.8 10.1 10.2

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1,985 2,034 2,132 2,159

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,465 1,490 1,588 1,615

Gross front axle weight 1,065 1,070 1,090 1,110

Gross rear axle weight 955 1,020 1,080 1,070

Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weights (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 730 740 750 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,500 1,500 1,650 1,650

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,500 1,500 1,650 1,650

220 Technical features

Dimensions and capacities

Dimensions

ALTEA ALTEA XL ALTEA FREETRACK

Length / Width (mm) 4,282/1,768 4,467/1,768 4,493/1,778

Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,546 1,575 1,615 specifications Technical

Front and rear projections (mm) 916/788 913/976 940/977

Wheelbase (mm) 2,578 2,578 2,578

Turning radius (m) 10.7 10.7 10.7

Front/reara) track width (mm) 1,525/1,509 1,527/1,506 1,534/1,519 Advice 1,539/1,523 1,541/1,520 1,542/1,527 a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

Capacities

Vehicles with front-wheel drive Vehicles with four-wheel drive Fuel tank (I) 55 - Reserve 7 60 - Reserve 8 Operation LPG Fuel tank (I) 39

Windscreen washer fluid container/with headlight washer (I) 3/5.5

Tyre pressure

Summer-grade tyres:

The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap. Safety

Winter tyres: The pressure of these tyres is 0.2 bar higher than that of summer tyres (2.9 psi/20 kPa).

221

Index

Anti-theft alarm system ...... 68 Boot hatch ...... 71 Index Interior monitoring ...... 70 control lamp ...... 45 Switching off ...... 69 Emergency opening ...... 194 A Tow-away protection ...... 70 Boot lid ...... 71 ABS ...... 136 Anti-theft wheel bolts ...... 184 Emergency opening ...... 194 control lamp ...... 41 Antifreeze ...... 169 Brake fluid ...... 172 Accessories ...... 147 Aquaplaning ...... 177 Changing ...... 172 Acoustic warning ...... 120 Ashtray ...... 98 control lamp ...... 49 Adaptive headlights ...... 80 Aspects to note before setting off ...... 5 Brake pads ...... 123 Adjusting the seat belt height ...... 16 ASR ...... 137 Brake pedal AFS (cornering lights) ...... 80 Control lamp ...... 46 Control lamp ...... 46 Airbag covers ...... 20 Audible warning ...... 12 Brakes ...... 123 Airbags Automatic anti-dazzle interior rear vision mirror Worn brake pads ...... 42 description ...... 18 Activating the anti-dazzle function ...... 86 Brake servo ...... 123, 138 Airbag system ...... 17, 20 Deactivating the anti-dazzle function ...... 86 Brake system ...... 172 activation ...... 18 Automatic car wash tunnel ...... 149 Brakes ...... 123 control lamp ...... 19 Automatic gearbox Brake servo ...... 123 functioning ...... 18 Kick-down feature ...... 130 warning lamp ...... 44 head-protection airbags ...... 22 Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gearbox . . . 127 Bulb defect side airbags ...... 21 Automatic lighting ...... 76 Control lamp ...... 44 Air conditioner Automatic windscreen wiping ...... 84 Buzzer ...... 77, 120 2C-Climatronic ...... 112 Automatic wipe with rain sensor ...... 84 General notes ...... 116 Auxiliary audio input: AUX-IN ...... 99 C Air conditioner automatic mode Car care 2C-Climatronic ...... 113 B Exterior ...... 149 Air conditioning ...... 109 Ball coupling ...... 145 Car care products ...... 148 Air recirculation mode Battery ...... 68 Catalytic converter ...... 131 2C-Climatronic ...... 115 Changing ...... 174 CCS ...... 142 Manual air conditioner ...... 111 Charging ...... 174 CD changer ...... 93 Alarm system Winter conditions ...... 173 Central lock button Switching off ...... 69 Before setting off ...... 5 Locking ...... 65 Alcantara ...... 154 Belt tightening ...... 16 Unlocking ...... 65 All-wheel drive ...... 117 Biodiesel ...... 160 Central locking ...... 63 Alternator Biodiesel fuel ...... 160 Automatic locking system for involuntary un- Warning lamp ...... 42 Bonnet ...... 165 locking ...... 65 Anti-lock brake system ...... 136 Automatic speed-dependent locking and un- control lamp ...... 41 locking system ...... 64 223 Index

Emergency unlocking system ...... 65 Child seats ...... 26 Coolant temperature Selective unlocking system ...... 64 ISOFIX system ...... 27 control lamp ...... 40 Unlocking system ...... 64 safety instructions ...... 25 Gauge ...... 34 Centre armrest ...... 93 Top Tether system ...... 27 Safety instructions ...... 40 Cetane number ...... 160 Cigarette lighter ...... 98 Cornering lights Changing gear Cleaning alloy wheel rims ...... 152 Dynamic ...... 80 see Manual gearbox ...... 126 Cleaning chrome ...... 152 Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints . . 9 Changing gear in Tiptronic mode ...... 129 Cleaning engine compartment ...... 153 Correct adjustment of rear seat head restraints Changing the bulbs Cleaning exterior mirrors ...... 151 In-use and non-use positions ...... 10 Main headlight bulbs ...... 200 Cleaning plastic parts ...... 156 Correct sitting position Changing the lights Cleaning steel wheel rims ...... 152 front passenger ...... 8 general remarks ...... 198 Cleaning the instrument panel ...... 156 Incorrect sitting position ...... 9 Changing the main headlight bulbs Cleaning windows ...... 151 passenger ...... 8 Main beam lights ...... 201 Climatic ...... 109 Cruise control Side lights ...... 201 Climatronic Complete system deactivation ...... 144 Turn signal bulbs ...... 200 General notes ...... 116 Control lamp ...... 45 Changing the main headlight lamps Clock ...... 35 Cruise control system ...... 142 dipped lights ...... 200 Clothes hook ...... 95 Cruise speed ...... 142 Changing the tail light bulbs Coming/Leaving Home function ...... 79 Control lamp ...... 45 Position light, fog light and tail light on the Compartment for on-board documentation . . . . . 93 rear lid ...... 204 control lamp ...... 19 D Changing the tail lights Control lamps ...... 35 Dangers in not using the seat belt ...... 13 Luggage compartment lights ...... 205 Controls Dash panel ...... 31 Rear fog light ...... 203 electric windows ...... 72 Daytime driving lights ...... 78 Reverse light ...... 203 Exterior mirrors ...... 87 Daytime running lights Side lights ...... 202 Sliding/tilting sunroof ...... 74 Nordic countries ...... 78 Turn signal light ...... 202 Convenience closing Deactivating front passenger airbags Turn signal, side and brake lights on the body . . .203 sliding/tilting sunroof ...... 74 safety instructions ...... 24 Changing windscreen wiper blades ...... 194 Windows ...... 73 Deactivating the airbag Chassis number ...... 208 Convenience opening Front passenger front airbag ...... 23 Checking ...... 174 Windows ...... 73 Diesel ...... 160 Checking battery electrolyte level ...... 174 Coolant ...... 170 Diesel engine Checking engine oil level ...... 167 control lamp ...... 49 Winter operation ...... 160 Child safety ...... 24 Coolant fluid ...... 169 Diesel engine particulate filter ...... 132 Child seat Coolant level ...... 170 Differential lock ...... 135 Categorisation in groups ...... 26 control lamp ...... 40 Differential lock fault (EDL) Coolant loss ...... 170 control lamp ...... 46 224 Index

Digital clock ...... 35 E Engine oil pressure Dipped beam headlights ...... 75 control lamp ...... 44, 49 Display (without warning or information texts) . . 47 EDL ...... 135 Environment ...... 132 Disposal control lamp ...... 41 Environmental friendliness ...... 131 Seat belt tensioners ...... 16 Electric power steering Environmental tip Door lock ...... 152 Control lamp ...... 45 Avoiding pollution ...... 159 Door lock cylinder ...... 152 Electric windows ...... 72 Equipment ...... 147 Door lock handle ...... 152 Electronic differential lock ...... 135 ESC ...... 45, 134 Door release lever ...... 31 control lamp ...... 41 see also Electronic Stability Control ...... 134 Doors Electronic immobiliser ...... 46, 121 Example of menu use Childproof locks ...... 66 Electronic Stability Control ...... 45 Open the Configuration menu with the steer- control lamp ...... 45 description ...... 134 ing wheel controls ...... 50 Drawer ...... 94 Emergency braking warning ...... 81, 136 Program a speed limit warning ...... 50 Driver Emergency manual locking ...... 193 To activate and deactivate the speed limit see Correct sitting position ...... 6, 8 Emergency opening warning ...... 50 Driveshaft differential Doors ...... 69 Example of the use of the menus XDS ...... 137 Emission control system Open the Configuration menu with the MFI Drive wheel traction control system (ASR) . . . . . 137 control lamp ...... 45 lever ...... 50 Driving Engine Examples of menu use Economically/with Respect for the Environ- Running in ...... 130 Open the main menu ...... 50 ment ...... 132 Engine compartment ...... 165 Open the winter tyres menu ...... 50 journeys abroad ...... 120 Working in the engine compartment ...... 163 To close the winter tyres menu ...... 50 steering lock ...... 120 Engine coolant Exhaust gas emission control system ...... 131 With a trailer ...... 145 G 12 plus-plus ...... 169 Driving abroad G 13 ...... 169 F Specifications ...... 169 Headlights ...... 120 Fastening rings ...... 103 Engine coolant fluid ...... 169 Driving Economically ...... 132 Filling the tank ...... 158 Engine fault Driving programmes ...... 127 Fire extinguisher ...... 100 Control lamp ...... 41 Driving safety ...... 5 First-aid kit ...... 100 Engine management Driving with automatic gearbox/DSG automatic Flexible service interval display ...... 48 control lamp ...... 41 gearbox ...... 128 Floor mats ...... 11 Engine oil ...... 166 Driving with Respect for the Environment . . . . . 132 Fog lights ...... 76 Changing ...... 169 Duplicate keys ...... 67 Fog lights with cornering function ...... 81 Checking engine oil level ...... 167 Dust filter ...... 116 Folding table ...... 94 Oil properties ...... 167 Dynamic headlight range control ...... 79 Folding the seat backrest ...... 92 Specifications ...... 166 Front airbags ...... 20 Topping up ...... 168 safety instructions ...... 20 Engine oil dipstick ...... 167 225 Index

Front drinks holders ...... 95 H Information on the multi-function display Front interior light On-screen display ...... 52 Switch off light ...... 82 Handbrake ...... 124 Instrument and switch lighting ...... 79 Switch on light ...... 82 Control lamp ...... 44 Instrument lighting ...... 31 Front passenger airbag deactivation ...... 23 warning lamp ...... 124 Instrument panel menu Front reading lights ...... 82 Hazard warning lights ...... 81 Lights and visibility menu ...... 56 Front seat adjustment HBA ...... 136 Instrument panel menus Lumbar support adjustment ...... 89 Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . . . 13 Configuration menu ...... 54 Fuel Head-protection airbags ...... 22 Example of menu use ...... 50 Diesel ...... 160 safety instructions ...... 22 Main menu ...... 50 Petrol ...... 159 Headlight flashers ...... 77 Vehicle status menu ...... 54 Fuel consumption ...... 132, 208 Headlight range control ...... 79 Instruments ...... 32 Fuel level Headlights Interior lights ...... 82 Indicator ...... 33 Driving abroad ...... 120 Interior monitoring ...... 70 Fuel reserve ...... 40 fog lights ...... 76 Activation ...... 69 Warning message ...... 49 Headlight washer ...... 86 Deactivation ...... 69 Fuel tank Head restraints Interior rear vision mirror ...... 86 see Fuel reserve ...... 40 Adjusting ...... 90 Intermittent windscreen wipe ...... 84 Fuel Tank Adjustment of the head restraint angle ...... 90 ISOFIX system ...... 27 Opening the fuel tank flap ...... 158 Correct adjustment ...... 90 Fuel: saving ...... 132 Removing ...... 90 J Heated front seats ...... 91 Fuses ...... 196 Jack position points Heated rear window Fuse box ...... 197 Sill panel trim ...... 185 2C-Climatronic ...... 113 Identifying blown fuses ...... 198 Journeys abroad ...... 120 heating element wires ...... 151 Identifying by colours ...... 197 Jump-starting ...... 189 Heating ...... 107 Preparation before replacing ...... 198 Jump leads ...... 189 Replacement ...... 198 High pressure cleaners ...... 150 Hill driving assistant ...... 125 K G Horn ...... 31 How to jump start description ...... 190 Keys ...... 66 Gear shift pattern ...... 126 Hydraulic Brake Assist ...... 136 General overview of the engine compartment . . 166 L Glove compartment ...... 93 I Lifting the seat backrest ...... 92 Glow plug system ...... 122 Lifting the vehicle ...... 185 Control lamp ...... 41 Identification number ...... 208 Identification plate ...... 208 Lights ...... 75 Ignition ...... 120 general remarks ...... 198 Ignition lock ...... 120 Load compartment in the luggage compartment Information messages in the display ...... 49 see Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . 101 226 Index

Loading the luggage compartment ...... 101 O Puncture repair ...... 186 Locking gear in Tiptronic mode ...... 129 LPG ...... 33, 118, 160 Octane number ...... 159 R Odometer ...... 48 LPG system Rack ...... 104 Oil ...... 166 Driving ...... 118 Radio frequency remote control ...... 67 Oil change ...... 169 Gauge ...... 33 Changing the battery ...... 68 Oil properties ...... 167 Refuelling ...... 160 Radio navigation controls on the steering wheel One-touch opening and closing LPG System filler neck Audio + telephone version ...... 61 Electric windows ...... 72 Filler neck adapter ...... 162 Rain sensor ...... 84 Opening and closing ...... 71 Luggage compartment ...... 101 Raising the vehicle ...... 185 Outside temperature indicator ...... 54 see also Loading the luggage compartment . 101 Rear cup holder Overview ...... 31 Luggage compartment net ...... 104 Armrests ...... 95 control lamps ...... 38 Rear fog light Control lamps ...... 35 M control lamp ...... 40, 76 Dash panel ...... 31 Main beam ...... 75, 77 Control lamp ...... 76 Instruments ...... 32 Main beam headlights Rear interior lights ...... 83 warning lamps ...... 38 control lamp ...... 41 Rear reading lights ...... 83 Warning lamps ...... 35 Main headlight bulbs ...... 200 Rear seats ...... 92 Maintenance and cleaning ...... 147 P Rear shelf ...... 102 Manual gearbox ...... 126 Storage compartment ...... 101 Manual mode Parking ...... 125 Rear window automatic wiper/washer ...... 85 2C-Climatronic ...... 114 Parking aid acoustic system ...... 140 Rear window wiper ...... 85 MEDIA-IN connector ...... 100 Parking lights ...... 77 Recommended gear ...... 47 Mirrors Parking system ...... 140 Recommended gear display ...... 47 Exterior mirrors ...... 87 Parking System Plus ...... 141 Refuelling ...... 158 Interior rear vision mirror ...... 86 Passenger Registration light ...... 205 Vanity mirrors ...... 83 see Correct sitting position ...... 6, 8 Remote control key Mobile phones and two-way radios ...... 148 Pedals ...... 11 Buttons ...... 67 Multi-purpose mobile storage compartment Petrol ...... 159 Synchronising ...... 68 Closing ...... 96 journeys abroad ...... 120 Removing and fitting the wheel ...... 186 Fitting ...... 97 Petrol additives ...... 159 Replacement keys ...... 67 Functions ...... 96 Plastic parts ...... 151 Replacement of parts ...... 147 Opening ...... 96 Pollen filter ...... 116 Rev counter ...... 32 Removal ...... 97 Pollution filter ...... 116 Reverse gear Power ...... 99 Manual gearbox ...... 126 N Power sockets ...... 99 Power steering ...... 117 Number of seats ...... 11 Products for vehicle maintenance ...... 149 227 Index

Roll-back function Seat belt protection ...... 12 Start-Stop Sliding/tilting sunroof ...... 75 Seat belt release ...... 15 Activating and deactivating ...... 139 Windows ...... 73 Seat belts ...... 11 functioning ...... 138 Roof aerial ...... 147 Adjustment ...... 14 Starting petrol engines ...... 121, 122 Roof carrier control lamp ...... 11 Starting the engine ...... 121, 122 attachment points ...... 105 Safety notes ...... 13 after the fuel tank has been run dry ...... 122 Roof carrier system ...... 104 unfastened ...... 13 Steam jets ...... 150 Roof rack ...... 104 Seat belts cleaning ...... 157 Steering ...... 7 Roof storage compartment ...... 94 Seat belt tensioner Steering wheel audio controls Rubber seals ...... 151 control lamp ...... 19 Audio version ...... 57 Run-flat tyres ...... 178 Seat belt tensioners ...... 16 Audio + telephone version ...... 57 Running in Seat heating ...... 91 Steering wheel height adjustment ...... 7 Engine ...... 130 Seat upholstery Stopping distance ...... 123 Alcantara ...... 154 Storage compartment S cleaning Alcantara ...... 154 Centre armrest ...... 93 Safe - security system ...... 64 Cleaning and maintenance of natural leather 156 Front passenger side ...... 93 Safe driving ...... 5 cleaning the trim fabric ...... 154 Front seats ...... 94 Safety ...... 5 synthetic leather ...... 156 Lock ...... 101 child safety ...... 24 Selecting a gear ...... 126 Other storage compartments ...... 95 child seats ...... 24 Selective opening ...... 64 Storage in the boot floor ...... 104 Safety equipment ...... 5 Selector lever locking ...... 127 Sun blind ...... 83 Safety instructions Selector lever positions ...... 127 Sun visor Coolant temperature ...... 40 servotronic ...... 117 Sliding/tilting sunroof ...... 74 deactivating front passenger airbags ...... 24 Side airbags ...... 21 Sun visors ...... 83 front airbags ...... 20 safety instructions ...... 21 Switch head-protection airbags ...... 22 Side lights ...... 75 Hazard warning lights ...... 81 side airbags ...... 21 Sitting position Light switch ...... 75 using child seats ...... 25 driver ...... 6 Switches Safety notes Sitting position, occupants ...... 6 electric windows ...... 72 Seat belt tensioners ...... 16 Sliding/tilting sunroof ...... 74 Switching off the engine ...... 122 Using seat belts ...... 13 Snow chains ...... 181, 210 Switch lighting ...... 31 Seals ...... 151 Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particu- Seat adjustment ...... 88, 89, 92 late filter T Seat belt control lamp ...... 11 control lamp ...... 41 Tank Seat belt position Spare parts ...... 147 Fuel level ...... 33 for pregnant women ...... 15 Spare wheel ...... 182 Reserve indicator ...... 33 Seat belts ...... 15 Speed selector lever lock Tank capacity ...... 33 Control lamp ...... 46 228 Index

Tank flap ...... 158 Tyre mobility system ...... 186 synthetic leather ...... 156 Technical modifications ...... 147 Tyre Mobility System trim fabrics ...... 154 Tightening torque of wheel bolts ...... 210 see tyre mobility system ...... 186 unheated seats ...... 155 Tilting sunroof ...... 74 Tyre pressure ...... 175 Vehicle modifications ...... 147 Tire Mobility Set Loss ...... 176 Vehicle paintwork Check after 10 minutes ...... 189 Tyre pressure control lamp ...... 43 Maintenance ...... 150 Do not use ...... 187 Tyre pressure monitoring ...... 176 polishing ...... 150 Inflating a tyre ...... 188 Tyre pressures ...... 210 Products for vehicle maintenance ...... 148 Sealing a tyre ...... 188 Tyre repair set Vehicle tools Tools ...... 181 see tyre mobility system ...... 186 Storage ...... 181 Top Tether system ...... 27 Tyres and wheels Vehicle washing ...... 149 Tow-away protection ...... 70 Dimensions ...... 179 Ventilation slits ...... 101 Tow-starting ...... 191 Tyres tread depth ...... 177 Towing ...... 191 Tyres useful life ...... 177 W Towing a trailer ...... 209 Tyres with directional tread pattern ...... 175 Warning lamps ...... 35 Towing bracket ...... 145, 192 Warning messages Towing bracket, fitting ...... 146 U Red ...... 38, 49 Towing hook ...... 191 Underbody protection ...... 152 Yellow ...... 39, 49 Towline anchorage ...... 191 Unlocking and locking ...... 71 Warning messages in the display ...... 49 Towline anchorages ...... 192 Personalisation ...... 65 Warning symbols ...... 38 Tow starting Upholstery Warning triangle ...... 100 General notes ...... 191 Treating your upholstery ...... 154 Washer fluid ...... 171 Traction control system (ASR) Washing by hand ...... 149 control lamp ...... 46 V Washing the vehicle ...... 149 Trailer Vehicle battery ...... 173 Washing with high pressure cleaners ...... 150 Trailer towing ...... 144 Vehicle care Water Trailer turn signals Treating your upholstery ...... 154 Warning message ...... 50 control lamp ...... 77 Vehicle data ...... 208 Water in the windscreen washer tank ...... 171 Trailer weights ...... 209 Vehicle identification data ...... 208 Wear indicators ...... 177 Transporting children ...... 24 Vehicle identification number ...... 208 Wearing suitable shoes ...... 11 Transporting objects Vehicle maintenance Wheel bolts ...... 184, 210 Roof carrier system ...... 104 electrically adjustable seats ...... 154 Tightening torque ...... 180 Tread depth ...... 177 heated seats ...... 154 Wheel change ...... 182 Turn signals ...... 77 natural leather ...... 156 Wheels ...... 175, 210 control lamp ...... 41, 77 non-electrically adjustable seats ...... 155 Wheel trims ...... 183 Tyre mobility set seats with airbag components ...... 154 Why assume the correct sitting position? ...... 17 Components ...... 187 seats without airbag components ...... 155 Why should head restraints be correctly adjusted? 9 229 Index

Why wear seat belts? ...... 11, 17 Windows ...... 72 Windscreen washer fluid Control lamp ...... 42 Windscreen wiper blades cleaning ...... 151 Windscreen wipers ...... 84 Changing blades ...... 194 Changing the rear wiper blade ...... 195, 196 Winter operation Diesel engine ...... 160 Winter tyres ...... 180 Wooden trim cleaning ...... 157 Working in the engine compartment ...... 163

230

About this manual ® All registered marks are indicated with This manual is divided into five large parts, ®. Although the copyright symbol does which are: This manual contains a description of the not appear, it is a copyrighted mark. 1. Safety equipment supplied with the vehicle at the >> The section is continued on the follow- 2. Operation time this manual was published. Some of the ing page. 3. Tips units described herein will not be available until a later date or are only available in cer- WARNING 4. Technical data tain markets. Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor- 5. Alphabetical index Because this is a general manual for the mation on safety. They warn you about possi- At the end of this manual, there is a detailed ALTEA range, some of the equipment and ble dangers of accident or injury. alphabetical index that will help you quickly functions that are described in this manual find the information you require. are not included in all types or variants of the CAUTION model; they may vary or be modified depend- Texts with this symbol draw your attention to ing on the technical requirements and on the potential sources of damage to your vehicle. market; this is in no way deceptive advertis- ing. For the sake of the environment The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment fitted Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele- in your vehicle in some details. vant information concerning environmental protection. The steering indications (left, right, forward, SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under- reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the Note stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. cept when otherwise indicated. Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error * The equipment marked with an aster- or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. isk* is fitted as standard only in certain Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. versions, and is only supplied as op- SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act. tional extras for some versions, or are only offered in certain countries. All rights on changes are reserved. ❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.14 OWNER’S MANUAL Altea 5P0012720BC Inglés (11.14)

5P0012720BC (11.14) (GT9)

Inglés Altea